JP2017164184A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can suppress the deterioration of an image quality even though a focus adjustment is frequently carried out, avoiding discomfort for an image.SOLUTION: A projector device includes a focus mechanism, a control LSI and sub CPU which control the focus mechanism every time project screens are switched, and a temperature sensor. Every time the project screens are switched, the control LSI and the sub CPU adjust a focus position by the focus mechanism on the basis of preset offset information, and adjust the focus position by the focus mechanism by means of a drift calibration according to a temperature detected by the temperature sensor.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 160

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine or a pachinko machine.

  Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays video for games (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

JP-A-6-35066 JP 2009-240459 A

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, for example, as the frequency of focus adjustment increases, the focus may be greatly deviated, and the image quality of the projected image may gradually deteriorate with the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress image quality deterioration and eliminate image discomfort even when focus adjustment is frequently performed. And

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A projection device (for example, projector device B2) capable of projecting an image on a plurality of projection surfaces (for example, the reflection surfaces of the reflecting portions D1 to D4, the projection surface E11a, the projection surface F1a, etc.), Projection plane drive mechanisms (for example, a front screen drive mechanism E2 and a reel screen drive mechanism F2) that switch by displacing at least one projection plane (for example, the projection plane E11a, the projection plane F1a, etc.) relative to the projection apparatus. Etc.) (for example, gaming machine 1 etc.)
The projector is
A focus mechanism (for example, a focus mechanism 242 of the projection lens 210) for projecting an image on each of the plurality of projection surfaces;
Focus adjustment means (for example, control LSI 230 of projector control board B23, sub CPU 400 of sub control board SS) that adjusts the focus mechanism each time at least one of the plurality of projection planes is switched by the projection plane driving mechanism. Etc.)
An internal temperature detecting means for detecting the internal temperature (for example, temperature sensor B25),
The focus adjustment unit adjusts the focus position by the focus mechanism based on preset offset information every time the projection plane is switched, and the focus adjustment unit adjusts the focus according to the temperature detected by the internal temperature detection unit. The focus position by the mechanism is adjusted.

  According to such a configuration, the focus position is adjusted based on the offset information every time the projection plane is switched. At this time, for example, the focus position is adjusted with high accuracy by drift correction according to temperature. When the focus adjustment is frequently performed in a situation where the change occurs, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the image quality and to eliminate the discomfort of the video.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The projector is
Video position changing means (for example, control LSI 230 of projector control board B23, sub CPU 400 of sub control board SS, etc.) capable of changing the position of the video projected on the projection plane;
The image position changing means adjusts the position of an image to be projected based on position information in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction each time the projection plane is switched.

  According to such a configuration, the horizontal and vertical positions of the projected image are adjusted each time the projection plane is switched, so that the projection position of the video with respect to each projection plane can be set appropriately.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suppress deterioration in image quality and eliminate image discomfort even when focus adjustment is frequently performed.

It is a front perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a back surface perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a front view of a gaming machine when the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism are opened. It is a disassembled perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a display unit. It is an upper perspective view of a projector apparatus. It is a perspective view when a display unit is attached to a cabinet. It is a downward perspective view of a projector apparatus. It is a front view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is a left side exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is a right side exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is a back perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a fixed screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a reel screen mechanism. It is a disassembled perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is a perspective view of a reel screen mechanism. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a projector apparatus. It is a whole perspective view of a projector apparatus. It is a disassembled perspective view of a projector apparatus. It is a figure which shows the lens unit of a projector apparatus. It is a top view which shows the upper base and lower base for fixing a projector apparatus. FIG. 26 is a cross-sectional view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal along the line XXVI-XXVI in FIG. 25. It is a disassembled perspective view of an upper base and a lower base. It is a figure for demonstrating the positioning method of an upper base. It is a figure for demonstrating the attitude | position adjustment method of a lower side base. It is a figure which shows the connection form of a projector apparatus and adjustment PC. It is a perspective view which shows the case of a projector apparatus. It is a perspective view which shows the state which has arrange | positioned the heat sink and the optical element in the case of a projector apparatus. It is a figure for demonstrating the air flow path formed in the case of a projector apparatus. It is a front view which shows the inside of a cabinet. It is a side view of the cabinet of the state which opened the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism. It is a disassembled perspective view of a lower door mechanism. It is a block diagram which shows the system configuration | structure of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a main control board. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a sub control board. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a reel drive board | substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a door relay board | substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a sub relay board | substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a scaler board | substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a multi-output scaler LSI. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a sub liquid crystal I / F board | substrate. It is a schematic diagram which shows the division | segmentation display pattern of a projector apparatus and a sub liquid crystal display device. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 1 of a division | segmentation display pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 2 of a division | segmentation display pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 3 of a division | segmentation display pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 4 of a division | segmentation display pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 5 of a division | segmentation display pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 6 of a division | segmentation display pattern. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the communication specification of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the command exchanged between a scaler board | substrate and a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the command exchanged between a sub liquid crystal I / F board | substrate and a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the command exchanged between a projector control board-sub control board. It is a figure which shows the error information transmitted as a command from each board | substrate. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map of PC for adjustment. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of power activation of a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption process of a main control board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map 1 of a sub control board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map 2 of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of power activation of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the LED control task of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the sound control task of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the screen accessory control task of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the screen accessory control process of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the focus change request process of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main task of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main board | substrate communication task of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the animation task of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the subdevice task of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the subdevice reception interruption process of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the subdevice initialization process of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the scaler control process of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the scaler control reception of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the scaler starting parameter request | requirement reception of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the scaler setting change process of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the scaler status command reception of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the scaler reception confirmation reception process of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the sub liquid crystal control process of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of sub liquid crystal control reception of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the sub liquid crystal starting parameter request | requirement reception of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the sub liquid crystal setting change process of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of sub liquid crystal status command reception of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the sub liquid crystal reception confirmation reception process of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the projector control process of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the projector control reception of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the projector starting parameter request | requirement reception of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the projector setting change process of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the reception confirmation reception of the projector of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the projector error notification reception of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the projector status reception of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the projector drift correction process of a sub control board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map 1 of a scaler board | substrate. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map 2 of a scaler board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a scaler board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st serial line reception interruption process of a scaler board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process of a scaler board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the subdevice bypass transmission process of a scaler board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the sub-control-scaler reception of a scaler board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the self-diagnosis process of a scaler board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the sub control-scaler transmission of a scaler board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the sub control bypass transmission process of a scaler board | substrate. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map of a projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the projector control main process of a projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the serial line reception interruption process of a projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process of a projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of sub control-projector reception of a projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the internal setting change process of a projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the projector setting value storage process of a projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the self-diagnosis process of a projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of sub control-projector transmission of a projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the status transmission data creation process of a projector control board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map of a sub liquid crystal I / F board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the sub liquid crystal control main process of a sub liquid crystal I / F board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the serial line reception interruption process of a sub liquid crystal I / F board. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process of a sub liquid crystal I / F board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of sub-liquid crystal I / F board | substrate sub control-sub liquid crystal reception. It is a flowchart which shows the self-diagnosis process of a sub liquid crystal I / F board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the transmission process between the sub control of sub liquid crystal I / F board | substrate, and sub liquid crystal. It is a figure which shows the adjustment screen at the time of the optical adjustment of a projector apparatus. It is a figure which shows the adjustment screen at the time of the optical adjustment of a projector apparatus. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the 1st modification of a projector apparatus. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the 2nd modification of a projector apparatus. It is a front view which shows the arrangement | positioning form of the projector apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the projector apparatus applied to the modification after a 4th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the projector control main process of the projector control board which concerns on a 4th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the self-diagnosis process of the projector control board which concerns on a 4th modification. It is a figure which shows the LED temperature control table and FAN temperature control table with which the projector control board concerning the 4th modification was equipped. It is a figure which shows the FAN temperature control table with which the projector control board concerning the 5th modification was equipped. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the projector error notification reception of the sub control board concerning a 6th modification. It is a figure which shows the FAN temperature rotation speed control table with which the projector control board concerning the 7th modification was equipped. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the sub control-projector transmission of the projector control board which concerns on an 8th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the projector initialization process of the projector control board which concerns on an 8th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the projector control process of the sub control board concerning a 9th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the projector control reception of the sub control board concerning a 10th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the projector drift correction process of the sub control board concerning a 10th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the projector setting change process of the sub control board concerning a 10th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the focus origin adjustment instruction | indication transmission process of the sub control board concerning a 10th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the projector control process of the sub control board | substrate which concerns on a 10th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the focus origin adjustment determination process of the sub control board concerning a 10th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the production content determination process of the sub control board which concerns on an 11th modification. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image | video projected by the projector apparatus which concerns on an 11th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the production content determination process of the sub control board which concerns on a 12th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the production content determination process of the sub control board which concerns on a 13th modification. It is a figure which shows the drift correction temperature table with which the sub control board concerning the 14th modification was equipped. It is a flowchart which shows the projector drift correction process of the sub control board | substrate which concerns on a 14th modification. It is a figure which shows the drift correction temperature table with which the sub control board concerning the 15th modification was equipped. It is a flowchart which shows the demo command transmission process of the main control board which concerns on a 15th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the game state which concerns on a 16th modification. It is a figure which shows the focus adjustment frequency setting table with which the sub control board concerning the 17th modification was equipped. It is a flowchart which shows the production content determination process of the sub control board which concerns on a 17th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the focus origin adjustment determination process of the sub control board | substrate which concerns on an 18th modification. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence at the time of starting with the projector apparatus and sub CPU which concern on a 19th modification. It is a figure which shows the command exchanged in the communication sequence at the time of starting with the projector apparatus and sub CPU which concern on a 19th modification. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence at the time of normal operation | movement with the projector apparatus and sub CPU which concern on a 19th modification. It is a figure which shows the command exchanged in the communication sequence at the time of normal operation | movement with the projector apparatus and sub CPU which concern on a 19th modification. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence at the time of the screen switching of the projector apparatus which concerns on a 19th modification, and sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the command exchanged in the communication sequence at the time of the screen switching of the projector apparatus which concerns on a 19th modification, and sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main control main process performed in the main control board of the pachinko machine concerning the 20th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the system timer interruption process performed in the main control board of the pachinko machine concerning the 20th modification.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the gaming machine 1 is a so-called pachislot machine. The gaming machine 1 can be played using coins, medals, game balls, tokens, and the like, as well as game media such as a card storing game value information assigned to or attached to a player. In the following description, medals are used.

  In the following description, the side (direction) from the gaming machine 1 toward the player is referred to as the front side (front direction) of the gaming machine 1, and the opposite side to the front side is referred to as the rear side (rear direction, depth direction). The right side and the left side when viewed from the player are referred to as the right side (right direction) and the left side (left direction) of the gaming machine 1, respectively. The direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as the front-rear direction or the thickness direction, and the direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as the left-right direction or the width direction. The direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction (thickness direction) and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as the up-down direction or the height direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the appearance of the gaming machine 1 is constituted by a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. The housing 2 includes a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side as a gaming machine main body, an upper door mechanism UD disposed at the upper front of the cabinet G, and a lower disposed at the lower front of the cabinet G. And a door mechanism DD.

  In addition, two openings G41 penetrating in the vertical direction are formed in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G at a predetermined interval in the horizontal direction. A wooden plate member G42 is attached to the upper surface wall G4 so as to close each of the two openings G41.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided so that the upper part and the lower part of the opening in the cabinet G can be closed. The upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 at the center. The upper display window UD1 is provided with a transparent panel UD11 that transmits light.

  The lower door mechanism DD is provided with a main display window DD4 formed as a rectangular opening at a substantially upper central portion. A reel unit RU attached from the inside of the cabinet G is mounted on the back side of the main display window DD4. Further, a main control board MS is attached to the back surface of the reel unit RU.

  The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels RL (left reel), RC (middle reel), and RR (right reel) each having a plurality of types of symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface thereof. These reels RL, RC, RR are arranged in parallel (one horizontal row) so that each of them can rotate in the vertical direction at a constant speed. The reels RL, RC, RR can visually recognize the operations of the reels RL, RC, RR and the symbols drawn on the reels RL, RC, RR through the main display window DD4.

  A transparent panel DD41 made of a rectangular acrylic plate or the like is attached and fixed to the surface of the main display window DD4 so that a player or the like cannot touch the reel unit RU. Below the main display window DD4, first, second and third pedestals DD2a, DD2b and DD2c having substantially horizontal surfaces are formed. The first pedestal portion DD2a located on the right side of the main display window DD4 is provided with a medal insertion slot DD5 for inserting medals. The medal insertion port DD5 is an opening through which a medal is inserted by the player. The medal inserted from the medal slot DD5 is credited or bet on the game.

  The second pedestal portion DD2b located on the left side of the main display window DD4 is provided with a maximum BET button DD8 (also referred to as a MAXBET button) as an effective line setting means for betting a credited medal. When the maximum BET button DD8 is pressed, “3” is selected as the number of inserted medals.

  A sub display device DD20 is provided in the third pedestal portion DD2c located on the front side of the main display window DD4. The sub display device DD20 displays, for example, the number of medals paid out when a winning is established and the remaining number of medals that have been credited. Since the maximum number of medals credited to the gaming machine 1 is normally 50, a credit number of 50 or less is displayed on the sub display device DD20. In the state where the maximum number of medals is credited, the inserted medals are paid out as they are from the medal payout exit DD14.

  On the front side of the maximum BET button DD8, there is provided a start lever DD6 for driving the reels RL, RC, RR to rotate by the player's operation and starting the display of the symbols in the main display window DD4. The start lever DD6 is attached to be tiltable within a predetermined angle range.

  On the right side of the start lever DD6, on the front side of the sub display device DD20, three stop buttons DD7L for respectively stopping the rotation of the three reels RL, RC, RR by the player's pressing operation (stop operation). , DD7C, DD7R are provided.

  A C / P button DD13 is provided on the left side of the maximum BET button DD8. The C / P button DD13 is used to switch the credit / payout of medals acquired by the player in the game by a push button operation. In a state where payout is selected by switching the C / P button DD13 (non-credit state), a medal is received from a medal payout exit DD14 (cancellation chute) provided in the coin guard plate portion on the lower side of the lower door mechanism DD. The medals that are paid out and paid out are stored in the medal receiving part DD15.

  A waist panel DD18 (waist light guide plate) is disposed on the lower side of the start lever DD6 and stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R. The waist panel DD18 is configured as a makeup panel using an acrylic plate or the like. On the waist panel DD18, a name representing the model of the gaming machine 1 and various patterns are drawn by printing.

  Further, a speaker DD25L is provided on the left side of the medal payout opening DD14, and a speaker DD25R is provided on the right side. The speakers DD25L and DD25R notify the player of various information related to the game using sounds such as voice and music. A sub liquid crystal display device DD19 is disposed on the right side of the main display window DD4. The sub liquid crystal display device DD19 is a so-called touch panel DD19T in which a touch sensor panel DD10T as a touch type position input device is arranged on a panel surface of a liquid crystal display panel (liquid crystal panel). The touch sensor panel may be, for example, a capacitive type that detects contact with a part of a human body (such as a fingertip) or an electrostatic pen and outputs a detection signal thereof, or It may be of a type that detects the contact of a hard substance such as a pen tip and outputs a detection signal thereof, or may be of any other type or structure (such as an in-cell structure). In the present embodiment, optical adjustment of the projector device B2 described later can be performed using the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and the touch panel DD19T.

  The sub liquid crystal display device DD19 functions as a SUI (smart user interface). On the display screen, for example, game information such as the number of games is displayed along with the progress of the game, and by the player A message for requesting selection or input, an input key, and the like are displayed.

  In the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, for example, as the game progresses, it is possible to display contents (effect information) according to the effect related to the game. Further, as the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, for example, a jog dial or a push button or the like may be attached as an attachment having a function as a director or a dedicated attachment. Further, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 can be omitted by distributing its function to the display unit A and the like which will be described later. Further, a sub liquid crystal display device different from the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 may be disposed on the left side of the main display window DD4. As such another sub liquid crystal display device, an LED substrate on which a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted is provided on the back side thereof, and a display surface is provided by a transparent and decorated panel so as to be able to produce an effect. May be formed.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the inside of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate G1. That is, the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate that partitions the cabinet G into an upper space and a lower space. The upper space is a space on the rear side of the upper door mechanism UD in the cabinet G and accommodates the display unit A and the like. The lower space is a space on the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the reel unit RU, the main control board MS that controls the operation of the entire gaming machine 1, and the like.

(Display unit A)
As shown in FIG. 5, the display unit A is placed on the intermediate support plate G <b> 1 in the cabinet G so as to be replaceable. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping apparatus including an irradiation unit B that emits irradiation light for image display, and a screen device C that causes an image to appear when the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B is irradiated.

  Here, the projection mapping device is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a structure or a natural object. For example, the position (projection distance or angle) of an object that is a screen described later is used. Etc.) and an image according to the production information generated on the basis of the shape can be projected, thereby enabling an advanced and powerful production.

  The display unit A has a housing A1 with an opening formed in the front. The housing A1 includes a projector cover B1 that forms the upper part of the irradiation unit B, and a screen housing C10 of the screen device C (see FIGS. 12, 13, and the like). Although details will be described later, the screen casing C10 has a box shape having a bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2, a left side plate C3, and a back plate C4. The projector cover B1 is replaceably attached to the upper surface of the screen casing C10.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B)
As shown in FIG. 6, the irradiation unit B includes a projector device B2 that emits irradiation light forward, and a screen device that is arranged in front of the projector device B2 and that emits irradiation light from the projector device B2 obliquely downward and rearward. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects in the direction C, and a projector cover B1 that houses the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Projector device B2)
The projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 while being packaged by a case B22, and is arranged at the rear part in the cabinet G. The projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 via a flat plate-like upper pedestal B220 and lower pedestal B221 arranged horizontally. The entire upper surface of the case B22 is opened. Accordingly, the lens unit B21 and the optical mechanism B24 (see FIG. 21) housed in the case B22 are positioned on the lower surface of the lower pedestal B221. The lens unit B21 forwards the irradiation light emitted from the plurality of LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B (see FIG. 33) of the optical mechanism B24 and reflected by the DMD 241 (Digital Micromirror Device: see FIG. 33) through the lens or the like. It arrange | positions so that it may radiate | emit toward mirror mechanism B3. Details of the projector apparatus B2 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, a mirror mechanism B3 is disposed in front of the projector device B2 (the direction in which the irradiation light is emitted). The mirror mechanism B3 holds an optical mirror B32 by a mirror holder B31. The mirror mechanism B3 is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holding part B11 in the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed at the center of the front surface of the projector cover B1, and is disposed so as to be exposed to the front side when the upper door mechanism UD is opened. The mirror mechanism B3 is attached to the reflector holding portion B11 so that the interval can be adjusted. Thereby, the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2 can be finely adjusted.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 7, the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 are accommodated in the projector cover B1. The lower surface B2a of the projector device B2 has an inclined surface B2a1 that is inclined upward from the rear to the front at the front part thereof. As shown in FIG. 8, the projector cover B1 is arranged symmetrically in the left-right direction of the upper wall part B12 arranged horizontally, the reflector holding part B11 arranged on the front side of the upper wall part B12, and the upper wall part B12. Side wall portions B13 and B13. As for upper wall part B12, the front part protrudes ahead rather than cabinet G (refer to Drawing 5). At the center of the front part of the upper wall part B12, a reflector holding part B11 is formed so as to protrude forward, and the mirror mechanism B3 described above is held in the space formed by the protrusion so that the angle can be adjusted. Yes.

  Further, the side wall parts B13, B13 have a protruding part B131 protruding in the horizontal direction from the lower end part. The protrusion B131 has a first protrusion B131a on the front side and a second protrusion B131b on the rear side. The first protrusion B131a is positioned so as to correspond to the opening of the cabinet G when the projector cover B1 is attached to the cabinet G. The distance along the left-right direction between the tips of the first protrusions B131a protruding from the side walls B13, B13 is set to be slightly shorter than the width of the opening of the cabinet G in the left-right direction. On the other hand, when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet G, the second projecting portion B131b is positioned so as to correspond to the rear space from the opening of the cabinet G. The distance along the left-right direction between the tips of the second protrusions B131b protruding from the side wall parts B13, B13 is set to be slightly shorter than the width of the space part of the cabinet G. That is, each side wall part B13, B13 is formed so that the distance along the left-right direction between the front-end | tips of 2nd protrusion part B131b may become larger than the distance along the left-right direction of the front-end | tips of 1st protrusion part B131a. . Thus, the projector cover B1 can cover most of the internal space in the cabinet G.

  Further, a screw hole B131C penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at the tip of the second protrusion B131b. When the projector cover B1 is fixed to the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 (see FIG. 5), screws are screwed into the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 through the screw holes B131C. Further, since the projecting portions B131 project in the horizontal direction from the lower end portions of the side wall portions B13 and B13, the projecting portions B131 and the side wall portions B13 are provided at both end portions of the projector cover B1, and the concave portions B132 are formed from the front ends thereof. Are formed continuously toward the rear.

  As shown in FIG. 9, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, a space BS is defined by the recess B132 and the cabinet G. Further, the shape of the upper wall portion B12 and the side wall portion B13 of the projector cover B1 is such that the distance between the lower end portion of each side wall portion B13 and the front end portion of the second protrusion portion B131b protruding from the lower end portion is the second protrusion portion. The front part is configured to be larger than the rear part of B131b (see FIG. 8). As a result, the front space of the space BS becomes larger than the rear space. When the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, the opening G41 formed in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G and the front space of the space BS are at least partially overlapped when viewed from above. This space BS is used as a work space for installing and fixing the gaming machine 1 on the island facility.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Perforated plate B15)
As shown in FIG. 10, a perforated plate B15 having a plurality of holes B151 is provided on the lower surface side of the projector cover B1. The perforated plate B15 is a punching metal having a plurality of holes formed by punching a plate made of metal (for example, stainless steel, iron, steel, aluminum, etc.). The plurality of holes B151 are formed to be substantially evenly distributed over the entire surface of the porous plate B15. The perforated plate B15 allows air to flow over the entire surface of the perforated plate B15, and allows air to flow from the lower side to the upper side or from the upper side to the lower side of the projector device B2. The size and the number of the holes B151 are set such that the inside of the projector cover B1 cannot be seen from the outside. The hole B151 is formed in a shape such as a circle, a square, or a hexagon, and the hole diameter is about 3 to 5 mm.

  The perforated plate B15 is formed so as to cover the first protrusion B131a and the second protrusion B131b of the projector cover B1 from the lower position. The perforated plate B15 has a front side upper part B15a, a middle side inclined part B15b, and a rear side lower part B15c. The upper part B15a is horizontally arranged. The inclined part B15b is formed to bend obliquely downward and rearward from the rear side of the upper part B15a. The lower part B15c is formed to bend in the horizontal direction from the rear side of the inclined part B15b.

  The upper part B15a of the perforated plate B15 is attached to the side wall parts B13 and B13 of the projector cover B1. Thereby, the perforated plate B15 is arranged so as to cover the front part of the projector cover B1 from the lower side with the upper part B15a and cover the lower part with the inclined part B15b and the lower part B15c from the middle part to the rear part of the projector cover B1. Yes. Further, the inclined portion B15b is disposed so as to surround the inclined surface B2a1 on the lower surface B2a of the projector device B2 when viewed from above. As shown in FIG. 7, the inclination angle of the inclined portion B15b (inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane) is substantially the same as the inclination angle of the inclined surface B2a1. A front screen mechanism E1 in the screen device C is arranged below the perforated plate B15.

  The front screen mechanism E1 has a front standby position disposed on the upper side that is a standby posture that prohibits the appearance of an image by irradiation light, and a front exposure disposed on the lower side that is an exposure posture that permits the appearance of an image by irradiation light. The front screen mechanism E1 in the standby posture is in an inclined posture close to the inclined portion B15b of the perforated plate B15 in a substantially parallel manner. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the exposed posture, a large space portion appears below the porous plate B15, and air present in the space portion reaches the porous plate B15 without flow resistance, By passing through the hole B151, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of air into the screen device C and enhance the cooling effect.

  Further, the perforated plate B15 is provided so as to cover the lower surface of the projector cover B1, so that, for example, as shown in FIG. 11, the player's eye position located on the front side is the center in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction of the screen device C. Even if the irradiation unit B is looked up from the position of the line of sight, the inside of the irradiation unit B is prevented from being visually observed by the perforated plate B15.

(Display unit A: Screen device C)
As shown in FIG. 12, the irradiation unit B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screw fastening. For example, as described above, screws are screwed into the upper surfaces of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen device C through the screw holes B131C formed in the protrusion B131 of the projector cover B1. Thereby, the display unit A can unitarily handle the irradiation unit B and the screen device C as a unit.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen mechanism)
Inside the screen housing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms for causing an image to appear by irradiation of irradiation light from the irradiation unit B are provided so as to switch irradiation targets. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as the plurality of screen mechanisms. The projection planes of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 have different shapes from each other in order to diversify the image expression. The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are movable screens whose positions are displaced relative to the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3. (See FIG. 20). Note that the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are larger and heavier in the front screen mechanism E1. For this reason, when the front screen mechanism E1 is driven, a larger driving force is required than when the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen casing C10)
As described above, the screen device C includes the box-shaped screen casing C10. As shown in FIG. 13, the screen casing C10 includes a horizontally disposed bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2 erected at the right end portion of the bottom plate C1, and a left side plate C3 erected at the left end portion of the bottom plate C1. And a back plate C4 erected at the rear end of the bottom plate C1. Accordingly, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are connected to the bottom plate C1 by screw fastening, so that the front side where the player is located and the upper side where the irradiation unit B is located are opened. A box-shaped screen casing C10 is formed.

  The bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are individually molded into a predetermined shape, and predetermined functional components such as the fixed screen mechanism D can be positioned and arranged. As a result, even if the unit of the screen device C cannot be shared as a whole, it can be shared in units of plate members of the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4. In addition, since the plate member can be partially exchanged, the specification can be easily changed for each model of the gaming machine 1.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen casing C10: Bottom plate C1)
The bottom plate C1 of the screen casing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape that is rectangular when viewed from above. The upper surface of the bottom plate C1 has a central placement portion C11 disposed at the center, and a right placement portion C12 and a left placement portion C13 disposed in the left-right direction with the center placement portion C11 as the center. . These placement parts C11, C12, C13 are formed in a concave shape. The center placement portion C11 places the fixed screen mechanism D so that it can be positioned by fitting the lower end portion of the fixed screen mechanism D. The right mounting portion C12 mounts the right movable body base C5 so as to be positioned by fitting the lower end portion of the right movable body base C5. The left placement portion C13 places the left movable body base C6 so that the left movable body base C6 can be positioned by fitting the lower end portion of the left movable body base C6. In addition, a pattern is three-dimensionally formed by unevenness on the side surface in the left-right direction of each of the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6. That is, the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6 also function as a decorative member. As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the right movable body base C5, and the left movable body base C6 can be positioned and arranged on the bottom plate C1.

  Further, the front portion C14 of the bottom plate C1 is bent downward so that the tip portion is positioned below the lower surface of the bottom plate C1. A plurality of through holes C141 are formed in the front portion C14. When the display unit A is assembled while being placed on the intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 5) of the cabinet G, the front portion C14 comes into contact with the front surface of the intermediate support plate G1, thereby moving the front portion C14 toward the rear in the cabinet G. It is possible to perform positioning. The display unit A can be assembled and installed from the front side of the cabinet G by being screwed to the front side of the cabinet G through the through hole C141 of the front part C14. It has become.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen casing C10: Right side plate C2, Left side plate C3)
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen casing C10 have operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and the display unit A can be carried by hooking the operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are arranged on the sides of the crank gears E21 and E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The opening portions C21 and C31 for operation are formed in a rectangular shape whose longitudinal direction coincides with the horizontal direction. The opening areas of the operation openings C21 and C31 are set to such an extent that the crank gears E21 and E21 can be manually operated from the outside.

  Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit A is assembled in the cabinet G, first, the display unit A is taken out from the front side of the cabinet G in which the upper door mechanism UD is opened. . Specifically, an operator located on the front side of the cabinet G releases the screw fastening of the display unit A to the cabinet G and removes the screw. Then, reaching into the cabinet G, the operation openings C21 and C31 of the display unit A are held with both hands, and the display unit A is taken out of the cabinet G. Thereafter, a hand is reached into the screen device C from one operation opening C21 of the detached display unit A, and the crank gear E21 that is visible in the horizontal direction is rotated from the operation opening C21 to thereby lock the front screen. The mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. When the locked state is released by the movement from the standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be quickly rotated to a desired position.

  In the state where the upper door mechanism UD is opened, the hand is reached from the front of the opening of the cabinet G into the space between the side wall G2 of the cabinet G and the right side plate C2 of the screen device C, and the operation opening C21 is reached. The crank gear E21 can be rotated by operating the crank gear E21. In this case, the front screen mechanism E1 can be unlocked without removing the display unit A from the cabinet G.

  Further, a motor housing portion C22 is formed on the right side plate C2. The drive motor F24 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 (see FIG. 20) is positioned by the motor housing portion C22. Further, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 respectively include a first support portion C23 that rotatably supports the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 in the front screen drive mechanism E2, and an intermediate gear E23 in the front screen drive mechanism E2. A second support portion C24 that rotatably supports the shaft member E3 that is the gear shaft is formed. As described above, the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are positioned and arranged by the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. The right front screen drive mechanism E2B and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 of the front screen drive mechanism E2 are disposed between the right movable body base C5 and the right side plate C2 in the left-right direction. Further, the left front screen drive mechanism E2A is disposed between the left movable body base C6 and the left side plate C3 in the left-right direction.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen casing C10: Back plate C4)
As shown in FIG. 15, the back plate C4 of the screen casing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape, and a recess CO for positioning and arranging the relay board CK is formed in the lower part of the back surface thereof. The relay substrate CK includes various functional components in the display unit A (for example, the projector device B2, the front screen drive mechanism E2, the reel screen drive mechanism F2, etc.) and various functional components other than the display unit A (sub control substrate SS, which will be described later). ) Is a relay board for relaying wiring (not shown). The relay substrate CK includes a screen drive control substrate CS (see FIGS. 37 and 42) that exchanges signals and the like with the screen drive mechanisms E2 and F2.

  An operation opening C41 is formed in the back plate C4. The operation opening C41 is disposed at the lower right side and faces the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation opening C41 is formed in a size that allows the intermediate gear E23 to be manually operated. Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit A is incorporated into the cabinet G, the display unit A is first removed from the cabinet G. After that, reaching out from the operation opening C41 into the screen device C and rotating the intermediate gear E23 visible in the horizontal direction from the operation opening C41, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. Can be moved.

  Further, the back plate C4 is disposed in front of the rear ends of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. Thereby, when the display unit A is placed on the intermediate support plate G1 of the cabinet G, the space GS is formed by the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 of the screen device C. Will be defined. That is, a gap is secured between the back wall G3 and the back plate C4. As a result, even if the relay board CK is provided on the back surface of the back plate C4, the space GS can prevent the relay board CK from interfering with the back wall G3 of the cabinet G.

  Further, a through hole G11 is formed at a position facing the space GS in the intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 5). The through hole G11 is formed so that the opening surrounds the relay substrate CK in a top view. The relay board CK is arranged so that the connector CK1 to which wiring from a device (such as a sub-control board SS described later) housed in the lower space of the cabinet G is connected faces the through hole G11. . Thereby, the electrical connection between the relay substrate CK of the display unit A and the device accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G is made by inserting the wiring from the device accommodated in the lower space through the through hole G11. This can be done by connecting to CK1.

  Thus, the relay board CK is arranged outside the screen device C, thereby facilitating the wiring work and making it unnecessary to secure an installation space for the relay board CK in the screen device C. The degree of freedom of design in the screen device C is expanded. Moreover, it becomes easy to discharge | emit the heat | fever which generate | occur | produces from the relay board | substrate CK outside the machine via the vent hole G3a (refer FIG. 2) formed in the back wall G3 of the cabinet G. FIG.

  Moreover, the wiring which connects the relay board CK arrange | positioned in the upper space of the cabinet G, and the apparatus accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G passes through the through-hole G11 formed in the rear part of the intermediate support plate G1. Therefore, it becomes easy to arrange wiring behind various devices in the cabinet G. As a result, the degree of freedom in wiring can be increased.

  Since the relay board CK is arranged at the rear part in the cabinet G, it is difficult for light to reach the relay board CK. As a result, it is difficult to connect the wiring to the connector CK1 of the relay board CK. It can be. Therefore, in order to facilitate the connection of the wiring from the equipment accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G to the relay board CK, the connector CK1 of the relay board CK passes below the intermediate support plate G1 through the through hole G11. It may be configured to protrude. Further, the color of the connector CK1 may be a color with high light reflectance (for example, white).

  As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the right movable body base C5, and the left movable body base C6 are positioned on the bottom plate C1. The drive motor F24 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 is positioned on the right side plate C2, and the gear shaft E21a and the shaft member E3 of the front screen drive mechanism E2 are positioned on the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. The relay substrate CK is positioned with respect to the back plate C4. As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the screen driving mechanisms F2 and E2, and the relay substrate CK are positioned and arranged on one of the bottom plate C1, the side plates C2 and C3, and the back plate C4, respectively. Positioned and arranged on different plates. Therefore, even if the display unit A as a whole cannot be shared among the models of the gaming machine 1, it can be shared among the models on a board basis. As a result, the display unit can be manufactured at a lower cost than the case where the display unit is manufactured for each model.

  Moreover, since each board C1-C4 of the screen housing | casing C10 is connected by screw fastening, it can cancel | release connection of each board C1-C4 by loosening a screw. That is, the screen casing C10 is assembled so that the plates C1 to C4 can be replaced. As a result, the functional parts of the display unit can be exchanged on a plate-by-plate basis. Therefore, it is possible to change the specifications of the display unit A while reusing functional parts that are not subject to exchange of the display unit A. .

  As shown in FIGS. 13 and 20, the right movable body base C5 is disposed on the left inner side of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B and the reel screen drive mechanism F2. Further, the left movable body base C6 is disposed on the right inner side of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A. As a result, the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, which are decorative members, can make it difficult for the player to visually observe the drive mechanisms E2 and F2. As a result, the beauty of the gaming machine 1 can be improved. Moreover, since the recessed part for arrange | positioning the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6 is formed in the baseplate C1, it becomes possible to position these at the baseplate C1 easily.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen position relationship)
As shown in FIG. 16, the fixed screen mechanism D is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light. As shown in FIG. 17, the front screen mechanism E1 is provided to be rotatable between a front exposure position and a front standby position. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set so that the front exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and exists in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the front screen mechanism E1. It is possible. When the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that an image of the irradiated light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D. That is, when the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 becomes a projection target of the projector device B2. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D becomes the projection target of the projector device B2.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the reel screen mechanism F1 is provided so as to be rotatable between a reel exposure position and a reel standby position. The positional relationship between the reel exposure position and the fixed exposure position is set so that the reel exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and exists ahead of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel exposure position, the reel screen mechanism F1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the reel screen mechanism F1. It is possible. When the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that an image by irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D. That is, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel exposure position, the reel screen mechanism F1 becomes a projection target of the projector device B2. On the other hand, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D becomes a projection target of the projector device B2.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism D)
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the fixed screen mechanism D is fixed on the bottom plate C1 of the screen casing C10 by screw fastening. The fixed screen mechanism D includes a front reflection part D1, a right surface reflection part D2, a left surface reflection part D3, and a lower surface reflection part D4. The reflecting surfaces of these reflecting portions D1 to D4 are projection surfaces onto which the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B is projected, and are set at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B.

  In addition, if the fixed screen mechanism D is a structure which has a reflective surface of several different angles with respect to the optical axis of irradiation light, it may have a reflective part of 2 surfaces, 3 surfaces, 5 surfaces, for example, Or you may provide the reflective part of the curved or circular-arc-shaped reflective surface in which the curvature center point which becomes an continuously different angle with respect to an optical axis is located in the front side.

  The front reflecting portion D1 has a reflecting surface opposed to the player on the front side, and reflects most of the reflected light from the irradiation unit B arranged in the upper front portion of the fixed screen mechanism D to the front. Is set to The right side reflection part D2 and the left side reflection part D3 are joined to the right side part and the left side part of the front reflection part D1, and are arranged symmetrically about the front reflection part D1. The right side reflection part D2 and the left side reflection part D3 are arranged such that the width between the front end parts is larger than the width in the left-right direction of the front reflection part D1. As a result, the right-side reflection part D2 and the left-side reflection part D3 make it possible to make the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflection surface easier to face in the direction of the front reflection part D1, so that a part of the irradiation light appears in front while the image by the irradiation light appears. The light is reflected in the direction of the reflection part D1. In addition, with respect to the lower surface reflection part D4, the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflection surface is easily directed toward the front reflection part D1, so that a part of the irradiation light is caused to appear in the direction of the front reflection part D1 while the image by the irradiation light appears. It is designed to reflect.

  In the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the reflecting surface is set lower than the brightness of each reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the amount of light reflected by the reflecting surface of the irradiation light is made smaller than the amount of light reflected by the reflecting surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. As a result, the fixed screen mechanism D is prevented from being blurred due to light mixing due to irregular reflection of the reflecting portions D1 to D4. In the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the other reflection parts D2, D3, D4 may be lower than the brightness of the front reflection part D1. In this case, since the reflection of the irradiation light to the front reflection part D1 in the other reflection parts D2, D3, D4 can be reduced, white blur can be reduced while causing an image to appear strongly in the front reflection part D1.

  As brightness, Brightness in the L * a * b * color system (L * a * b * color space) or L * u * v * color system (L * u * v * color space) is adopted. However, any other color can be defined as long as other colors can be expressed by relative values with white as a reference.

  The lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the lightness of the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are the same as the lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the reflection of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. If it is lower than the brightness of a surface, it will not specifically limit. For example, the brightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D may be set to a value lower by about 5 to 25% (or 10 to 20%) than the brightness of the reflecting surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.

  In order to make the lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D lower than the lightness of the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the color of the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is changed to the front screen. What is necessary is just to make it black rather than the color of the coating material apply | coated to the base material of the mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. For example, a white paint is used as the coating material applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, and the coating material applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1. What added the black pigment to the coating material apply | coated to a base material should just be used.

  In such a paint, the brightness of the reflection surface of the screen mechanism can be changed by changing the ratio of the white pigment (for example, titanium oxide) and the black pigment (for example, carbon black). For example, the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 includes only a white pigment among white pigment and black pigment, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D includes Both a white pigment and a black pigment may be included. In addition, the ratio of the black pigment to the white pigment (for example, 5 to 25% (or It may be increased by about 10 to 20%). In addition, as a coating material applied to the base material of these screen mechanisms, a conventionally known screen coating material can be appropriately employed and can be adjusted according to a screen type (for example, a diffusion type or a reflection type). .

  Note that the black pigment is not dispersed in the coating material applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D, but before the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is molded. By doing so, the base material itself may be colored to lower the brightness of the base material itself.

  Further, from the viewpoint of preventing irregular reflection of light, members constituting the screen casing C10 such as peripheral walls (the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4), and the interior of the screen casing C10. It is desirable that the brightness of the other members (members other than the screen) disposed in the panel is also lowered. The brightness of these members is desirably lower than the brightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. For example, it is not necessary to consider that an image is projected as a screen for the surrounding wall. The lower the better. That is, it is desirable that the color of the surrounding wall is closer to black.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Front screen mechanism E1)
As shown in FIG. 19, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface, and a front screen support base E12 having patterns such as the first pattern surface E12a on both surfaces. Have. The front screen member E11 is formed by applying screen paint to a thin flat panel. Thereby, as for the front screen member E11, the projection surface E11a is formed in flat shape.

  On the other hand, the front screen support E12 has a holding recess E121 that holds the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape similar to that of the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. In addition, the holding recess E121 is set in two stages of a deep part and a shallow part. The shallow portion is realized by a stepped portion E121a formed at the peripheral portion of the front screen support base E12 and a stepped portion E121b formed linearly at both ends in the short direction passing through the center portion.

  Accordingly, the front screen member E11 accommodated in the holding recess E121 is abutted and supported by the stepped portion E121a at the peripheral edge and the linear stepped portion E121b passing through the central portion, and is separated from the remaining deep portion. It is in a state. As a result, the deformation of the front screen support E12 in the deep portion is prevented from deforming the front screen member E11 and causing distortion on the projection surface E11a.

  Further, the front screen support E12 has a first pattern surface E12a in a partial region around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a is visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front exposure position. Further, the front screen support E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a. The second pattern surface E12b is visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front standby position. In these first pattern surface E12a and second pattern surface E12b, for example, a pattern related to a game effect is three-dimensionally formed by unevenness.

  The front screen member E11 and the front screen support E12 configured as described above are formed separately and then integrated by bonding with an adhesive. Thus, the front screen mechanism E1 is mechanically separated from the front screen member E11 even if sink marks may occur due to molding shrinkage or the like when forming a pattern or the like on the front screen support base E12. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the front screen member E11 from being distorted due to sink marks on the projection surface E11a.

  Note that the method for fixing the front screen member E11 and the front screen support E12 is not limited to bonding with an adhesive, and any method such as screw fastening may be employed.

  The flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support E12 are each produced by injection molding. As a material of the flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, ABS resin or the like) that can cause sink marks when injection molding is performed is appropriately adopted. it can.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Front screen drive mechanism E2)
The front screen mechanism E1 is rotatable by the driving force of the front screen drive mechanism E2. As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the front screen drive mechanism E2 includes a left front screen drive mechanism E2A connected to the lower surface of the left end of the front screen mechanism E1, and a right connected to the lower surface of the right end of the front screen mechanism E1. And a front screen drive mechanism E2B.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the front screen mechanism E1 is configured to be inclined upward from the rear end toward the front end when the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front standby position (in the standby posture). ing. The inclination of the front screen mechanism E1 is substantially parallel to the inclined portion B15b of the perforated plate B15 and the inclined surface B2a1 on the lower surface B2a of the projector device B2.

  As described above, the posture of the front screen mechanism E1 when placed at the front standby position is set to an inclined posture in which the front screen mechanism E1 is inclined upward from the rear end portion toward the front end portion, thereby being parallel to the horizontal plane. Compared to the case of the posture, it is possible to suppress the irradiation light irradiated by the irradiation unit B from being obstructed by the front screen mechanism E1. Thereby, the vertical position of the front screen mechanism E1 when placed at the front standby position can be brought closer to the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 can be enlarged even in a limited space of the display unit A. In addition, since the lower surface B2a of the projector device B2 has the inclined surface B2a1 as described above, the vertical position of the front screen mechanism E1 when placed at the front standby position is set with respect to the projector device B2. Can be closer. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 can be further increased in size.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B has a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. The crank member E22 in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B has an upper end (one end) located at the upper position when the front end is disposed at the front exposed position (in the exposed posture) on the back of the right end of the front screen mechanism E1. It is connected to.

  The crank member E22 is pivotally supported by the right movable body base C5 (see FIG. 13) at an intermediate position. As a result, the crank member E22 can rotate the upper end portion and the lower end portion (the other end portion) with the intermediate position as the rotation center. This intermediate position coincides with the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1.

  As described above, the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed above the center position of the front screen mechanism E1 disposed at the front exposure position. The crank member E22 has an upper end portion (one end portion) connected to a position that is an upper portion when it is disposed at the front exposed position (in the exposed posture) on the rear surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1. . With the above configuration, the operation range between the front standby position and the front exposure position in the front screen mechanism E1 can be reduced, so that the front screen mechanism E1 can be increased in size.

  A slide groove (not shown) is formed in the lower region of the crank member E22. The slide groove is formed to have a U shape when viewed from the side. A slide member E26 (see FIG. 14) is movably engaged with the slide groove. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the slide groove. The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at an eccentric position of the crank gear E21. As shown in FIG. 13, the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 and the first support portion C23 of the right side plate C2. The gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 has a line segment connecting the gear shaft E21a and the eccentric position when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, and the center position of the crank member E22 and the slide member E26. Are set so as to have an orthogonal relationship to the line segment connecting the two.

  Thereby, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, even if a force is applied in a direction in which the lower region of the crank member E22 is rotated, the gear shaft E21a is applied in the direction in which all components of the force are applied. Exists and acts as a fixed end, so that the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure is formed by a three-joint link having zero degrees of freedom with the intermediate position of the crank member E22 and the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 as the fixed end and the slide member E26 as the free end. Even if it is pushed by hand, the front screen mechanism E1 does not move because the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 act as a strong brake.

  An intermediate gear E23 is meshed with the crank gear E21. The intermediate gear E23 is pivotally supported by the right movable body base C5 and the second support portion C24 of the right side plate C2. A motor shaft gear E24 is meshed with the intermediate gear E23. The motor shaft gear E24 is connected to the drive shaft of the drive motor E25. Thereby, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B can transmit the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

  Here, all the components of the rotational driving force applied to the crank gear E21 coincide with the tangential direction of the turning locus of the slide member E26. When the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, a line segment connecting the gear shaft E21a and the eccentric position of the slide member E26 connects the intermediate position of the crank member E22 and the center point of the slide member E26. Since it is set to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment, the tangential direction of the turning locus is parallel to the slide groove of the crank member E22. Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, when the rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the crank gear E21 starts to rotate easily.

  When a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position is movable along the slide groove, so that the intermediate position of the crank member E22 and the gear shaft of the crank gear E21 are provided. A one-degree-of-freedom two-joint link is formed in which E21a is a fixed end and the slide member E26 is a free end that is movable along the slide groove. When the slide member E26 rotates, the slide member E26 slides along the slide groove so that the crank member E22 rotates about the intermediate position, and the upper region of the crank member E22 rotates. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposure position.

  In the present embodiment, the drive motor E25 is a stepping motor, and is electrically connected to the sub control board SS via the relay board CK and the sub relay board SN (see FIG. 34). Drive controlled. The drive motor E25 may be connected to the main control board MS via the relay board CK and driven and controlled by the main control board MS.

  Further, the moving speed of the front screen mechanism E1 gradually accelerates from 0 in the stopped state in the standby posture or the exposed posture, gradually decreases after reaching the maximum speed in the intermediate posture between the standby posture and the exposed posture, When the exposure posture or the standby posture is reached, the stop state becomes zero again. Thus, the rotation can be started and stopped in a state where the angular acceleration of the crank gear E21 is small (moment of inertia), so that the torque required for the crank gear E21 can be reduced, and as a result, the drive mechanism ( It is possible to reduce failures and wear due to overloading of the intermediate gear E23, the motor shaft gear E24, and the drive motor E25).

  The right front screen drive mechanism E2B configured as described above has the same configuration as the left front screen drive mechanism E2A except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are arranged symmetrically. The intermediate gear E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the intermediate gear E23 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected via a shaft member E3 (see FIG. 13).

  In the above configuration, when the drive motor E25 is driven, the motor shaft gear E24 is rotated. As the motor shaft gear E24 rotates, the intermediate gears E23 and E23 and the shaft member E3 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B rotate together. Then, the crank gears E21 and E21 are rotated in conjunction with the rotation of the intermediate gears E23 and E23, whereby the front screen mechanism E1 is rotated around the rotation center axis, and the front standby position and the front It moves between exposure positions.

  As described above, by connecting the intermediate gears E23 and E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B by the shaft member E3, the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 is applied to the two crank members E22. It becomes possible to transmit evenly. Therefore, compared with the case where these intermediate gears E23 and E23 are not connected by the shaft member E3, it is possible to prevent the driving load from being concentrated on one of the two crank members E22. Further, since the drive motor E25 is provided in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B arranged on the right side of the fixed screen mechanism D, the arrangement of the fixed screen mechanism D is not hindered.

  In addition, the shaft member E3 is not used as the rotation shaft of the front screen mechanism E1. For this reason, the freedom degree of arrangement | positioning of the shaft member E3 increases, and it becomes possible to arrange | position the shaft member E3 so that arrangement | positioning of other supplements, such as the fixed screen mechanism D, may not be inhibited. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the arrangement of the extra items while maintaining the rotation range and size of the front screen mechanism E1 at a desired level.

  Further, since the shaft member E3 is disposed behind the fixed screen mechanism D, the light projected on the fixed screen mechanism D is not hindered by the shaft member E3. Further, since the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed forward of the rear end position of the fixed screen mechanism D, it is compared with the case where it is disposed rearward of the rear end position of the fixed screen mechanism D. Thus, the length between the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis (the length of the crank member E22) can be shortened. For this reason, even when the space in the cabinet G is limited and the display unit A cannot be enlarged, the size of the front screen mechanism E1 can be maintained to a desired level.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Reel screen mechanism F1)
As shown in FIG. 18, the reel screen mechanism F1 is a curved flat plate. The reel screen mechanism F1 has a circular arc shape when viewed from the side, which is curved in a shape that approximates the rotation direction. On the surface of the reel screen mechanism F1, a pattern is formed on the peripheral portion, and an inner peripheral area of the peripheral portion is a projection surface F1a. The projection plane F1a is an arcuate surface that protrudes upstream in the irradiation direction of light from the projector device B2 when the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel exposure position. In addition, a pattern is formed on the rear surface on the rotation center side in the reel screen mechanism F1. The pattern on the back surface is made visible to the player in front when the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel standby position.

  The reel screen mechanism F1 is rotatable between the reel standby position and the reel exposure position by the driving force of the reel screen drive mechanism F2. When the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel exposure position, the projection surface F1a can appear an image by irradiation with irradiation light.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Reel screen drive mechanism F2)
As shown in FIG. 20, the reel screen drive mechanism F2 has two arm members F21 (not shown on the right side), an arcuate gear F22, a motor shaft gear F23, and a drive motor F24. One end of each of the two arm members F21 is connected to the back surface of the right end portion and the back surface of the left end portion of the reel screen mechanism F1. A support shaft F21a (not shown on the left side) is formed on the outer surface of the other end of the two arm members F21 so as to protrude outward in the left-right direction. These support shafts F21a are rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, respectively. As a result, the two arm members F21 can rotate about the support shaft F21a. These support shafts F21a coincide with the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The arcuate gear F22 is fixed to the tip of the support shaft F21a arranged on the right side. A motor shaft gear F23 is meshed with the arcuate gear F22. The drive shaft of the drive motor F24 is connected to the motor shaft gear F23. In the present embodiment, the drive motor F24 is a stepping motor, and is electrically connected to the sub control board SS via the relay board CK and the sub relay board SN (see FIG. 34). Drive controlled. The drive motor F24 may be connected to the main control board MS via the relay board CK and driven and controlled by the main control board MS.

  In the above configuration, when the drive motor F24 is driven under the control of the sub-control board SS, the motor shaft gear F23 rotates. As the motor shaft gear F23 rotates, the arcuate gear F22 rotates. Then, the arm member F21 is rotated in conjunction with the rotation of the arcuate gear F22, whereby the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotated around the rotation center axis, and the reel standby position and the reel exposure position are set. Will work between.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Sensor mechanism)
As described above, the operation ranges of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 partially overlap each other (see FIGS. 17 and 18). The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are driven by different drive mechanisms E2 and F2, respectively. That is, the driving of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is not linked (synchronized). Therefore, in order to prevent interference (contact) between the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, it is necessary to grasp the positions of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sub control board SS (see FIG. 34) grasps the position of the front screen mechanism E1 based on the number of steps of the drive motor E25 from the origin position with the front standby position as the origin position. ing. Similarly, the reel standby position is set as the origin position, and the position of the reel screen mechanism F1 is grasped based on the number of steps of the drive motor F24 from the origin position.

  However, if the operation of the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is not normally performed, or if the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is manually moved while the power is shut off, the sub-control board SS. Cannot grasp the exact positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. If the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are operated in such a situation, they may interfere with each other.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the screen device C includes a sensor mechanism (not shown) for detecting the positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. Then, the sub-control board SS performs a return operation for returning the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 to the origin position (standby position) based on the detection result from the sensor mechanism.

  For example, as described above, each of the front standby position and the reel standby position is arranged in the overlapping range in the operation range of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, so when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged in the front exposure position, The reel screen mechanism F1 is not disposed at the reel exposure position. For this reason, when the sensor mechanism detects that the front screen is present at the front exposed position, it indicates that the reel screen mechanism F1 is not present at the reel exposed position.

(Screen surface processing)
Next, screen surface processing will be described. A screen to be projected, such as a front reflecting portion D1, a right reflecting portion D2, a left reflecting portion D3, and a lower reflecting portion D4 of the fixed screen mechanism D, a projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11, and a projection surface F1a of the reel screen mechanism F1. In order to achieve an appropriate performance, graining is applied. The wrinkle processing is processing in which wrinkles (wrinkle patterns) are formed on the surface. The screen or the like to be projected is molded using a mold that has been subjected to a textured process, whereby a wrinkle pattern is formed on the surface of the screen or the like to be projected. Such a wrinkle pattern on the surface can effectively prevent the reflection of the light source, and can realize a good projection image.

  The texture processing includes a pattern called “pear texture”. In this embodiment, for example, a pear texture pattern having a mean depth of about 25 μm to 30 μm and a draft gradient of 3% or more (pear texture No. 5). Is preferred.

  Moreover, as surface processing of a screen etc., in order to implement | achieve moderate performance, 2 layer coating is given. Two-layer coating means that paints having different characteristics are applied to the top and bottom (in two layers). For example, a high-brightness paint having high reflectivity (for example, 2P-600 silver which is a “super bright silver” metal-like paint) is used for the undercoat, and a matte paint (for example, “matte” is used for the topcoat. HG-650 white) which is “white” can be used. Also, about 5% matting agent (silica) can be added to HG-650 white.

  In such coating, the film thickness of the top coat is, for example, 22 to 23 μm, and the film thickness of the undercoat is, for example, about 1 μm. By such coating, the glossiness at a gloss of 60 ° is 4 to 5.

  2P-600 Silver uses evaporated aluminum as the aluminum pigment, and the weight concentration (PWC) of the aluminum pigment in the coating is set to 20-30%, which is higher than that of general silver paint, and it has a higher gloss. Indicates the value (reflection performance). The composition of HG-650 white is 20-30% resin, 30-40% titanium oxide, 5-10% silica as a matting agent, 0.5-2% additive, and solvent. 30 to 40%.

  In addition, as a top coat paint, a paint in which glass or resin beads having various average particle diameters as a matting agent are added to HG-650 white in a predetermined ratio, or a paint in which silica is added to the beads is added. It can also be used. Also, HG-650F clear or a paint in which beads having various average particle diameters as a matting agent are added to the HG-650F clear in a predetermined ratio can be used. The film thickness can be variously adjusted, for example, up to 16 to 23 μm. The composition of HG-650F clear is 20-30% resin, 2-5% silica as matting agent, 0.5-2% additive, and 60-70% solvent.

  Further, as other undercoat paint, HG-650 white, or a paint obtained by adding glass-based or resin-based beads having various average particle diameters to the HG-650 white as a matting agent in a predetermined ratio can also be used. Also, the film thickness can be variously adjusted, for example, from 1 to 21 μm.

  As described above, by forming the screen to be projected by embossing or applying a two-layer coating, the reflection of the light source can be effectively prevented, and a better projection image can be displayed. Can be realized. Further, the above-described two-layer coating can be applied to a screen or an accessory that has been subjected to the texture processing. Moreover, although materials, such as a screen used as a projection object, are black or white ABS resin and transparent polycarbonate resin, for example, they are not restricted to these.

(Display Unit A: Irradiation Unit B: Electrical and Optical Configuration of Projector Device B2)
As shown in FIG. 21, the projector device B2 includes a projector control board B23, an optical mechanism B24, and a relay board CK as electrical components. A sub-control board SS, which will be described later, is connected to the projector device B2 via a relay board CK. Although not shown in FIG. 21, the relay substrate CK and the sub control substrate SS are connected via a scaler substrate SK (see FIGS. 37 and 43) described later. The sub-control board SS controls the projector control board B23 according to the screen or the effect operation of the accessory, and projects the irradiation light on the screen or the accessory via the optical mechanism B24 as a visual effect. Display video. Further, in the assembly process of the display unit A and the like, an adjustment PC (personal computer) 1000 is connected to the projector control board B23 (see FIGS. 30 and 37) of the projector device B2. The adjustment PC 1000 is used to adjust the position of irradiation light projected by the projector device B2 and to perform initial focus setting (details will be described later). In this embodiment, the adjustment PC 1000 is used as the adjustment device of the projector device B2. However, as the adjustment device of the projector device B2, a tablet PC or a so-called smartphone installed with an adjustment program (application software) is used. Alternatively, a dedicated terminal device may be used.

  The projector control board B 23 includes a control LSI 230, an EEPROM (registered trademark) 231, a DLP (registered trademark) control circuit 232, and an LED driver 233. As shown in FIG. 33, the optical mechanism B24 includes LED light sources 240R, 240G that emit light of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) as components disposed around the lens unit B21. 240B, DMD 241, and a focus mechanism 242 for performing focus adjustment on the projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21.

  The control LSI 230 controls the DLP control circuit 232 to project the irradiation light based on the command from the sub control board SS. The control LSI 230 controls the focus mechanism 242 and moves the projection lens 210 in the optical axis direction based on a command from the sub-control board SS, thereby performing focus adjustment when projecting the irradiation light. The EEPROM 231 stores data related to setting / adjustment of the projector device B2 by the control LSI 230. Although not particularly illustrated, the control LSI 230 includes a ROM in which a control program and the like are stored, and a DRAM that is used in a work area related to setting and adjustment of the projector apparatus B2.

  The DLP system of the projector apparatus B2 mainly includes a DLP control circuit 232, an LED driver 233, LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B, and a DMD 241 of the optical mechanism B24.

  The DMD 241 is obtained by integrating mirrors corresponding to pixels according to display resolution on the main surface of a semiconductor chip. The DMD 241 is configured such that each mirror is inclined by + 10 ° or −10 ° around an axis along a diagonal line with respect to the main surface due to an electrostatic field effect of a memory element immediately below each mirror. With such a configuration, each mirror of the DMD 241 is switched between an ON state (a state in which light is reflected in a predetermined direction) and an OFF state (a state in which light is reflected outside a predetermined direction). That is, when each mirror of the DMD 241 is in an ON state, light incident from the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B via a dichroic mirror (not shown) is again guided to the lens unit B21 via the dichroic mirror and the like. In the state, the light incident from the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B through the dichroic mirror or the like is reflected toward the direction other than the lens unit B21.

  The DLP control circuit 232 controls the LED driver 233 that drives the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B, and performs DMD 241 in a time-division manner on the RGB colors from the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B via a dichroic mirror (not shown). To enter. At this time, the DLP control circuit 232 determines at which timing the mirror corresponding to which pixel is turned on or off according to the image to be projected. To determine whether the light is reflected in a predetermined direction, and the ON / OFF state of each mirror of the DMD 241 is controlled.

  Under such control of the DLP control circuit 232, the light reflected in the DMD 241 in a predetermined direction travels to the lens unit B21, passes through the projection lens 210, and enters the mirror mechanism B3. Finally, the light is reflected by the mirror mechanism B3. By being reflected, it is guided to the projection target. Thereby, irradiation light is projected with respect to the screen used as a projection target, and an accessory, and the image | video according to production is formed.

  In the present embodiment, the projector device B2 is configured as a so-called DLP projector. Further, the projector device B2 increases the projection distance to the projection target by turning back the irradiation light by the mirror mechanism B3, and makes the projection distance of the irradiation light as short as possible by setting the contrast ratio to 1000: 1, for example. ing. Thereby, the display unit A including the projector device B2 is configured to be cheaper and smaller, and is easily mounted in a limited space in the cabinet G of the gaming machine 1.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Mechanical configuration of projector device B2)
As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the projector apparatus B2 includes a case B22, a lens unit cover B222, an under cover B223, an upper pedestal B220, and a lower pedestal B221 as components constituting the exterior. A lens unit cover B222 is attached to the front opening B22k of the case B22. The under cover B223 is disposed on the lower surface of the case B22 so as to cover it. The under cover B223 is supported by the lower pedestal B221 via the stay B223a and is also fixed to an appropriate lower surface of the case B22. The projector device B2 is attached to the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12 (see FIG. 8) of the projector cover B1 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. In the present embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 is fixed to the lower surface of the upper wall B12, and the lower pedestal B221 is attached to the upper end of the case B22 so as to cover the upper surface opening of the case B22. Lower pedestal B221 is connected. The procedure for adjusting the attachment of the projector apparatus B2 will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 23, FIG. 24, and FIG. 33, the projector apparatus B2 includes LED substrates 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba, and DMD 241 on which a lens unit B21, LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B are mounted as internal components. DMD board 241a, a plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, 243D, intake fans 244A (FAN1), 244B (FAN2), exhaust fans 245 (FAN3), and projector control board B23. The case B22 accommodates the lens unit B21 while the projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21 is covered by the lens unit cover B222, and also includes LED substrates 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba, a DMD substrate 241a, and a plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B. , 243D, intake fans 244A and 244B, and exhaust fan 245 are accommodated. The projector control board B23 is fixed to the lower surface of the case B22. Although not particularly shown in FIG. 33 and the like, a temperature sensor B25 (see FIGS. 21 and 37) made of, for example, a thermistor is mounted on the LED substrates 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba and the DMD substrate 241a. These temperature sensors B25 detect temperatures near the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B and the lens unit B21, and output a temperature detection signal to the projector control board B23.

  The lens unit B21 includes an optical case B21a that houses a dichroic mirror, a reflector, and the like (not shown), a lens group 210A that includes the projection lens 210, a lens holder B21b that is provided at the front of the optical case B21a while holding the lens group 210A, and A focus mechanism 242 provided on the front right side of the optical case B21a is provided so that a part of the lens holder B21b can be moved in the optical axis direction (front-rear direction). The optical case B21a is provided with openings that allow the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B and the DMD 241 to face from the outside to the inside. The lens holder B21b has a rear portion fixed to the front portion of the optical case B21a, and the front portion is moved relative to the rear portion in the front-rear direction (optical axis direction) by the focus mechanism 242. The projection lens 210 is held. The lens unit B21 is provided with a so-called lens shift mechanism (not shown), and a horizontal or vertical position (horizontal image position, vertical direction) of an image projected by using the lens shift mechanism. (Image position) can be finely adjusted.

  The focus mechanism 242 is for focusing while changing the focal length of the projection lens 210 with respect to the reflection surfaces of the reflection portions D1 to D4 and the projection surfaces E11a and F1a that are displaced with respect to the projector device B2. The focus mechanism 242 is disposed along the optical axis direction of the projection lens 210 with a rack member 242A that can move integrally with the front portion of the lens holder B21b that holds the projection lens 210, and is screwed with the rack member 242A. The lead screw 242B is rotatable while being rotated, and the focus motor 242C is configured to rotate the lead screw 242B. The focus motor 242C is connected to the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23.

  For example, when the focus motor 242C rotates the lead screw 242B in a predetermined direction, the rack member 242A moves to the front side by a feed screw operation, and the projection lens 210 moves to the front side together with the rack member 242A. Since the focal length is relatively long, the focal point (focus position) can be adjusted far away. On the other hand, when the focus motor 242C rotates the lead screw 242B in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction, the rack member 242A moves to the rear side by the feed screw operation, and the projection lens 210 is integrated with the rack member 242A. As a result of the movement, the focal point (focus position) is adjusted closer to a shorter focal length.

  According to such a focus mechanism 242, the focal length can be dynamically changed in conjunction with the movement of the projection planes E11a and F1a. For example, when the projection target is changed from the projection plane E11a to the projection plane F1a, or vice versa, the optical path length from the projection lens 210 to each projection target differs to some extent. The focal point (focus position) can be changed statically so as to have an appropriate focal length according to the length.

  The front portion of the lens holder B21b and the projection lens 210 are covered with a lens unit cover B222. The lens unit cover B222 is provided with a light-transmitting surface B222a that transmits the irradiation light from the projection lens 210, and the light emitted from the projection lens 210 passes through the light-transmitting surface B222a and proceeds to the mirror mechanism B3. .

  The LED board 240Ra is disposed adjacent to the right side of the rear portion of the optical case B21a in the case B22, and the LED light source 240R faces the inside of the optical case B21a. The LED substrate 240Ga is disposed in the case B22 so as to be adjacent to the back side of the rear portion of the optical case B21a, and the LED light source 240G faces the inside of the optical case B21a. The LED board 240Ba is disposed in the case B22 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the rear portion of the optical case B21a, and the LED light source 240B faces the inside of the optical case B21a. The DMD substrate 241a is disposed in the case B22 so as to be adjacent to the left side surface of the optical case B21a, and faces the DMD 241 inside the optical case B21a. Here, in the present embodiment, the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B and the DMD 241 have heat generation characteristics that the LED light source 240G and the LED light source 240B tend to be relatively high, while the LED light sources 240R and the DMD 241 are relatively The trend is low.

  As shown in FIG. 24A, the focus mechanism 242 is disposed on the right side of the lens holder B21b, and the projection lens 210 is disposed on the front portion of the lens holder B21b. The front portion of the lens holder B <b> 21 b can be moved in the optical axis direction of the projection lens 210 by the focus mechanism 242. Although the details of the focus mechanism 242 are omitted, the focus mechanism 242 includes a stepping motor, a lead screw, a carriage, and the like, and is configured to be able to move the front portion of the lens holder B21b in the optical axis direction.

  In other words, the projection lens 210 is integrated with the front portion of the lens holder B21b and can be moved by the focus mechanism 242. As shown in FIG. 24A, the projection lens 210 moves from the rear side toward the front side along the optical axis direction. Or, it moves from the front side toward the rear side.

  As shown in FIG. 24A, light from the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B reaches the DMD 241 via a collimator, a dichroic mirror, and the like (not shown), and is reflected by the DMD 241 and then the lens group 210A by the dichroic mirror and the like. And finally exits through the projection lens 210.

  As described above, the projection lens 210 is configured to move in the optical axis direction. As a result, focus adjustment is performed, and a clear and focused image is displayed on the screen or the accessory whose position has been changed by movement.

  Such a projector device B2 is controlled by the sub-control board SS so that video data relating to the video such as effects is transmitted from the sub-control board SS, and the video is projected onto a screen or an accessory. On the other hand, the sub-control board SS moves the screen mechanisms E1, F1 according to the contents of effects by controlling the screen drive mechanisms E2, F2.

  Here, the sub-control board SS controls the projector device B2 according to the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 due to the effect, and the projection surfaces E11a and F1a of the moved screen mechanisms E1 and F1 and the projection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. The focus is adjusted so that the image is projected clearly.

  The heat sink 243R is disposed on the right side in the case B22, and is in partial contact with the back surface of the LED substrate 240Ra. The heat sink 243G is disposed on the rear side in the case B22, and is in partial contact with the back surface of the LED substrate 240Ga. The heat sink 243B is disposed at the center in the case B22 and partially contacts the back surface of the LED substrate 240Ba. The heat sink 243D is disposed on the left side in the case B22 and is in partial contact with the back surface of the DMD substrate 241a. Here, in this embodiment, the heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D have fin outer sizes that are relatively large for the heat sink 243R and the heat sink 243G, but relatively small for the heat sink 243B and the heat sink 243D. These heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D dissipate heat generated in each of the LED substrates 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba and the DMD substrate 241a into the air, so that the temperature of the optical element and the substrate is changed until the optical characteristics are largely changed. Dissipate heat efficiently so as not to raise the temperature. The heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D, which are heat radiating members, are made of an aluminum material having high heat conductivity in order to enhance the heat radiating effect, and have a plurality of heat radiating fins in order to increase the contact area with air.

  The intake fan 244A is disposed so as to be close to the back surface of the right front portion of the case B22, and is close to the heat sink 243R. The intake fan 244B is disposed so as to be close to the back surface of the left side portion of the case B22, and is close to the heat sink 243D. The exhaust fan 245 is disposed so as to be close to the back surface of the rear portion of the case B22, and is close to the heat sink 243G.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, an intake port B22A is provided at the right front portion of the case B22 to which the intake fan 244A is adjacent, and the heat sink 243R is adjacent to the intake port B22A. An exhaust port B22E is provided at the right rear portion of the case B22. An intake port B22B is provided in a part of the left side of the case B22 close to the intake fan 244B, and the other part of the left side of the case B22 is arranged in the case B22 so as to be aligned with the intake port B22B. The air inlet B22C is provided so that the air reaches the three heat sinks 243G, 243B, 243D through the empty space S. An exhaust port B22D is provided at the rear of the case B22 where the exhaust fan 245 is close.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 33, in the case B22 of the projector B2, the air is forcibly sucked from the air inlet B22A by the air intake fan 244A and then exhausted from the air outlet B22E while taking heat from the heat sink 243R. An air flow path P1 is formed as an air flow. Further, in the case B22, after the air is forcibly sucked from the air inlet B22B by the air intake fan 244B, the heat is taken from the heat sink 243D, the heat sink 243B, and the heat sink 243G, and the air is forced from the air outlet B22D by the exhaust fan 45. An air flow path P2 is formed as a flow of air exhausted in the air. Further, in the case B22, an air flow path is a flow of air that is forcibly exhausted from the exhaust port B22D by the exhaust fan 45 while taking heat mainly from the heat sink 243G or the heat sink 243B after being sucked from the intake port B22C. P3 is formed.

  The projector control board B23 is attached to the lower surface of the case B22 while being covered with the under cover B223. On the projector control board B23, a control LSI 230, an EEPROM 231, a DLP control circuit 232, an LED driver 233, and the like are mounted. The projector control board B23 is electrically connected to the LED boards 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba and the DMD board 241a arranged in the case B22, and the focus mechanism 242.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Position / attitude adjustment of projector device B2)
As shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, the upper pedestal B220 is a sheet metal member fixed to the upper wall portion B12 (see FIGS. 6 and 8) of the projector cover B1, and includes a rectangular main body portion 2200 and a main body portion 2200. The left end 2201a and the right end 2201b that are formed by bending the left and right sides downward and outward and have a step with the main body 2200 and partially extend from the rear side of the main body 2200 to the rear. And a rear end portion 2202 that extends. The main body 2200 and the rear end 2202 are provided with three connection holes 2200A for connecting the lower pedestal B221. These three connecting holes 2200 </ b> A are arranged so as not to be positioned on the same straight line in a plane (horizontal plane) along the main body 2200. Each of the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b is provided with a plurality of square holes 2201c for fixing to the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12 by screw fastening. In the present embodiment, three square holes 2201c are arranged at each of the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b, and are provided at equal intervals in the front-rear direction. The vertical and horizontal inner diameter dimensions of the square hole 2201c are larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T (see FIG. 28) to be inserted and fastened.

  The lower pedestal B221 is a sheet metal member that substantially corresponds to the main body 2200 and the rear end 2202 of the upper pedestal B220. Three connecting screw portions 2210 are integrally formed on the lower base B221 so as to protrude upward corresponding to the three connecting holes 2200A. These three connecting screw portions 2210 are also arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in a plane (horizontal plane) along the lower pedestal B221. The lower pedestal B 221 inserts the tip of the connecting screw portion 2210 into the connecting hole 2200A while externally fitting the coil spring 2211 to each of the connecting screw portions 2210, and sandwiches the coil spring 2211 between the main body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202. The nut 2213 is fastened from the upper surface side of the upper pedestal B220 to the tip of the connection screw portion 2210 via a washer 2212 while being in a state of being in a state of being connected to be suspended from the lower surface of the upper pedestal B220. Further, as shown in FIG. 23, the lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22 and a plurality of screw holes 2215 for screwing the stay B 223a. The lower pedestal B221 is connected to the lower surface of the upper pedestal B220 while supporting the under cover B223 via the case B22 and the stay B223a.

  That is, as shown in FIGS. 23 and 25 to 27, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected to each other at three connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 so that their distances can be adjusted. Each of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 includes a connecting hole 2200A of the upper base B220, a connecting screw portion 2210 of the lower base B221, a coil spring 2211, a washer 2212, and a nut 2213.

  By using the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the projector device B2 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 so that the positioning and the optical axis can be adjusted.

  FIG. 28 shows an attachment form of the upper base B220 to the upper wall part B12 of the projector cover B1. The lower diagram of FIG. 28A is a diagram showing a state in which the mounting screw T is inserted and fastened into the square hole 2201c of the upper base B220, and the upper diagram of FIG. 28A is the diagram of FIG. 28A. It is sectional drawing which follows the BB 'line shown to the following figure. FIG. 28 shows the periphery of the square hole 2201c formed in the left end 2201a of the upper pedestal B220, but the periphery of the remaining square hole 2201c in the left end 2201a and the right end 2201b is the same.

  As shown in FIG. 28 (a), the mounting screw T is inserted into the square hole 2201c from below, and the mounting screw T is disposed at substantially the center of the square hole 2201c. The attachment screw T is screwed to a nut N located on the upper surface side of the upper wall portion B12 via a washer W arranged so as to follow the upper surface of the upper wall portion B12 and the lower surface of the left end portion 2201a. As a result, the left end 2201a of the upper base B220 is attached to the upper wall B12 of the projector cover B1 by screws. The right end 2201b of the upper base B220 is also attached to the upper wall B12 of the projector cover B1 by the same screwing.

  Here, the hatched portion indicated by the symbol A in FIG. 28A is a gap formed between the screw shaft of the mounting screw T and the square hole 2201c. In FIG. 28A, the screw shaft of the mounting screw T is disposed and fixed substantially at the center of the square hole 2201c. At this time, the screw shaft of the mounting screw T can be moved within the range (adjustment range) of the hatched portion indicated by the symbol A. That is, by finely adjusting the relative position of the mounting screw T to the square hole 2201c within the opening range of the square hole 2201c, the left end portion 2201a of the upper base B220 is positioned and adjusted with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1. be able to. Similarly, the right end portion 2201b of the upper base B220 can be positioned and adjusted with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1.

  FIG. 28B shows a state where the left end 2201a of the upper base B220 is shifted in the direction of arrow E with respect to FIG. The upper view of FIG. 28B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line D-D ′ shown in the lower view of FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 28 (b), the screw shaft of the mounting screw T is displaced relatively to the left in the opening range of the square hole 2201c, and is within the hatched portion range (adjustment range) indicated by symbol C. It is possible to move with.

  Thus, the upper base B220 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 while being positioned and adjusted within a predetermined adjustment range that is the opening range of the square hole 2201c. That is, in the projector device B2, the mounting position with respect to the upper wall portion B12 is adjusted in the left-right direction and the front-back direction by the plurality of square holes 2201c provided in the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b of the upper base B220. Thus, the direction of light emitted from projector device B2 is easily adjusted as the reference direction so as to be perpendicular to the left-right direction and coincide with the front-rear direction.

  FIG. 29 shows a connection structure of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220. FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view showing a state where the lower pedestal B221 is connected to the upper pedestal B220 by the connection hole 2200A, the connection screw part 2210, the coil spring 2211, the washer 2212, and the nut 2213 in the connection part R2. In addition, although FIG. 29 shows one connection part R2, the other connection parts R1 and R3 are the same.

  The connection screw portion 2210 of the lower pedestal B221 is inserted into the connection hole 2200A from the lower surface side of the main body portion 2200 of the upper pedestal B220, and is screwed to the nut 2213 via a washer 2212 disposed on the upper surface side of the main body portion 2200. The A coil spring 2211 is externally fitted to the connecting screw portion 2210, and this coil spring 2211 is sandwiched between the lower surface of the main body 2200 and the upper surface of the lower pedestal B221 at the peripheral edge of the connecting hole 2200A. By such a coil spring 2211, the portion in the vicinity of the connecting portion R2 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 is urged in the direction away from each other (vertical direction), so that the screwing between the connecting screw portion 2210 and the nut 2213 is performed. It is possible to prevent loosening at the joint.

  In such a connecting portion R2, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 is changed while being biased by the coil spring 2211 by appropriately turning the nut 2213 in the tightening direction or the loosening direction. Specifically, when the nut 2213 is turned in the tightening direction, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connection R2 is reduced. At this time, the upper pedestal B220 is fixed to an upper wall B12 (not shown in FIG. 29). Therefore, the portion near the connecting portion R2 of the lower pedestal B221 is displaced in a direction approaching the upper pedestal B220 by appropriately tightening the nut 2213, and the height position is adjusted to a higher position. On the other hand, when the nut 2213 is turned in the loosening direction, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connection R2 is increased. That is, the portion near the connecting portion R2 of the lower pedestal B221 is displaced in a direction away from the upper pedestal B220 by appropriately loosening the nut 2213, and the height position is adjusted to a lower level.

  Also in the other connecting portions R1, R3, the height position of the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting portions R1, R3 can be easily adjusted by appropriately adjusting the tightening amount of the nut 2213 in the same manner as described above. Specifically, such connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are not connected to the same straight line in the plane (horizontal plane) along the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. Specifically, the lines connected to each other form a triangle. Are arranged as follows. That is, since the lower pedestal B221 can finely adjust the height position by the tightening amount of the nut 2213 in each of the three connecting portions R1, R2, R3, the posture of the lower pedestal B221 can be The degree of inclination in the three-dimensional space can be adjusted with respect to any of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction.

  Such posture adjustment of the lower pedestal B221 is performed while irradiating light to the screen or the like from the projector device B2 supported by the lower pedestal B221. At that time, an image is projected onto the screen or the like by the irradiation light, and the posture of the lower pedestal B221 is adjusted while confirming the image. Thereby, the optical axis direction of the light irradiated from projector apparatus B2 is adjusted so that an image is projected in an appropriate display mode on the surface of a screen or the like. That is, the optical axis direction can be adjusted in advance so that a so-called trapezoidal distortion or the like does not occur as an image display mode by adjusting the posture of the lower pedestal B221.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the adjustment in the optical axis direction and the like is performed using an adjustment PC 1000 connected to the projector apparatus B2 via the sub control board SS or the like. The projector device B2 attached to the upper wall portion B12 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 is not only adjusted in the optical axis direction but also displayed on the screen and the like during inspection at the factory. Various adjustments necessary for projecting and displaying the video are performed. The adjustment PC 1000 is temporarily connected to the projector control board B23 of the projector device B2 during the adjustment work (see FIG. 37). When the adjustment PC 1000 is operated, optical parameters relating to the projection position of the irradiation light, the focus adjustment, and the like in the projector apparatus B2 are changed by a predetermined command transmitted from the adjustment PC 1000. The projection position and the optical parameters appropriately adjusted in this way are the horizontal direction and vertical direction and focus position adjustment value data (horizontal position (horizontal image position) A to E adjustment values, vertical position (vertical direction). Image position) A to E adjustment values and focus position A to E adjustment values) are stored in EEPROM 231 of projector control board B23 (see FIG. 106). When the adjustment value data of the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, and the focus position stored in the EEPROM 231 is not supplied with power to the projector device B2 for transportation after factory shipment, and the gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall But it can be used as is. Such horizontal position adjustment data and vertical adjustment data are acquired to control the lens shift mechanism of the lens unit B 21, and focus position adjustment value data is acquired to control the focus mechanism 242. . The horizontal position A to E adjustment value, the vertical position A to E adjustment value, the focus position A to E adjustment value, the horizontal position (horizontal image position) A to E offset, and the vertical position (described later) Vertical image position) A to E offset, focus position A to E offset, focus drift correction values A to E, “A to E”, for example, “A” is the projection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D, and “B” is The projection surface E11a, “C” of the front screen member E11 corresponds to adjustment value data corresponding to the projection surface F1a of the reel screen mechanism F1, and “D” and “E” are future expandability (projection surface is It is a reserve that takes into account (when increased).

  As is apparent from the above description with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30, the projector device B <b> 2 is positioned in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction mainly according to the mounting position of the upper pedestal B <b> 220 with respect to the upper wall portion B <b> 12. The optical axis direction is adjusted according to the posture of the side base B221 in the three-dimensional space.

  In the present embodiment, the connecting portions for connecting the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 to each other are provided at three locations. However, if the condition that at least three locations are not on the same straight line is satisfied, four locations are provided. You may make it provide a connection part above. Further, in this embodiment, the connection hole 2200A is provided in the upper pedestal B220 and the connection screw part 2210 is provided in the lower pedestal B221. However, these connection holes and connection screw parts may be provided upside down. The connecting screw portion is not limited to the one integrally formed with the pedestal as in the present embodiment, but may be any one that can be fixed to one pedestal. For example, the connecting screw portion may be a bolt that penetrates and is fixed through the lower pedestal.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Intake / exhaust structure of projector device B2)
As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the case B22 of the projector apparatus B2 is provided with three intake ports B22A, B22B, and B22C and two exhaust ports B22D and B22E. Of the three intake ports B22A, B22B, B22C, two intake ports B22A, B22B are provided with intake fans 244A, 244B, while one intake port B22C is not provided with an intake fan. Of the two exhaust ports B22D and B22E, one exhaust port B22D is provided with an exhaust fan 245, while the other exhaust port B22E is not provided with an exhaust fan.

  At the air inlet B22A, air is forcibly taken into the case B22 by the air intake fan 244A, and this air flow passes through the heat sink 243R as the air flow path P1, thereby depriving the heat sink 243R of heat. Thereafter, the air flow path P1 linearly flows from the heat sink 243R to the exhaust port B22E, and is naturally discharged (heat exhausted) from the exhaust port B22E to the outside of the case B22.

  Also at the air inlet B22B, air is forcibly taken into the case B22 by the air intake fan 244B. The air flow passes through the plurality of heat sinks 243D, 243B, and 243G while passing through a part of the empty space S as the air flow path P2, thereby depriving the heat sinks 243D, 243B, and 243G of heat. Thereafter, the air flow path P2 is drawn into the exhaust fan 245 so as to bend toward the exhaust port B22D, and is forcibly exhausted (exhaust heat) from the exhaust port B22D to the outside of the case B22.

  At the air inlet B22C, air is forcibly taken into the case B22 mainly by the drawing force of the exhaust fan 245. This air flow takes heat from the plurality of heat sinks 243B and 243G by passing mainly through the heat sinks 243B and 243G while passing through a considerable portion of the empty space S as the air flow path P3. Thereafter, the air flow path P3 is also drawn into the exhaust fan 245 so as to bend toward the exhaust port B22D, and is forcedly discharged from the exhaust port B22D to the outside of the case B22 while joining the air flow path P2. (Exhaust heat). The intake fans 244A and 244B and the exhaust fan 245 function as a cooling device for the projector apparatus B2.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the LED light sources 240G and 240B exhibit relatively high heat generation characteristics, while the LED light sources 240R and DMD 241 exhibit relatively low heat generation characteristics. LED substrates 240Ga and 240Ba on which LED light sources 240G and 240B having high heat generation characteristics are mounted are in thermal contact with heat sinks 243G and 243B through which the plurality of air flow paths P2 and P3 pass.

  Here, the plurality of air flow paths P2 and P3 join together at one exhaust port B22D while flowing in from different intake ports B22B and B22C, and flow out from the exhaust port B22D using the exhaust port B22D as a common vent. It has become. As a result, the plurality of air flow paths P2 and P3 are forced to be discharged while being merged, so that a smooth flow can be obtained and the heat sinks 243G and 243B can be efficiently deprived of heat and cooled. .

  Further, since the plurality of air flow paths P2 and P3 are efficiently and forcibly exhausted by the exhaust fan 245, it is possible to effectively collect heat from the plurality of optical elements such as the LED light sources 240G and 240B and the DMD 241 in the projector device B2. Therefore, overheating of optical components such as lenses can be prevented.

  Furthermore, since three more heat sinks 243D, 243B, 243G are cooled by two air flow paths P2, P3 leading to one exhaust port B22D, they are provided corresponding to these heat sinks 243D, 243B, 243G. A plurality of optical elements such as the DMD 241 and the LED light sources 240B and 240G can be cooled more efficiently.

  In the present embodiment, the two air flow paths P2 and P3 are merged at one exhaust port 245. For example, three or more air flow paths P1 are merged at the exhaust port 245. These air flow paths may be collectively discharged from one exhaust port.

(Cabinet G)
As shown in FIG. 34, a display unit A is provided in the upper space of the cabinet G. Further, a power supply device DE and a hopper mechanism HP are provided at the bottom of the lower space of the cabinet G, and the sub-control board SS is provided on the back side (the back wall G3 side of the cabinet G) of the power supply device DE and the hopper mechanism HP. Is provided. That is, the hopper mechanism HP is disposed on the front side of the sub control board SS. A sheet metal BK is installed between the hopper mechanism HP and the sub control board SS. In addition, a sub relay substrate SN is provided between the sub control substrate SS and the intermediate support plate G1. Above the hopper mechanism HP, a medal replenishment mechanism MH (corresponding to a replenishment port) for replenishing metal medals from the outside is provided, and medals are dropped from the medal replenishment mechanism MH to the hopper mechanism HP. A scaler substrate SK for connecting the projector device B2, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, and the touch panel DD19T to the sub control substrate SS is provided above the medal supply mechanism MH.

  In the present embodiment, the sheet metal BK is not in contact with the sub control board SS. The sheet metal BK may be directly attached to the bottom of the sub control board SS. Further, the thin sub-relay substrate SN that is detachably attached to the lower surface of the intermediate support plate G1 and the thin sub-control substrate SS that is detachably attached to the back wall G3 of the cabinet G are shown in side view. It is arranged in a state that the L-shape is turned upside down.

  According to the above configuration, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub control board SS and the hopper mechanism HP, even if a medal is dropped on the hopper mechanism HP and jumps out to the sub control board SS side, It is possible to prevent the medal from physically contacting the sub control board SS. Further, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub-control board SS and the hopper mechanism HP, the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to contact between metal medals in the hopper mechanism HP can be prevented by the sheet metal BK. Further, since the sub control board SS is provided on the back side of the lower space of the cabinet G and is sandwiched between the back wall G3 and the sheet metal BK, the sub control board SS is removed from the cabinet G unless the sheet metal BK is removed. I can't. This enhances the security for the sub control board SS.

(Lower door mechanism DD: Lower door lock mechanism G51)
As shown in FIG. 35, the lower door locking mechanism G51 includes a locked portion G511 fixed to the right end portion of the back wall of the lower door mechanism DD, a locking portion G512 fixed to the right end portion of the cabinet G, Cylinder lock G513.

  The locked portion G511 has two rods to be locked G511a and G511b formed on both ends of a concave frame G511c at the upper and lower portions.

  The locking portion G512 has a long cylinder G5122, and a long locking plate G5121 that is slidably disposed in the vertical direction in the cylinder G5122.

  The locking plate G5121 has claw-shaped claw portions G5121a and G5121b that are locked to the locked rods G511a and G511b. The claw portions G5121a and G5121b are locked bars inserted into the openings G5122a and G5122b provided in the tube G5122 by sliding up and down in the tube G5122 along with the sliding of the locking plate G5121. Locking with respect to G511a and G511b, or locking is released. The locking plate G5121 has a spring that is biased upward.

  The claw portions G5121a and G5121b are locked with respect to the locked rods G511a and G511b when the locking plate G5121 is at a height position for locking the lower door mechanism DD, while the locking plate G5121 is locked with the lower door mechanism DD. It is set so that the locking to the locked rods G511a and G511b is released when it is lowered from the height position where the lock is released to the height position where the lock is released. Further, the claw portions G5121a and G5121b have tip surfaces inclined obliquely downward, and are pushed down by contact with the locked rods G511a and G511b.

  Although not shown in the drawing, the locking portion G512 has a lowering portion in the middle. The pulling portion enables the locking plate G5121 to be pulled downward as a key is inserted into the cylinder lock G513 and rotated. As a result, when the locking plate G5121 is lowered, the locking between the claw portions G5121a and G5121b and the locked rods G511a and G511b can be released. The lower door mechanism DD is provided with a door relay board DS for connecting electronic components and the like on the door side and the cabinet G side.

(Upper door mechanism DU: Upper door lock mechanism G52)
As shown in FIG. 35, the upper door locking mechanism G52 includes a locked portion G521 fixed to the right end portion of the back wall of the upper door mechanism DU and a locking portion G522 fixed to the right end portion of the cabinet G. Have.

  The locked portion G521 has two rods to be locked G521a and G521b formed on both ends of a concave frame G521c at the upper and lower portions.

  The locking portion G522 has a long cylinder G5222 and a long locking plate G5221 that is slidably disposed in the vertical direction in the cylinder G5222.

  The locking plate G5221 has claw-shaped claw portions G5221a and G5221b that are locked to the locked rods G521a and G521b. The claw portions G5221a and G5221b are locked rods inserted into the openings G5222a and G5222b provided in the tube G5222 by sliding up and down in the tube G5222 along with the sliding of the locking plate G5221. The locking is performed with respect to G521a and G521b, and the locking is released.

  The claw portions G5221a and G5221b are locked to the locked rods G521a and G521b when the locking plate G5221 is at a height position where the upper door mechanism DU is locked, while the locking plate G5221 is locked to the upper door mechanism DU. Is set so that the locking to the locked rods G521a and G521b is released when the lock is lowered from the height position where the lock is released to the height position where the lock is released. Further, the claw portions G5221a and G5221b are inclined at the tip end surfaces in a diagonally downward direction, and are pushed down by contact with the locked rods G521a and G521b.

  An opening (not shown) is formed in the cylinder G5222 of the locking portion G522 below the upper door mechanism DU, and a protrusion (not shown) provided on the locking plate G5221 passes through the opening. It protrudes to the inside of the cabinet G. By pulling the projection downward, the locking plate G5221 is lowered, and accordingly, the locking between the claw portions G5221a and G5221b and the locked rods G521a and G521b can be released.

  Here, the protruding portion is slid upward, and is disposed so as to contact the upper portion of the lower door mechanism DD when the locking plate G5221 is in a height position for locking the upper door mechanism DU.

  According to the above configuration, in a state where the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the upper portion of the lower door mechanism DD physically interferes with the protruding portion, thereby preventing the locking plate G5221 from sliding, and the claw portion G5221a. , G5221b and the locked rods G521a and G521b cannot be released, and the upper door mechanism DU can be locked so that it cannot be opened.

  On the other hand, when the lower door mechanism DD is open, physical interference with the protrusions on the upper portion of the lower door mechanism DD is released, so that the locking plate G5221 can slide in the cylinder G5222 and the claw portion G5221a. , G5221b can be unlocked from the locked bars G521a and G521b, and the upper door mechanism DU can be unlocked from the cabinet G.

  Thereby, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, the lower door mechanism DD needs to be unlocked first by the lower door lock mechanism G51. That is, in order to open the upper door mechanism DU, the lock release operation is performed on the lower door lock mechanism G51, and after the lower door mechanism DD is opened, the lock release operation on the upper door lock mechanism G52 is required. Security for the upper space of the cabinet G can be increased. In addition, the upper space of the cabinet G can be more secure than the lower space of the cabinet G, and the lower space of the cabinet G can be accessed more smoothly than the upper space of the cabinet G. Can be a place.

  In order to unlock the lower door mechanism DD, it is necessary to unlock the cylinder lock G513 with a key. The manager of the gaming machine 1 has an advantage that the key is easy to manage because it is compact and suitable for carrying.

  Further, by the sliding of the locking plate G5221, the claw portions G5221a and G5221b are hooked on the locked bars G521a and G521b, or the hooks are released. Accordingly, the upper space of the cabinet G of the upper door mechanism DU can be locked in conjunction with the sliding of the locking plate G5221.

  Further, the upper door lock mechanism G52 is provided at the end opposite to the end portion that is pivotally supported, and is disposed on the side where the upper door mechanism DU is opened and closed, so that the upper door lock mechanism G52 is unlocked. Therefore, it is not necessary to open the lower door mechanism DD greatly. Thereby, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, the lower space of the cabinet G is not unnecessarily exposed to the outside, and security can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, a one-way hinge that applies a predetermined torque in the direction in which the lower door mechanism DD is closed is employed between the lower door mechanism DD and the cabinet G. Thereby, when closing the lower door mechanism DD, torque is applied and the lower door mechanism DD can be quietly closed with respect to the cabinet G without applying a sudden load. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a sudden load from being applied to the protrusion B131 physically interfered by the lower door mechanism DD.

(Relationship between lower door DD1, reel unit RU, and main control board MS)
As shown in FIG. 36, the lower door mechanism DD of the gaming machine 1 includes a lower door DD1, a reel unit RU, and a main control board MS.

  The lower door DD1 is provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the cabinet G (corresponding to a casing). As shown in FIG. 36, the reel unit RU is detachably provided on the back side of the lower door DD1 (inside the cabinet G (lower space side)). In addition to the reels RL, RC, RR, the reel unit RU is provided with a reel drive substrate RD for controlling the reel motor. The main control board MS is detachably provided on the back side of the reel unit RU (inside the cabinet G (lower space side)).

  The main control board MS rotates the reels RL, RC, RR of the reel unit RU based on command signals output from the start lever DD6 and stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R (see FIG. 3). By stopping, the symbols arranged on the reels RL, RC, RR are stopped and displayed.

  By integrating the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS according to the positional relationship of the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS as described above, the gaming machine 1 Can be easily performed when assembling, exchanging and disassembling parts.

  Further, the main control board MS is an important configuration for controlling the game, and measures to prevent unauthorized removal are necessary. However, since the main control board MS is integrated with the reel unit RU, the main control board MS is removed. Can be difficult.

  The main control board MS is provided on the back surface of the reel unit RU provided on the inner side of the lower door DD1. Accordingly, the main control board MS can be disposed on the back side of the cabinet G far from the lower door DD1 by the thickness of the lower door DD1 and the reel unit RU. For this reason, a physical distance can be ensured between the lower door DD1 and the main control board MS, and even if it is illegally intruded through the gap of the lower door DD1, it reaches the main control board MS. It becomes difficult to improve security.

  Further, since the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS are integrated, when changing the specifications of the gaming machine 1, the exterior of the lower door DD1 is changed, and the reel design of the reel unit RU is changed. Changes and game contents can be changed together.

(System configuration of gaming machine 1)
As shown in FIG. 37, the gaming machine 1 includes, as main boards included in the system, a main control board MS, a sub control board SS, a reel drive board RD, a door relay board DS, a sub relay board SN, a scaler board SK, A projector control board B23, a sub liquid crystal I / F board SL, and a screen drive control board CS are provided. Power is supplied to the main control board MS, the sub control board SS, and the like from the power supply board DE1 of the power supply device DE when the power switch DE2 is on. Further, the gaming machine 1 includes a 7-segment display 30 for digital display, an external concentration terminal board 31 for connecting an external display and the like, a graphic board 40, as well-known components other than those described above included in the system. Sub RAM board 41, sub ROM board 42, selector 50 for medal identification, door open / close monitoring switch 51, BET switch 52, checkout switch 53, start switch 54, stop switch board 55, key switch 56 for setting, LED board 60 The LED group 61 for effects and decoration, the speaker group 62 for effects, the 24h door monitoring unit 63, and the door monitoring switch 64 are provided. Description of these known components is omitted.

  A general harness and an optical fiber cable are used for connection of each board | substrate. For example, the main control board MS is connected to these boards and the like via the harness H so as to output a control signal in one direction to each of the reel drive board RD and the 7-segment display 30. The reel drive substrate RD is connected to the door relay substrate DS via the first optical fiber cable FC1 so as to optically transmit various signals in one direction to the door relay substrate DS. The door relay board DS is connected to the main control board MS via the second optical fiber cable FC2 so as to optically transmit various signals in one direction to the main control board MS. As a result, the main control board MS, the reel drive board RD, and the door relay board DS are loop-connected through the harness H and the optical fiber cables FC1 and FC2 so as to transmit a command or the like only in one direction. The sub relay board SN is connected to a security IC 306 (not shown) of the main control board MS via an optical fiber cable (not shown), and the external concentrated terminal board 31 is connected to a security IC 307 (not shown) of the main control board MS. ) Is connected through. The security ICs 306 and 307 of the main control board MS conceal communication data by, for example, encrypting a plain text transmission command by the AES method.

  The main control board MS is a board for controlling the main game operation of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 38, the main control board MS has a main CPU 300, a main RAM 301, a main ROM 302, a clock pulse generation circuit 303, a frequency divider 304, a master I / O communication LSI 305, and security ICs 306 and 307. For example, the main CPU 300 transmits a command for controlling the reel rotation operation and the medal payout operation to the reel drive board RD through the I / O communication LSI 305. Further, the main CPU 300 optically receives signals from various switches (50 to 56) connected to the door relay board DS through the I / O communication LSI 305 and performs predetermined processing based on these signals. . Specific processing of the main control board MS (main CPU 300) will be described later.

  The sub-control board SS is a board for mainly controlling effects accompanying the game of the gaming machine 1. The sub control board SS is connected to the sub relay board SN via a connector (BtoB: board-to-board), and the sub relay board SN and the scaler board SK are connected to each other via a harness H. Various signals are exchanged in both directions.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the sub control board SS has a sub CPU 400, an SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) 401 having a backup function, and a real time clock (RTC: Real Time Clock) 402 which is a date and time measuring circuit. As possible expansion cards, a graphic board 40, a sub RAM board 41, and a sub ROM board 42 are mounted by bus connection. The graphic board 40 includes a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit) 440 and a VRAM (Video Memory) 441. For example, the sub CPU 400 transmits a signal for displacing the projection surfaces E11a and F1a to the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 through the sub relay substrate SN and the screen drive control substrate CS (see FIG. 42). . Further, the sub CPU 400 transmits a video signal for causing the projector device B2, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, and the like to display an image to the projector control board B23 and the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL through the scaler board SK (FIG. 43). reference). Specific processing of such a sub control board SS (sub CPU 400) will be described later.

  The reel drive substrate RD is a substrate for controlling the rotation operation of the reels RL, RC, RR in the reel unit RU and controlling the medal payout operation by the hopper mechanism HP. As shown in FIG. 40, the reel drive board RD includes an I / O communication LSI 310, a reel motor driver 311, and a hopper motor driver 312 that are slaves to the I / O communication LSI 305 that is the master of the main control board MS. For example, the I / O communication LSI 305 receives a payout signal from the hopper mechanism HP, a detection signal from the medal replenishment mechanism switch MHS that detects the drop of the medal into the hopper mechanism HP, a signal from the reel unit RU that indicates the reel rotation state, and the like. Are converted into optical signals according to a predetermined optical communication system, and these optical signals are transmitted to the main control board MS via the first optical fiber cable FC1 and the door relay board DS. Further, the I / O communication LSI 305 inputs control signals for instructing start / stop of reel rotation, payout of medals, etc. from the main control board MS via the harness H, and receives control signals corresponding to these control signals. Then, the data is output to the reel unit RU and the hopper mechanism HP through the reel motor driver 311 and the hopper motor driver 312. As described above, the main control board MS outputs a control signal based on an electrical signal, and the input to the main control board MS is performed by communication via the optical fiber cables FC1 and FC2. This is because there is a problem of quick response with the hopper mechanism HP (transmission time problem due to command transmission). In short, the main control board M and the reel drive board RD are not connected via an optical fiber cable so as not to cause a significant shift in the symbol stop position due to a delay when the reel is stopped after the stop button is pressed, for example. It is like that.

  The door relay board DS relays various signals in one direction from the reel drive board RD and various switches (50 to 56) provided on the door side to the main control board MS provided on the cabinet G side. It is a substrate. As shown in FIG. 41, the door relay board DS includes an I / O communication LSI 500 serving as a slave and an external input driver 501 with respect to the I / O communication LSI 305 serving as a master of the main control board MS. For example, the I / O communication LSI 500 receives signals from various switches and the like (50 to 56) through the external input driver 501, converts them into optical signals according to a predetermined optical communication method, and converts these optical signals. The data is transmitted to the main control board MS via the second optical fiber cable FC2. The I / O communication LSI 500 also receives a signal from the reel driver board RD, converts it to an optical signal according to a predetermined optical communication system, and converts this optical signal to the main control board via the second optical fiber cable FC2. Send to MS.

  The sub-relay board SN is a board for mainly relaying commands from the main control board MS to the sub-control board SS and relaying various signals between the production mechanism and the sub-control board SS. . As shown in FIG. 42, the sub relay board SN includes a security IC 600, a sound IC 601, a digital amplifier 602, and an I2C controller 603. For example, the sub relay board SN transmits the video signal from the sub control board SS to the scaler board SK as a bypass signal, and transmits the screen drive signal from the sub control board SS via the I2C controller 603 to the screen drive control board CS. And the detection signal of the door monitoring switch 64 is exchanged with the door monitoring unit 63 for 24 hours. The security IC 600 receives a security command (such as various commands from the encrypted main control board MS) from the main control board MS and converts the security command into plain text (decrypts the encrypted command). Transmit to the sub control board SS. The sound IC 601 receives an effect sound signal from the sub-control board SS, and transmits a signal corresponding to the sound signal to the speaker group 62 through the digital amplifier 602. The I2C controller 603 receives a lighting signal for production from the sub control board SS, transmits a signal corresponding to the lighting signal to the LED board 60, and between the sub control board SS and the screen drive control board CS. Exchange control signals and sensor signals.

  The scaler substrate SK mainly receives a video signal for production from the sub control substrate SS, divides the video signal, generates video signals corresponding to a plurality of video display numbers, and outputs these video signals to the projector device B2. And a substrate for transmitting to the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. As shown in FIG. 43, the scaler substrate SK includes an MCU (Micro Control Unit) (control LSI) 700, a multi-output scaler LSI (also referred to as resolution conversion LSI) 710, a V-by-one (registered trademark) HS transmitter 711, And SDRAM (DDR SDRAM / DDR2 SDRAM / DDR3 SDRAM, etc.) 712. The MCU 700 is connected to the sub-relay board SN and the multi-output scaler LSI 710, and to the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL and the projector control board B23. The multi-output scaler LSI 710 is connected to the sub control board SS as an input source, and is also connected to the MCU 700, the V-by-oneHS transmitter 711, the SDRAM 712, and the projector control board B23. The V-by-one HS transmitter 711 is connected to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL as an output destination.

  As shown in FIG. 44, the multi-output scaler LSI 710 constitutes an MCU interface (for example, PCI Express) 800 and SDRAM interface (for example, PCI Express) 820 and a resolution conversion output block connected to the MCU 700 and SDRAM 712 (not shown). , Multiple select areas A to D801 to 804, LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) (1), (2) 811 and 812 as a differential interface, LVTTL (Low Voltage Transistor Transistor Transistor LV) as an input / output interface (1), (2) 813, 814, and DSF (Dub) constituting the video division block Having e Scaling Filter) (α) 821, DSF (β) 822.

  The multi-output scaler LSI 710 divides and converts the resolution of, for example, an LVDS signal as a video signal and outputs it. Specifically, the multi-output scaler LSI 710 divides a pair of LVDS signals (LDVS Dual: InPutA, InPutB) by differential transmission from the sub control board SS into two by DSF (α) 821 and DSF (β) 822, Further, each of the four select areas A to D801 to 804 is converted into a predetermined resolution. Thereafter, the multi-output scaler LSI 710 mainly outputs an LVDS signal for projector display (single signals of LVDS1 and LVDS2) through LVDS (1), (2) 811 and 812, and LVTTL (1), (2) 813. , 814, LVTTL signals (LVTTL1 and LVTTL2 RGB signals) for sub liquid crystal display are output. The LVDS signal output from the multi-output scaler LSI 710 is transmitted to the projector control board B23 directly or through the MCU 700, and the LVTTL signal is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711 or the MCU 700. Is done. Specific processing of such a scaler substrate SK (MCU 700, multi-output scaler LSI 710) will be described later.

  The sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL mainly relays the video signal (LVTTL signal) from the scaler substrate SK to the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, and between the sub control substrate SS and the touch panel DD19T via the scaler substrate SK. It is a substrate for relaying various signals. As shown in FIG. 45, the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL includes an MCU 900, a V-by-one HS receiver 901, a liquid crystal driver IC 902, and an LED driver IC 903. For example, the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL receives the video signal from the scaler substrate SK by the V-by-one HS receiver 901 and the MCU 900, and the liquid crystal driver IC 902 receives a control signal for driving the liquid crystal based on the video signal. The LED driver IC 903 transmits a control signal for driving the liquid crystal display backlight to the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. Thereby, in the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, an image is displayed at a predetermined resolution based on the image signal. Further, the MCU 900 receives an operation signal from the touch panel DD19T, and transmits a signal corresponding to the operation signal to the sub-control board SS via the scaler board SK. Thereby, the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS recognizes the input operation corresponding to the operation signal from the touch panel DD19T. Although not particularly illustrated, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 incorporates a temperature sensor such as a thermistor, and a temperature detection signal from the temperature sensor is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL, so that the sub liquid crystal is displayed. The MCU 900 of the I / F board SL can recognize the temperature during operation. Specific processing of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL (MCU 900) will be described later. Specific processing of the projector control board B23 (control LSI 230) shown in FIG. 21 will also be described later.

(Video split display pattern)
In the present embodiment, the sub-control board SS and the sub-control board SS are formed so as to form a divided display pattern as shown in FIG. 46 when the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 displays an effect image or when performing optical adjustment of the projector device B2. The scaler substrate SK performs signal processing to display an image. That is, as shown in FIG. 46, the sub-control board SS has video data for projector display (data block indicated by “α” with a resolution of 1280 × 800) and video data for sub-liquid crystal display (with a resolution of 480 × 800). LVDS dual-in signal composed of one synthesized signal is transmitted to the scaler substrate SK.

  The scaler substrate SK generates two video data α, β from the LVDS dual-in signal by the DSF (α), (β) 821, 822 of the multi-output scaler LSI 710, and SDRAM 712 by buffering these video data α, β. Temporarily store. The video data α and β are developed in the memory space of the SDRAM 712 in an array image as shown on the left side of FIG.

  Thereafter, the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK converts the video data α read from the SDRAM 712 into an LVDS1 signal for display on the projector (video signal indicated by “A” with a resolution of 1280 × 800) through the select area A801 and LVDS (1) 811. Then, the LVDS1 signal A is transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 converts the video data β read from the SDRAM 712 into an LVTTL1 signal (video signal indicated by “C” of resolution 480 × 800) for sub liquid crystal display through the select area C803 and LVTTL (1) 813. The LVTTL1 signal C is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. In this case, the LVDS1 signal A and the LVTTL1 signal C are transmitted at the resolution specified by the sub control board SS without converting the resolution. Accordingly, the projector device B2 can project an image with a resolution corresponding to the number of 1280 × 800 pixels, and the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 can display an image on the screen with a resolution corresponding to the number of 480 × 800 pixels.

  It should be noted that as the split display pattern, variations such as those shown in FIGS. 47 to 52 can be realized according to the display mode change such as the number of screens (display devices) for displaying video and the enlargement ratio change for resolution. ing.

(Modification 1)
For example, as shown in FIG. 47, the sub-control board SS has video data for projector display (data block indicated by “α” with a resolution of 1280 × 800) and video data for sub-liquid crystal display (with a resolution of 1024 × 768). LVDS dual-in signal composed of one synthesized signal is transmitted to the scaler substrate SK.

  At this time, the scaler substrate SK inputs the two video data α, β divided by the DSF (α), (β) 821, 822 based on the received LVDS dual-in signal as shown on the left side of FIG. The array image of pattern 1 or input pattern 2 is expanded in the memory space of SDRAM 712.

  If the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is not set, the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK converts the video data α read from the SDRAM 712 into the select areas A, B 801, 802 and the LVDS as shown in the upper right of FIG. (1), (2) 811 and 812 are converted into a projector display LVDS1 + 2 signal (video signal indicated by “A + B” with a resolution of 1280 × 800), and this LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B is transmitted to the projector control board. At the same time, the MCU 700 reads the video data β read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D803, 804 and the LVTTL (1), (2) 813, 814, and the LVTTL1 + 2 signal for sub liquid crystal display (“C + D of resolution 1024 × 768” The LVTTL1 + 2 signal C + D is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. In this case, the LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B and the LVTTL1 signal C + D are transmitted at the resolution specified by the sub control board SS without converting the resolution. Accordingly, the projector device (for example, abbreviation of WXGA: Wide-XGA) projects an image with a resolution equivalent to the number of 1280 × 800 pixels, and the sub display device DD20 is changed to a sub liquid crystal display device (for example, XGA: eXtended Graphics Array). In the case where the image is provided, the video can be displayed on the screen with a resolution equivalent to the number of 1024 × 768 pixels.

  On the other hand, when the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is set, the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK converts the video data α read from the SDRAM 712 into the select areas A, B 801, 802, and the like as shown in the lower right of FIG. Through LVDS (1), (2) 811 and 812, the LVDS 1 + 2 signal A + B having a resolution of 1920 × 1080, for example, corresponding to the setting value for changing the magnification rate is converted, and this LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B is transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 reads the video data β read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D803, 804 and the LVTTL (1), (2) 813, 814, for example, resolution 1280 × 800 according to the set value of the enlargement ratio change. The LVTTL1 + 2 signal C + D is converted to the LVTTL1 + 2 signal C + D, and the LVTTL1 + 2 signal C + D is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. In this case, the LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B and the LVTTL1 signal C + D are transmitted at a resolution different from that specified by the sub-control board SS, and the projector apparatus and the sub liquid crystal display apparatus have an appropriate resolution suitable for the display characteristics unique to each apparatus. Video can be displayed.

(Modification 2)
Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 48, the sub control board SS has video data for projector display (data block indicated by “α” of resolution 1280 × 800) and two video data (resolution) for sub liquid crystal display. The data block indicated by “β-1” of 800 × 480 and the data block indicated by “β-2” having a resolution of 800 × 480) are combined to generate an LVDS dual-in signal consisting of one combined signal as the scaler substrate SK. Send to.

  At this time, the scaler substrate SK generates three pieces of video data α, β-1, and β-2 divided by DSF (α) and (β) 821 and 822 based on the received LVDS dual-in signal as shown in FIG. The array image of any of the input patterns 1 to 3 as shown on the left side is expanded in the memory space of the SDRAM 712.

  If the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is not set, the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK converts the video data α read from the SDRAM 712 into the select areas A, B 801, 802 and the LVDS as shown in the upper right of FIG. (1), (2) 811 and 812 are converted into a projector display LVDS1 + 2 signal (video signal indicated by “A + B” with a resolution of 1280 × 800), and this LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B is transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 transmits the two video data β-1, β-2 read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D803, 804 and the LVTTL (1), (2) 813, 814 to the LVTTL1 signal for sub liquid crystal display. And the LVTTL2 signal (video signals indicated by “C” and “D” having a resolution of 800 × 480), and the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711 to the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL. Send to. In this case, the LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B, and the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted at the resolution specified by the sub control board SS without converting the resolution. As a result, the projector device (for example, FHD: Full-HD) projects an image with a resolution equivalent to the number of 1280 × 800 pixels, and is different from the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 as a sub liquid crystal display device. When a sub liquid crystal display device (for example, WXGA) is provided, an image can be displayed on each screen with a resolution equivalent to 800 × 480 pixels.

  On the other hand, when the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is set, the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK converts the video data α read from the SDRAM 712 into the select areas A, B 801, 802, and the like as shown in the lower right of FIG. Through LVDS (1), (2) 811 and 812, the LVDS 1 + 2 signal A + B having a resolution of 1920 × 1080, for example, corresponding to the setting value for changing the magnification rate is converted, and this LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B is transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 sets the two video data β-1, β-2 read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D803, 804 and the LVTTL (1), (2) 813, 814. For example, the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D having a resolution of 1280 × 800 are converted into the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D, and the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. . In this case, the LVDS1 signal A + B and the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted at a resolution different from that specified by the sub control board SS, and the projector device (for example, FHD) and the two sub liquid crystal display devices (for example, WXGA) are transmitted. ), It is possible to appropriately display an image with a resolution suitable for display characteristics unique to each device.

(Modification 3)
Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 49, the sub control board SS includes two video data for display on the projector (data blocks indicated by “α-1” and “α-2” having a resolution of 800 × 480) and a sub-control board SS. By combining two video data for liquid crystal display (data blocks indicated by “β-1” and “β-2” with a resolution of 800 × 480), a LVDS dual-in signal composed of one composite signal is scaler substrate. Send to SK.

  At this time, the scaler substrate SK has four video data α-1, α-2, β-1, β− divided by DSF (α), (β) 821, 822 based on the received LVDS dual-in signal. 2 is expanded in the memory space of the SDRAM 712 with any array image of the input patterns 1 to 3 as shown on the left side of FIG.

  Then, the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK selects two pieces of video data α-1 and α-2 read from the SDRAM 712 as shown in the upper right of FIG. 49 if the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is not set. Through the areas A, B801, 802 and LVDS (1), (2) 811, 812, converted into LVDS1 signals and LVDS2 signals (video signals indicated by “A” and “B” with a resolution of 800 × 480), These LVDS1 signal A and LVDS2 signal B are transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 transmits the two video data β-1, β-2 read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D803, 804 and the LVTTL (1), (2) 813, 814 to the LVTTL1 signal for sub liquid crystal display. And the LVTTL2 signal (video signals indicated by “C” and “D” having a resolution of 800 × 480), and the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711 to the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL. Send to. In this case, the LVDS1 signal A and the LVDS2 signal B, and the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted at the resolution specified by the sub control board SS without converting the resolution. Accordingly, the projector device projects an image with a resolution equivalent to the number of 800 × 480 pixels, and when the sub liquid crystal device includes the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and two separate display devices, the projector device is 800 ×. Images can be displayed on each screen with a resolution equivalent to 480 pixels.

  On the other hand, when the magnification change (resolution change) is set, the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK receives two pieces of video data α-1 and α-2 read from the SDRAM 712 as shown in the lower right of FIG. Through select areas A, B 801, 802 and LVDS (1), (2) 811, 812, for example, LVDS1 signal A and LVDS2 signal B having a resolution of 1280 × 720 according to the setting value for changing the enlargement ratio are converted into LVDS1 The signal A and the LVDS2 signal B are transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 sets the two video data β-1, β-2 read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D803, 804 and the LVTTL (1), (2) 813, 814. Is converted into LVTTL1 signal C and LVTTL2 signal D having a resolution of 1024 × 768, for example, and these LVTTL1 signal C and LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted to sub liquid crystal I / F board SL through V-by-one HS transmitter 711. . In this case, the LVDS1 signal A and the LVDS2 signal B, and the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted at a resolution different from that specified by the sub control board SS. In the projector device and the three sub liquid crystal display devices, An image can be appropriately displayed at a resolution suitable for display characteristics unique to the apparatus.

(Modifications 4 to 6)
Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the sub-control board SS includes video data for projector display (data block indicated by “α” or the like) and video data for sub liquid crystal display (“β” or the like). In some cases, a plurality of LVDS single-in signals corresponding to the respective data blocks are continuously transmitted to the scaler substrate SK. Even in such a case, the signal processing similar to the above-described divided display pattern can be divided into LVDS signal and LVTTL signal indicating a predetermined resolution, and the projector device and the sub liquid crystal display device are unique to each device. It is possible to display an image appropriately at a resolution suitable for the display characteristics. In the present embodiment and its modifications 1 to 6, three types of resolutions, FHD, WXGA, and XGA, are exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to these. Array) A higher-definition video may be displayed by using a display device that supports resolutions such as 2K and 4K.

  The scaler substrate may be capable of outputting a plurality of video signals to one display means. For example, the scaler board may generate and output a video signal for partial screen display and a video signal for partial screen display from one video data. The scaler board may generate and output a left-eye video signal and a right-eye video signal for 3D display from one video data. According to this, an image can be displayed by a 3D display method using parallax based on the left-eye video signal and the right-eye video signal from the scaler substrate, and the projector device can display stereoscopic images not only by projection mapping but also by parallax. It is possible to display images with a sense and power.

(Communication specifications of gaming machine 1)
As shown in FIG. 53, the communication specifications between the sub-control board SS and the scaler board SK, between the scaler board SK and the projector control board B23, and between the scaler board SK and the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL The speed (baud rate), data length, stop bit, presence / absence of parity, protocol, and communication format are defined as shown in the figure. The ID is shown separately for easy viewing of the transmission source ID and the transmission destination ID, but is actually 1-byte single data. For example, the ID when the sub control board SS transmits data to the scaler board SK is 21H as data indicating the ID by combining the transmission source ID: 01H and the transmission destination ID: 20H. In the following description, the communication line between the sub control board SS and the scaler board SK is referred to as a first serial line, the communication line between the scaler board SK and the projector control board B23 is referred to as a second serial line, and the scaler board. The communication line between the SK-sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL may be referred to as a third serial line.

(List of commands between each board)
As shown in FIG. 54, commands exchanged between the scaler board SK and the sub control board SS are, for example, “startup parameter request”, “parameter request”, “status”, “ “Reception confirmation” and “Error notification” are defined, and as commands transmitted from the sub control board SS, for example, “Startup parameter request confirmation”, “Setting completion”, “Status request”, “Status request completion” “Output screen division setting number”, “output screen resolution setting”, “input screen division setting number”, and “input screen resolution setting” are defined. The contents and parameters of each command (including data positions (D1 to n) in the communication format) are as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 55, commands exchanged between the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL and the sub control substrate SS are, for example, “startup parameter request”, “parameter” as commands transmitted from the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. “Request”, “Status”, “Reception Confirmation”, and “Error Notification” are defined, and as commands transmitted from the sub control board SS, for example, “Startup Parameter Request Confirmation”, “Setting Complete”, “Status Request” "Status request complete", "Sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting", and "Sub liquid crystal brightness setting" are defined. The contents and parameters of each command (including data positions (D1 to Dn) in the communication format) are as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 56, commands exchanged between the projector control board B23 and the sub control board SS are, for example, “startup parameter request”, “parameter request”, “reception confirmation” as commands transmitted from the projector control board B23. ”,“ Error notification ”,“ LED temperature ”,“ FAN (fan) speed ”,“ LED brightness ”,“ horizontal adjustment value ”,“ vertical adjustment value ”,“ focus adjustment value ”,“ drift correction temperature ” ”Is defined, and commands transmitted from the sub control board SS include, for example,“ start parameter request confirmation ”,“ setting completion ”,“ status request ”,“ status request completion ”,“ LED brightness setting ”,“ "Keystone distortion correction value", "White color temperature setting", "Horizontal position offset", "Horizontal position adjustment value", "Vertical position offset", " Straight position adjustment value "," Brightness setting "," Contrast setting "," gamma setting "," focus offset "," focus adjustment value "," focus drift correction value "," test pattern "is defined. The contents and parameters of each command (including data positions (D1 to n) in the communication format) are as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 57, error information transmitted from the scaler board SK by an error notification transmission command includes “self-diagnosis (RAM check) abnormality”, “scaler output setting abnormality”, “scaler input setting abnormality”, “WDT”. (Watchdog timer) -scaler ", parameters (including data position" D1 "in the communication format), error occurrence conditions, and error states are defined for each error. Error information transmitted from the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL by an error notification transmission command includes “self-diagnosis (RAM check) abnormality”, “touch panel input abnormality”, “sub liquid crystal screen setting abnormality”, “sub liquid crystal display”. There are “abnormal temperature” and “WDT-sub liquid crystal”, and parameters (including data position “D1” in the communication format), error occurrence conditions, and error states are defined for each error. The error information transmitted by the error notification transmission command from the projector control board B23 includes “LED (R) temperature abnormality”, “LED (G) temperature abnormality”, “LED (B) temperature abnormality”, “FAN1 rotation”. "Abnormal", "FAN2 rotation abnormality", "FAN3 rotation abnormality", "Voltage abnormality", "Self-diagnosis (RAM check) abnormality", "WDT-DLP", parameter (data in communication format) for each error The position “D1” or “D2” is included), an error occurrence condition, and an error state are defined. Note that error management areas of a scaler substrate SK, a projector control substrate B23, and a sub-liquid crystal I / F substrate SL described later (SDRAM memory map shown in FIG. 96, DRAM memory map shown in FIG. 106, DRAM memory shown in FIG. 116) The error information and error detection conditions set in (see map) are applied as they are.

(Memory map of PC1000 for adjustment)
As shown in FIG. 58, the memory (DRAM) of the adjustment PC 1000 has a reception storage area, a transmission storage area, and a status storage as work areas for predetermined application software when optical adjustment is performed on the projector apparatus B2. An area is provided. The storage medium (HDD) of the adjustment PC 1000 includes, as items related to optical adjustment, horizontal position A to E adjustment values, vertical position A to E adjustment values, focus position A to E adjustment values, LED luminance settings, and trapezoidal distortion. Correction values, white color temperature settings, brightness settings, contrast settings, gamma settings, test patterns, horizontal position positions A to E offset, vertical positions A to E offset, focus position offsets A to E, and the like are provided. Specific processing of the adjustment PC 1000 will be described later.

(Processing of main control board MS)
[Processing when power is turned on by main CPU 300]
FIG. 59 shows processing when the power is turned on by the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS. As shown in the figure, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main CPU 300 performs a power-on process (S101). In this process, the main CPU 300 determines, for example, whether the backup is normal or whether the setting has been changed appropriately, and performs initialization according to the determination result.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (unit game) (S102). In this process, for example, the main CPU 300 initializes by specifying a storage area for initialization at the end of one game. As a result, the data stored in the internal winning combination storing area or the display winning combination storing area of the main RAM 301 is cleared.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S103). In this process, the main CPU 300 sets an effective line based on the number of inserted sheets and determines whether a start operation is possible.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a random value acquisition process (S104). In this process, the main CPU 300 extracts and acquires random number values and stores them in the random value storage area. The random value is used in the next internal lottery process.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs an internal lottery process (S105). In this process, the main CPU 300 determines an internal winning combination.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs reel stop initial setting processing (S106). In this process, the main CPU 300 initializes an area related to control for stopping the rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a start command generation storage process (S107). In this process, the main CPU 300 generates a start command and stores the generated start command in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The start command stored in the transmission data storage area is transmitted to the sub control board SS by command transmission processing. The start command includes various kinds of information (internal winning combination, gaming state, etc.) necessary for production such as an internal winning combination. Thereby, the sub control board SS can produce an effect according to the start operation.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a wait process (S108). In this process, the main CPU 300 stands by so as not to accept a start operation or the like until a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) elapses from the start of the previous game.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a reel rotation start process (S109). In this process, the main CPU 300 requests the reels RL, RC, RR to start rotating.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs reel rotation start command generation / storage processing (S110). In this process, the main CPU 300 generates a reel rotation start command and stores the generated reel rotation start command in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The reel rotation start command stored in the transmission data storage area is transmitted to the sub control board SS in the command transmission process. Thereby, the sub-control board SS can recognize the start of rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR, and can determine the timing for executing various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a drawing priority order storage process (S111). In this process, the main CPU 300 determines the drawing priority order of the roles that can be displayed, and stores the drawing priority data in a predetermined storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a reel stop control process (S112). In this process, the main CPU 300 performs a process of stopping the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR based on the timing of the stop operation by the player, the internal winning combination, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a winning search process (S113). In this process, the main CPU 300 collates the symbol combination displayed along the active line with the symbol combination table after the reels RL, RC, RR are stopped, determines the display combination, and determines the number of medals to be paid out. Do.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a winning operation command generation / storage process (S114). In this process, the main CPU 300 generates a winning action command and stores the generated winning action command in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The winning action command stored in the transmission data storage area is transmitted from the main control board MS to the sub control board SS in the command transmission process. Thereby, the sub control board SS can determine the production content etc. according to winning.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs medal payout processing (S115). In this process, the main CPU 300 pays out medals based on the payout number of medals determined in the process of S113.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs medal payout end command generation storage processing (S116). In this process, the main CPU 300 generates a medal payout end command and stores the generated medal payout end command in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The medal payout end command stored in the transmission data storage area is transmitted from the main control board MS to the sub control board SS in the command transmission process. Thereby, the sub control board SS can recognize the end of the medal payout.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a bonus end check process (S117). In this process, the main CPU 300 ends the operation of the bonus game when a condition for ending the bonus game is satisfied.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a bonus operation check process (S118). In this process, the main CPU 300 starts the operation of the bonus game when a condition for starting the bonus game is satisfied. The main CPU 300 operates the regame when the regame condition is satisfied. After execution of S118, the main CPU 300 proceeds to the process of S102 again.

[Interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU (1.1172 ms)]
FIG. 60 shows an interrupt process by the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 300 periodically saves the register at a predetermined cycle (1.1172 ms) (S121).

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs input port check processing (S122). In this process, the main CPU 300 confirms the presence or absence of an input signal from the door relay board DS. For example, the main CPU 300 stores signals from the start switch 54, the stop switch board 55, and the like for each interrupt process. Further, the main CPU 300 stores an input state command corresponding to input signals from various switches and the like in a transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The stored input state command is transmitted to the sub control board SS in a data transmission process described later. Thereby, various effects according to the start operation of the unit game and the stop operation of the reels RL, RC, RR can be executed.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs timer update processing (S123). In this process, the main CPU 300 performs a process of updating the timer value set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 301.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs an effect timer update process (S124). In this process, the main CPU 300 performs a process of updating the value of the effect timer set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 301.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a reel control process (S125). In this process, the main CPU 300 performs a process of controlling the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR. Specifically, the main CPU 300 starts rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR in response to a request to start rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR, that is, in response to a start operation, and at a constant speed. Control is performed so that the reels RL, RC, and RR rotate. Further, control is performed so that the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR corresponding to the stop operation stops in response to the stop operation.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs 7SEG drive processing (S126). In this process, the main CPU 300 causes the 7-segment display 30 to display the number of credited medals, the number of payouts, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a data transmission process (S127). In this processing, the main CPU 300 transmits the command stored in the transmission data storage area to the sub control board SS via the security IC 306.

  Next, the main CPU 300 restores the register (S128). Thereafter, the main CPU 300 ends the interrupt process.

(Memory map of sub control board SS)
As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the sub-RAM board 41, the SRAM 401, and the sub-ROM board 42 of the sub-control board SS are provided with various regions when performing optical adjustment on the projector device B2.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the sub-RAM board 41 includes a part of a work area (for example, an area used in the task system or an LED control task described later) for the sub-CPU 400 of the sub-control board SS to perform various controls. The sub-device reception storage area, sub-device transmission storage area, scaler control reception storage area, sub liquid crystal control reception storage area, projector control reception storage area, flag Storage area, scaler setting value storage area, scaler setting confirmation storage area, sub liquid crystal setting value storage area, sub liquid crystal setting confirmation storage area, touch panel input storage area, projector setting value storage area, projector status storage area, drift correction storage area Is provided. For example, the flag storage area includes an EXT reception flag, a reception completion flag, a scaler setting completion flag, a sub liquid crystal setting completion flag, a projector setting completion flag, a scaler setting changing flag, a sub liquid crystal setting changing flag, and a projector setting changing flag. In addition, a scaler start time setting flag, a sub liquid crystal start time setting flag, and a projector start time setting flag are stored. In the touch panel input storage area, an input type, an input X coordinate, and an input Y coordinate are stored. In the drift correction storage area, a drift correction monitoring counter and a focus correction value storage area are provided. The sub device means the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, the touch panel DD19T, and the projector device B2 controlled by the sub control substrate SS, as well as the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2. Such stored information will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 62, in the SRAM 401, as part of the data that can be backed up (for example, the data in the area where the gaming state, the RT state, etc. are backed up are not shown), A setting value storage area and a projector setting value storage area are provided. In the scaler setting value storage area, the output screen division setting number, the input screen division setting number, the output screen 1 to 4 horizontal resolution, the output screen 1 to 4 vertical resolution, the input screen 1 and 2 horizontal resolution, and the input as the scaler setting value The screen 1, 2 vertical resolution is stored. In the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area, sub liquid crystal horizontal resolution, sub liquid crystal vertical resolution, and sub liquid crystal luminance are stored as sub liquid crystal setting values. In the projector set value storage area, as the projector set values, horizontal position A to E offset, horizontal position A to E adjustment value, vertical position A to E offset, vertical position A to E adjustment value, focus position offset A to E, focus drift correction values A to E, LED luminance setting, trapezoidal distortion correction value, white color temperature setting, brightness setting, contrast setting, gamma setting, and test pattern are stored. These setting values will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the sub ROM board 42 includes a part of fixed data (control program for the sub control board SS, various lottery values necessary for games, video data, sound data, LED data, objects (screen (Operation data and the like are not shown), a scaler initial value region, a sub liquid crystal initial value region, and a projector initial value region are provided. The initial value area of the scaler includes the number of output screen division settings, the number of input screen division settings, baud rate, data length, parity, stop, output screen 1 to 4 horizontal resolution, output screen 1 to 4 vertical resolution, and input screen 1 and 2 horizontal. The resolution, input screen 1, and 2 vertical resolution are stored. The sub liquid crystal initial value area stores sub liquid crystal horizontal resolution, sub liquid crystal vertical resolution, and sub liquid crystal luminance. The projector initial value area includes horizontal position A to E offset, vertical position A to E offset, focus position offset A to E, focus drift correction value A to E, LED brightness setting, trapezoidal distortion correction value, contrast setting, Stores gamma settings, white color temperature settings, brightness settings, and test patterns. Such stored information will be described later.

(Processing of sub control board SS)
[Processing at power-on by sub CPU 400]
FIG. 63 shows processing when the power is turned on by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the sub CPU 400 performs initialization processing of the sub control board SS (S131). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 initializes the task system such as error check of the SRAM 401 and initialization of the sub RAM substrate 41 (RAM clear, backup data set of the SRAM 401, etc.). The task system includes an LED control task, a sound control task, a screen accessory control task, a main task, a main board communication task, an animation task, and a sub device task, which will be described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 activates the LED control task (S132). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of the LED control task described later (see FIG. 64).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 activates a sound control task (S133). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of a sound control task described later (see FIG. 65).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 activates a screen accessory control task (S134). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of the screen accessory control task described later (see FIG. 66).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 activates the main task (S135). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of the main task described later (see FIG. 69).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 activates the main board communication task (S136). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of the main board communication task described later (see FIG. 70).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 activates an animation task (S137). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of an animation task described later (see FIG. 72).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 activates a sub device task (S138). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of a sub device task described later (see FIG. 73).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a power interruption recovery process (S139). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 performs processing for restoring backup data at the time of power interruption. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the process when the power is turned on.

[LED control task]
FIG. 64 shows an LED control task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs initialization processing of LED related data (S141).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs LED data analysis processing (S142).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an LED effect execution process (S143).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a period of, for example, 4 msec (S144). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S142.

Sound control task
FIG. 65 shows a sound control task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs initialization processing of sound related data (S151).
Next, the sub CPU 400 performs sound data analysis processing (S152).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sound effect execution process (S153). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S152.

[Screen character control task]
FIG. 66 shows a screen accessory control task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a screen accessory test process in order to confirm whether or not the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 operate normally when the power is turned on (S161). For example, as a test, the reel screen mechanism E1 is first moved to the display position and then moved to the storage position, and then the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to the display position and then moved to the storage position. When an abnormality is detected during the test operation of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, the projector device B2 displays a message to notify the abnormality and requests that the sound control task output a message to notify the occurrence of the abnormality.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether there is registered screen feature data (S162). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not screen feature data that requests the operation of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 exists in a predetermined area of the sub RAM board 41. When the screen feature data exists (S162: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of the next S163. When the screen feature data does not exist (S162: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S164.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a screen accessory operation construction process (S163). In this process, the sub CPU 400 constructs an operation pattern of the screen driving mechanisms E2 and F2 based on the screen accessory data. As an operation pattern of the screen drive mechanisms E1 and F1, for example, in the state in which an image is projected on the front screen mechanism E1, when the accessory data for projecting the image is registered on the reel screen mechanism F1 (front screen mechanism The sub CPU 400 that executes the screen accessory operation construction process sets the storing operation pattern of the front screen mechanism E1 and the front screen when the accessory data instructing the storing operation to E1 is not registered). After the mechanism E1 is stored in the upper part, an operation pattern is constructed in the order of moving the reel screen mechanism F1 to the display surface.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a screen accessory control process (S164). This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a period of 2 msec, for example (S165). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S162.

[Screen character control processing]
FIG. 67 shows a screen accessory control process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 corresponds to the operation start step from the operation pattern of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 constructed by the above-described screen accessory operation construction process, and the screen (projection target) is changed. Is determined (S171). If the screen change occurs in the operation start step (S171: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S172. If it is not an operation start step or does not correspond to the occurrence of a screen change (S171: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S173.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a focus change request process (S172). This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs front screen control processing (S173). In this process, the sub CPU 400 controls the operation of the front screen drive mechanism E2 to move the front screen mechanism E1.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a reel screen control process (S174). In this process, the sub CPU 400 controls the operation of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 in order to move the reel screen mechanism F1.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the focus standby counter is −1 (S175). The focus standby counter is a subtraction counter for generating a predetermined waiting time when the projector apparatus B2 changes the focus position. When the value of the focus standby counter is −1 (S175: Yes), the sub CPU 400 ends the screen accessory control process. When the value of the focus standby counter is not −1 (S175: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S176.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the focus standby counter is 0 (S176). If the value of the focus standby counter is 0 (S176: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S178. When the value of the focus standby counter is not 0 (S176: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S177.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 decrements the value of the focus standby counter by 1 (S177). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the screen accessory control process.

  In S178, the sub CPU 400 requests the projector device B2 to change the focus position after the change. In this processing, the sub CPU 400 stores focus position setting change request data in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits this data to the projector apparatus B2. The focus position setting change request data includes the current focus position before the change and the focus position after the change. Thereby, for example, when the image projection target is switched from the front screen mechanism E1 to the reel screen mechanism F1 or vice versa, the projector device B2 changes the focus position setting. The focus mechanism 242 is controlled based on the request data, and the projection lens 210 can be focused at the focus position corresponding to each of the screen mechanisms E1 and F2.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets −1 in the focus standby counter (S179). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the screen accessory control process.

[Change focus request processing]
FIG. 68 shows focus change request processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 obtains the current focus position (focus positions A to E offset) from the current operating state of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 (S181).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the changed focus position (focus position A to E offset) from the operation pattern of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 constructed from the registered accessory data (S182).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the number of focus change pulses (S183). The focus change pulse number is the number of pulses of the motor drive signal supplied to the focus motor 242C when the focus position is changed, and is a required pulse number corresponding to the current focus position minus the changed focus position. Calculated as an absolute value.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates a focus adjustment time (S184). The focus adjustment time is an actual working time of the focus mechanism 242 for changing the focus position. For example, when a motor drive signal for the focus motor 242C is a pulse square wave with a duty ratio of 0.5, a time (pulse) (Cycle) is multiplied by the number of focus change pulses obtained in S183.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates a transmission time (setting change transmission time) for changing the focus position setting by communication with the projector control board B23 (S185). This setting change transmission time is the transmission time 1 of data exchanged between the sub control board SS and the scaler board SK and the transmission of data exchanged between the scaler board SK and the projector control board B23 in accordance with the setting change of the focus position. It is calculated as the combined time with time 2. Transmission time 1 is obtained by multiplying 1 / baud rate 1 by the number of transmission bits, which is the number of data × (data length + parity + start + stop). Similarly, the transmission time 2 is obtained by multiplying the number of transmission bits by 1 / baud rate 2. In this embodiment, the baud rate 1 is 38400 bps, the baud rate 2 is 19200 bps, the data length is 8 bits, there is no parity, the start and stop bits are 1 bit, and the transmission time 1 and the transmission time 2 obtained using these numerical values. Is calculated.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates a focus change time (S186). The focus change time is calculated as the sum of the setting change transmission time obtained in S185 and the focus adjustment time obtained in S184.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not to change to the front screen mechanism E1 (S187). In the case of a change to the front screen mechanism E1 (S187: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S188. If it is not a change to the front screen mechanism E1 (S187: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S189.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates a moving time 1 for moving the front screen mechanism E1 to a predetermined position (S188). This moving time 1 is the actual working time of the front screen drive mechanism E2. For example, if the motor drive signal for the drive motor E25 of the front screen drive mechanism E2 is a pulse square wave with a duty ratio of 0.5, the pulse width is doubled. It is calculated by multiplying the required time by the required number of motor pulses. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S190.

  In S189, the sub CPU 400 calculates a moving time 2 when moving the reel screen mechanism F1 to a predetermined position. This movement time 2 is the actual working time of the reel screen drive mechanism F2. For example, if the motor drive signal for the drive motor F24 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 is a pulse square wave with a duty ratio of 0.5, the pulse width is doubled. It is calculated by multiplying the required time by the required number of motor pulses.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 divides the difference between the movement times 1 and 2 obtained in S188 or S189 and the focus change time obtained in S186 by 2 corresponding to 2 msec of the processing cycle of the screen accessory control task, and calculates the result. A value corresponding to time is set in the focus standby counter (S190). As a result, for the operation of moving the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 to the predetermined position and the operation of changing the focus position, values that are just the difference between the required times are not set in the focus standby counter. The focus position can be changed to a predetermined position at the timing when the movement operation of F1 is completed. That is, it is possible to project an image with good image quality that is in focus (focus) by changing the focus position even on the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 immediately after the movement.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is focus interlock when displaying the video (for example, “1” when there is a focus interlock flag (not shown), “0” when there is no focus interlock) (S191). . The focus interlock means that the focus position is continuously changed in conjunction with the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1. If there is no focus interlock (S191: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S192. If there is focus interlock (S191: Yes), the sub CPU 400 ends the focus change request process.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets 0 in the focus standby counter (S192). That is, when the focus interlock is not performed, the focus position is immediately changed at the beginning of the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, and when the focus interlock is performed, the focus position is at the timing when the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 is completed. The change of is finished. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the focus change request process.

[Main Task]
FIG. 69 shows a main task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a VSYNC (vertical synchronization signal) interrupt initialization process (S201).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a VSYNC interrupt generated at a cycle of 33 msec (S202).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a drawing process (S203).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 resets the watch dog timer (WDT) (S204). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S202.

[Main board communication task]
FIG. 70 shows a main board communication task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 initializes the communication message queue (S211).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires a reception command from the main control board MS from the communication message queue (S212).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is a reception command (S213). When there is a reception command (S213: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S214. When there is no reception command (S213: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S218.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 checks the received command (S214).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the received command is a valid command (S215). If the received command is a valid command (S215: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of the next S216. When the received command is not a valid command (S215: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S218. Note that the received command is valid, for example, that the value of the command is in the range of 01H to 10H.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 creates game information from the received command, and stores the game information in a predetermined area (not shown) of the sub RAM board 41 (S216). This game information includes, for example, an internal winning combination, a gaming state, a set value, the number of bonus games, and the like.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs command analysis processing (S217). This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a period of, for example, 10 msec (S218). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S212.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 71 shows command analysis processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a command consistency determination process (S221).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs effect content determination processing (S222).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs animation data determination processing (S223).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs LED data determination processing (S224).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs sound data determination processing (S225).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a screen accessory data determination process (S226).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 registers the determined data in a predetermined area of the sub RAM board 41 (S227). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the command analysis process.

[Anime task]
FIG. 72 shows an animation task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 checks for a change from the previous game information (S231).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a main object control process (S232).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a main animation task management process (S233).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs sub object control processing (S234).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub animation task management process (S235).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a period of 33 msec, for example (S236). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S231.

[Subdevice Task]
FIG. 73 shows a sub device task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub device initialization process (S241). This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a scaler control process (S242). This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs sub liquid crystal control processing (S243). This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs projector control processing (S244). This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a period of 10 msec, for example (S245). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S242.

[Subdevice reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 74 shows sub device reception interrupt processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. The sub-device reception interrupt process is a reception interrupt process for capturing communication data transmitted by the scaler substrate SK in response to an external request from a sub-device (sub-liquid crystal display device DD19, touch panel DD19T, projector device B2, etc.). As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the received data from the sub device is 'STX' indicating the start of data (S251). When the received data is “STX (Start of TeXt: 02H)” (S251: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of the next S252. When the received data is not “STX” (S251: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S253.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the ETX reception flag and the reception completion flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to “OFF”, and clears the sub device reception storage area (S252). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device reception interrupt process.

  In S253, the sub CPU 400 stores the received data in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the received data from the sub device is “ETX” indicating the end of the data (S254). When the received data is “ETX (End of TeXt: 03H)” (S254: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of the next S255. When the received data is not “ETX” (S254: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S256.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the ETX reception flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to 'ON' (S255). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device reception interrupt process.

  In S256, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the ETX reception flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 is 'ON'. When the ETX reception flag is “ON” (S256: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S257. When the ETX reception flag is not “ON” (S256: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device reception interrupt process.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub device received data sum check process (S257).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the sum value obtained in S257 is normal (S258). When the sum value is normal (S258: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S260. When the sum value is not normal (S258: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S259. Specifically, in this embodiment, when determining whether or not the sum value is normal, the received data up to “ETX”, excluding “STX” of the received data, is added and received after “ETX”. The consistency of the sum value is determined by collating with the received data. The method for calculating the sum value is not limited to the addition formula, and a subtraction formula or exclusive OR (also referred to as BCC) may be used.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 discards the data in the sub device reception storage area (clears the sub device reception storage area) (S259). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device reception interrupt process.

  In S260, the sub CPU 400 sets the reception completion flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to 'ON'. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device reception interrupt process.

[Subdevice initialization processing]
FIG. 75 shows sub-device initialization processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 initializes a first serial line that is a communication line with the scaler substrate SK (S271).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 copies the value of the scaler setting value storage area of the SRAM 401 to the scaler setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S272). As shown in FIG. 62, the scaler setting values are the output screen division setting number, the input screen division setting number, the output screen 1 to 4 horizontal resolution, the output screen 1 to 4 vertical resolution, the input screen 1 and 2 horizontal resolution, and the input. This corresponds to a device profile indicating the control characteristics of the scaler substrate SK such as the screen 1 and the vertical resolution.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a check process on the range of the scaler setting value stored in the scaler setting value storage area (S273).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not all the scaler setting values in the scaler setting value storage area are values within the valid range (S274). As shown in FIG. 54, the effective range of the scaler set value is defined in advance as a transmission command from the sub control board SS. If all the scaler set values are within the valid range (S274: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S276. When at least one scaler setting value is not within the valid range (S274: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S275.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 initializes the scaler setting value storage area of the SRAM 401 and the scaler setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 as initial values (S275). As shown in FIG. 62, the initial value of the scaler setting value is written in advance in the scaler initial value area of the sub-ROM substrate 42.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 copies the value of the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area of the SRAM 401 to the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S276). As shown in FIG. 62, the sub liquid crystal setting value corresponds to a device profile indicating display characteristics of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 such as sub liquid crystal horizontal resolution, sub liquid crystal vertical resolution, and sub liquid crystal luminance.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a check process on the range of the sub liquid crystal setting values stored in the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area (S277).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not all the sub liquid crystal setting values in the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area are values within the effective range (S278). When all the sub liquid crystal setting values are values within the effective range (S278: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S280. If at least one sub liquid crystal set value is not within the valid range (S278: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S279.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 initializes the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area of the SRAM 401 and the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 as initial values (S279). The initial value of the sub liquid crystal setting value is written in advance in the sub liquid crystal initial value area of the sub ROM substrate 42 as shown in FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 copies the value of the projector setting value storage area of the SRAM 401 to the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S280). As shown in FIG. 62, the projector set values are the horizontal position A to E adjustment value, the horizontal position A to E offset, the vertical position A to E adjustment value, the vertical position A to E offset, and the focus position offset. This corresponds to a device profile indicating the display characteristics of the projector apparatus B2, such as A to E, LED luminance setting, trapezoidal distortion correction value, white color temperature setting, brightness setting, contrast setting, gamma setting, and focus drift correction value A to E.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a check process on the range of the projector setting value stored in the projector setting value storage area (S281).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not all projector setting values in the projector setting value storage area are values within the valid range (S282). When all the projector setting values are values within the valid range (S282: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S284. If at least one projector setting value is not within the valid range (S282: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S283.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 initializes the projector setting value storage area of the SRAM 401 and the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 as initial values (S283). The initial value of the projector setting value is written in advance in the projector initial value area of the sub-ROM board 42 as shown in FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the scaler setting completion flag, the sub liquid crystal setting completion flag, and the projector setting completion flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to 'OFF' (S284). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device initialization process.

[Scaler control processing]
FIG. 76 shows a scaler control process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the transmission source ID of the reception data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 indicates “scaler (ID: 02H shown in FIG. 53)”. Is determined (S291). When the transmission source ID indicates “scaler” (S291: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S292. When the transmission source ID does not indicate “scaler” (S291: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control process.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a received data consistency check process for controlling the scaler board SK (S292). In this process, the sub CPU 400 checks whether or not the value of the command ID included in the received data matches the value of “01H” to “05H” indicating the transmission command from the scaler board SK shown in FIG. The check result is returned as a return value.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines from the return value of the check result whether there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S293). If there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S293: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of the next S294. When there is no abnormality in the consistency of received data (S293: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S295.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 discards (clears) the data in the sub device reception storage area because the consistency of the reception data is abnormal (invalid reception data) (S294). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control process.

  In S295, the sub CPU 400 performs processing at the time of receiving the scaler control. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control process.

[Processing when receiving scaler control]
FIG. 77 shows processing at the time of receiving scaler control by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 copies received data from the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to the scaler control reception storage area (S301).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the received data is an “activation parameter request” (S302). When the received command is “startup parameter request (see CMD: 01H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)” (S302: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S303. When the received command is not “activation parameter request” (S302: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S304.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs processing for receiving a scaler activation parameter request (S303). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control reception process.

  In S304, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the received data is “parameter request (see CMD: 02H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)”. If the received command is a “parameter request” (S304: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S305. If the received command is not a “parameter request” (S304: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S311.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 issues a scaler set value change request (see CMD: 02H, D1: 01H shown in the left column of FIG. 54) based on the parameter value (see FIG. 54) included in the parameter request reception command. It is determined whether or not there is (S305). When there is a request to change the scaler setting value (S305: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S306. When there is no request for changing the scaler setting value (S305: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S309.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the scaler setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘ON’ (S306).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (scaler setting value to be changed) from the scaler setting value storage area (see FIG. 62) (S307).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 uses the acquired setting change content as an argument (a general name of the parameter on the software indicating that the caller delivers the parameter to the subroutine function (process) of the callee), and the scaler setting change process (S308). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control reception process.

  In S309, the sub CPU 400 receives a status request (see CMD: 02H and D1: 02H shown in the left column of FIG. 54) from the scaler board SK based on the parameter value (see FIG. 54) included in the parameter request reception command. It is determined whether or not there is. When there is a status request (S309: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S310. When there is no status request (S309: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler control.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request command transmission process (S310). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request command to the scaler substrate SK. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control reception process.

  In S311, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is “status” (see CMD: 03H shown in the left column of FIG. 54). When the received command is 'status' (S311: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S312. If the received command is not 'status' (S311: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S313.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs processing at the time of receiving the scaler status command (S312). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control reception process.

  In S313, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the received data is “reception confirmation (see CMD: 04H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)”. If the reception command is “reception confirmation” (S313: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next processing of S314. When the reception command is not “reception confirmation” (S313: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S315.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a scaler reception confirmation reception process (S314). This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In S315, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is “error notification (see CMD: 05H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)”. If the received command is “error notification” (S315: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S316. When the received command is not “error notification” (S315: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler control.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs processing when a scaler error occurs (S316).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 outputs a sound scaler error to the speaker group 62 so as to notify the error of the scaler board SK by sound, and simultaneously notifies the LED group 61 of the error by a light emission mode. An LED scaler error occurrence lighting request is made (S317). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control reception process.

[Processing when scaler startup parameter request is received]
FIG. 78 shows processing at the time of receiving a scaler activation parameter request by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a start parameter request confirmation command transmission process (S321). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a “start parameter request confirmation (see CMD: 01H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)” command to the scaler board SK.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the scaler activation setting flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘ON’ (S322). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler activation parameter request.

[Scaler setting change processing]
FIG. 79 shows scaler setting change processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 extracts the setting change contents of the scaler setting value received as an argument (S331).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the output screen division setting number (S332). When the setting change content is the output screen division setting number (S332: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next processing of S333. When the setting change content is not the output screen division setting number (S332: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S334.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs output screen division setting number command transmission processing (S333). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the output screen division setting number in the scaler setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and designates output patterns 0 to 3 as the output screen division setting numbers 1 to 4 'output screen. The command of the division setting number (see CMD: 05H shown in the right column of FIG. 54) ′ is transmitted to the scaler substrate SK. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler setting change process.

  In step S334, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is output screen resolution setting. If the setting change content is output screen resolution setting (S334: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S335. If the setting change content is not the output screen resolution setting (S334: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S336.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs output screen resolution setting command transmission processing (S335). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the output screen resolution in the scaler setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and outputs screen number (1-4), horizontal resolution (480-4060), vertical as the output screen resolution setting. A command of “output screen resolution setting (see CMD: 06H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)” for specifying the resolution (240 to 1600) is transmitted to the scaler substrate SK. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler setting change process. Specifically, as an example, when the output screen division setting number is “2”, an output screen resolution setting command is transmitted to the scaler substrate SK twice (two periods (400 msec)). Output screen number: 1 for the first time, horizontal resolution and vertical resolution corresponding to the output screen number: 1, output screen number: 2 for the second time, horizontal resolution and vertical resolution corresponding to the output screen number: 2 Sent. Similarly, in the case of an input screen resolution setting command described later, the input screen resolution setting command is transmitted to the scaler substrate SK a number of times corresponding to the number of input screen division settings.

  In S336, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the input screen division setting number. When the setting change content is the number of input screen division settings (S336: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next processing of S337. If the setting change content is not the input screen division setting number (S336: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S338.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs input screen division setting number command transmission processing (S337). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the input screen division setting number in the scaler setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and designates 1 or 2 as the input screen division setting number (input screen division setting number (FIG. 54)). (CMD: Refer to 07H in the right column) 'command is transmitted to the scaler substrate SK. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler setting change process.

  In S338, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is an input screen resolution setting. When the setting change content is the input screen resolution setting (S338: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S339. When the setting change content is not the input screen resolution setting (S338: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler setting change process.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an input screen resolution setting command transmission process (S339). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the input screen resolution in the scaler setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and the input pattern (0, 1) corresponding to the input screen number (1, 2) is set as the input screen resolution setting. , A command of “input screen resolution setting (see CMD: 08H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)” for specifying the horizontal resolution (480 to 4060) and the vertical resolution (240 to 1600) is transmitted to the scaler substrate SK. . Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler setting change process. Such scaler setting change processing is executed when an operator of the gaming machine manufacturing factory performs a menu operation using the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and the touch panel DD19T.

[Processing when the scaler status command is received]
FIG. 80 shows processing at the time of receiving a scaler status command by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 extracts a value from “D1” of the received data indicating the status, and determines whether or not the status type is output setting (S341). When the status type is output setting (S341: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S342. If the status type is not output setting (S341: No), that is, if it is input setting, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S343.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the output screen resolution data stored after “D2” of the status reception data in the scaler setting confirmation storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S342). As shown in FIG. 54, the output screen resolution data includes the output division number (1 to 4), the output first to fourth screen horizontal resolution (0 to 4060), and the output first to fourth screen vertical resolution (0 to 1600). Is included. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S344.

  In step S <b> 343, the sub CPU 400 stores the input screen resolution data stored after “D <b> 2” of the status reception data in the scaler setting confirmation storage area of the sub RAM board 41. As shown in FIG. 54, the input screen resolution data includes the number of input divisions (1 or 2), the input first and second screen horizontal resolution (0 to 4060), and the input first and second screen vertical resolution (0 to 1600). It is.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs status request completion command transmission processing (S344). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command indicating completion of the status request to the scaler substrate SK. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler status command.

[Processing on receipt of scaler reception confirmation]
FIG. 81 shows processing at the time of receiving a scaler reception confirmation by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the scaler setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 is “ON” (S351). When the scaler setting changing flag is “ON” (S351: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S352. When the scaler setting changing flag is not “ON” (S351: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the process of receiving the scaler reception confirmation.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (the scaler setting value before the change) from the scaler setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S352).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the scaler setting value storage area is an end block (-1 or 0FFFFH is stored) (S353). When the scaler set value storage area is an end block (S353: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S356. When the scaler set value storage area is not an end block (S353: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S354.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a scaler setting change process (S354). This processing is as shown in FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 updates the data acquisition position (block number) in the scaler set value storage area (S355). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the process for receiving the scaler reception confirmation.

  In S356, the sub CPU 400 performs a setting completion command transmission process. In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits to the scaler substrate SK a command indicating “setting completion (see CMD: 02H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)” of the scaler setting value.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the scaler setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to 'OFF' (S357). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the process for receiving the scaler reception confirmation.

[Sub LCD control processing]
FIG. 82 shows sub liquid crystal control processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 indicates that the transmission source ID of the reception data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 indicates “sub liquid crystal (ID: 04H shown in FIG. 53)”. It is determined whether or not (S361). When the transmission source ID indicates “sub liquid crystal” (S361: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of the next S362. When the transmission source ID does not indicate “sub liquid crystal” (S361: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control process.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal control reception data consistency check process for controlling the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and the touch panel DD19T (S362). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the command ID included in the received data matches the values of “41H” to “45H” indicating the transmission command from the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL shown in FIG. And check results are returned as return values.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data from the return value of the check result (S363). If there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S363: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of the next S364. If there is no abnormality in the consistency of received data (S363: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S365.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 discards the data in the sub device reception storage area (S364). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control process.

  In S365, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal control reception process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control process.

[Sub LCD control reception processing]
FIG. 83 shows sub liquid crystal control reception processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 copies received data from the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to the sub liquid crystal control reception storage area (S371).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is “activation parameter request (see CMD: 41H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)” (S372). When the received command is “activation parameter request” (S372: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of the next S373. When the received command is not “activation parameter request” (S372: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S374.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal activation parameter request reception process (S373). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control reception process.

  In S374, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is “parameter request (see CMD: 42H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)”. When the received command is “parameter request” (S374: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S375. If the received command is not a “parameter request” (S374: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S381.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is a request to change the sub liquid crystal setting value based on the parameter value (see D1: 01H shown in the left column of FIG. 55) included in the parameter request reception command (see FIG. 55). S375). When there is a request for changing the sub liquid crystal setting value (S375: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of the next S376. If there is no sub liquid crystal set value change request (S375: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S379.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the sub liquid crystal setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘ON’ (S <b> 376).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (sub liquid crystal setting value to be changed) from the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area (see FIG. 62) (S377).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal setting change process using the acquired setting change content as an argument (S378). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control reception process.

  In S379, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is a status request from the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL based on the parameter value (see D1: 02H shown in the left column of FIG. 55) included in the parameter request reception command. Determine. When there is a status request (S379: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S380. When there is no status request (S379: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control reception process.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs status request command transmission processing (S380). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request command to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control reception process.

  In S381, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is “status” (see CMD: 43H shown in the left column of FIG. 55). If the received command is 'status' (S381: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S382. If the received command is not 'status' (S381: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S383.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal status command reception process (S382). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control reception process.

  In S383, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the received data is “reception confirmation (see CMD: 44H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)”. When the reception command is “reception confirmation” (S383: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S384. When the received command is not “reception confirmation” (S383: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S385.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal reception confirmation reception process (S384). This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In S385, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is “error notification (see CMD: 45H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)”. When the received command is “error notification” (S385: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S386. When the received command is not “error notification” (S385: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control reception processing.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs processing when a sub liquid crystal error occurs (S386).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs sound sub liquid crystal error generation output to the speaker group 62 to notify the error of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL (sub liquid crystal display device DD19 or touch panel DD19T) by sound, and at the same time, In order to notify the error by the light emission mode, an LED sub liquid crystal error occurrence lighting request is made to the LED group 61 (S387). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control reception process.

[Sub LCD startup parameter request reception processing]
FIG. 84 shows a sub liquid crystal activation parameter request reception process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a start parameter request confirmation command transmission process (S391). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a “start parameter request confirmation” command to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the sub liquid crystal activation time setting flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to 'ON' (S392). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal activation parameter request reception process.

[Sub LCD setting change processing]
FIG. 85 shows sub liquid crystal setting change processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 extracts the setting change content of the sub liquid crystal setting value received as an argument (S401).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting (S402). When the setting change content is the sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting (S402: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S403. When the setting change content is not the sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting (S402: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S404.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting command transmission process (S403). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the sub liquid crystal screen resolution in the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and sets a sub liquid crystal screen resolution (see CMD: 45H shown in the right column of FIG. 55). Is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal setting change process.

  In step S404, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is a sub liquid crystal luminance setting. When the setting change content is the sub liquid crystal luminance setting (S404: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S405. When the setting change content is not the sub liquid crystal luminance setting (S404: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal setting changing process.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal brightness setting command transmission process (S405). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the sub liquid crystal luminance in the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 and sets a sub liquid crystal luminance command (see CMD: 46H shown in the right column of FIG. 55). Transmit to the liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal setting change process.

[Process when receiving sub LCD status command]
FIG. 86 shows processing at the time of receiving a sub liquid crystal status command by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 extracts a value from “D1” of the received data indicating the status, and determines whether or not the status type is a touch input based on the value (S411). When the status type is touch input (S411: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S412. If the status type is not touch input (S411: No), that is, if it is liquid crystal setting, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S413.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the touch input data included in the status reception command in the touch panel input storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S412). As shown in FIG. 55, the touch input data includes an input type and input X and Y coordinates related to the touch panel DD19T. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S414.

  In step S413, the sub CPU 400 stores the liquid crystal setting data included in the status reception command in the sub liquid crystal setting confirmation storage area of the sub RAM board 41. As shown in FIG. 55, the liquid crystal setting data includes horizontal resolution (200 to 800) and vertical resolution (200 to 800).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs status request completion command transmission processing (S414). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command indicating completion of the status request (see CMD: 44H shown in the right column of FIG. 55) to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal status command reception process.

[Sub liquid crystal reception confirmation reception processing]
FIG. 87 shows a sub liquid crystal reception confirmation reception process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the sub liquid crystal setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 is 'ON' (S421). When the sub liquid crystal setting changing flag is “ON” (S421: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next processing of S422. When the sub liquid crystal setting changing flag is not “ON” (S421: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal reception confirmation reception process.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires setting change contents (sub liquid crystal setting values to be changed) from the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area (see FIG. 62) of the sub RAM board 41 (S422).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area is an end block (S423). When the sub liquid crystal set value storage area is an end block (S423: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S426. When the sub liquid crystal set value storage area is not an end block (S423: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S424.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal setting change process using the acquired setting change content as an argument (S424). This process is as shown in FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 updates the data acquisition position (block number) in the sub liquid crystal set value storage area (S425). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal reception confirmation reception process.

  In S426, the sub CPU 400 performs a setting completion command transmission process. In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command indicating the completion of the setting of the sub liquid crystal setting value (see CMD: 42H shown in the right column of FIG. 55) to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the sub liquid crystal setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘OFF’ (S427). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal reception confirmation reception process.

[Projector control processing]
FIG. 88 shows projector control processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the transmission source ID of the reception data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 indicates “projector (ID: 03H shown in FIG. 53)”. Is determined (S431). When the transmission source ID indicates “projector” (S431: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S432. When the transmission source ID does not indicate “projector” (S431: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector control received data consistency check process for controlling the projector device B2 (S432). In this process, the sub CPU 400 checks whether or not the value of the command ID included in the received data matches the value of “81H” to “8BH” indicating the transmission command from the projector control board B23 shown in FIG. The check result is returned as a return value.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data from the return value of the check result (S433). If there is an abnormality in the consistency of received data (S433: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of the next S434. When there is no abnormality in the consistency of received data (S433: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S435.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 discards the data in the sub device reception storage area (S434). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

  In S435, the sub CPU 400 performs projector control reception processing. This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector drift correction process (S436). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

[Processing during projector control reception]
FIG. 89 shows projector control reception processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 copies received data from the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to the projector control reception storage area (S441).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is “activation parameter request (see CMD: 81H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)” (S442). When the received command is “activation parameter request” (S442: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of the next S443. When the received command is not the “activation parameter request” (S442: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S444.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector activation parameter request reception process (S443). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control reception process.

  In S444, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the received data is “parameter request (see CMD: 82H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)”. If the received command is “parameter request” (S444: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S445. If the received command is not a “parameter request” (S444: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S451.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 makes a projector setting value change request (see CMD: 82H and D1: 01H shown in the left column of FIG. 56) based on the parameter value (see FIG. 56) included in the parameter request reception command. It is determined whether or not there is (S445). If there is a request to change the projector setting value (S445: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S446. When there is no request for changing the projector setting value (S445: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S449.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the projector setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to “ON” (S446).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (the projector setting value to be changed) from the projector setting value storage area (S447).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs projector setting change processing using the acquired setting change content as an argument (S448). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control reception process.

  In S449, the sub CPU 400 requests a status request from the projector control board B23 (see CMD: 82H and D1: 02H shown in the left column of FIG. 56) based on the parameter value (see FIG. 56) included in the parameter request reception command. It is determined whether or not there is. If there is a status request (S449: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S450. If there is no status request (S449: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control reception process.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request command transmission process (S450). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request command to the projector control board B23. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control reception process.

  In S451, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the received data is “reception confirmation (see CMD: 83H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)”. When the reception command is “reception confirmation” (S451: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S452. If the reception command is not 'reception confirmation' (S451: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S453.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector reception confirmation reception process (S452). This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In S453, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the received data is “error notification (see CMD: 84H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)”. When the received command is “error notification” (S453: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S454. If the received command is not “error notification” (S453: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S455.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector error notification reception process (S454). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control reception process.

  In S455, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is a status-related command (see CMD: 85H to 8BH shown in the left column of FIG. 56). If the received command is a status-related command (S455: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S456. If the received command is not a status-related command (S455: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control reception process.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector status reception process (S456). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control reception process.

[Projector startup parameter request reception processing]
FIG. 90 shows a projector activation parameter request reception process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a start parameter request confirmation command transmission process (S461). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 transmits a “start parameter request confirmation” command to the projector control board B23.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the projector startup setting flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘ON’ (S462). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 terminates the projector activation parameter request reception process.

[Projector setting change processing]
FIG. 91 shows projector setting change processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 extracts the setting change content of the projector setting value received as an argument (S471).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a horizontal position offset (horizontal position A to E offset) (S472). When the setting change content is a horizontal position offset (S472: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S473. When the setting change content is not the horizontal position offset (S472: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S474.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs horizontal position offset command transmission processing (S473). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the horizontal position offset (horizontal position A to E offset) in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and sets a command for setting the horizontal position offset (in the right column of FIG. 56). CMD: see 88H) is transmitted to the projector control board B23. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

  In S474, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a vertical position offset (vertical direction positions A to E offset). When the setting change content is the vertical position offset (S474: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S475. When the setting change content is not the vertical position offset (S474: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S476.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs vertical position offset command transmission processing (S475). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the vertical position offset (vertical direction positions A to E offset) in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and sets a command for setting the vertical position offset (in the right column of FIG. 56). CMD: 8AH shown) is transmitted to the projector control board B23. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

  In S476, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a focus offset (focus position offsets A to E). When the setting change content is a focus offset (S476: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S477. When the setting change content is not the focus offset (S476: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S478.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a focus position offset command transmission process (S477). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the focus position offsets A to E in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and sets the focus position offsets A to E (CMD: shown in the right column of FIG. 56: 8FH reference) is transmitted to the projector control board B23. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

  In S478, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is focus drift correction (focus drift correction values A to E). If the setting change content is focus drift correction (S478: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S479. If the setting change content is not focus drift correction (S478: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S480.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs focus drift correction value command transmission processing (S479). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the focus drift correction values A to E in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and sets the focus drift correction values A to E (shown in the right column of FIG. 56). CMD: 91H) is transmitted to the projector control board B23. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

  In S480, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is LED brightness setting. When the setting change content is LED brightness setting (S480: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next processing of S481. When the setting change content is not LED brightness setting (S480: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S482.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs LED brightness setting command transmission processing (S481). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the LED brightness setting in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and issues a command (see CMD: 85H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) for setting the LED brightness to the projector control board. Transmit to B23. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

  In S482, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a trapezoidal distortion correction value. When the setting change content is a trapezoidal distortion correction value (S482: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S483. When the setting change content is not the trapezoidal distortion correction value (S482: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S484.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs trapezoidal distortion correction value command transmission processing (S483). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the trapezoidal distortion correction value in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and sets a command (see CMD: 86H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) for setting the trapezoidal distortion correction value. Transmit to the projector control board B23. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

  In step S484, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is a contrast setting. When the setting change content is the contrast setting (S484: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S485. If the setting change content is not the contrast setting (S484: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S486.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs contrast setting command transmission processing (S485). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the contrast setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and sends a command (see CMD: 8CH shown in the right column of FIG. 56) for setting the contrast to the projector control board B23. Send to. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

  In S486, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is gamma setting. If the setting change content is gamma setting (S486: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next processing of S487. If the setting change content is not gamma setting (S486: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S488.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs gamma setting command transmission processing (S487). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the gamma setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and sends a command (see CMD: 8EH shown in the right column of FIG. 56) for setting the gamma value to the projector control board B23. Send to. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

  In step S488, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is a white color temperature. If the setting change content is the white color temperature (S488: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S489. When the setting change content is not the white color temperature (S488: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S490.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs white color temperature command transmission processing (S489). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the white color temperature in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and controls the command for setting the white color temperature (see CMD: 87H shown in the right column of FIG. 56). Transmit to the substrate B23. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

  In S490, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is brightness. If the setting change content is brightness (S490: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next processing of S491. When the setting change content is not brightness (S490: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S492.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a brightness command transmission process (S491). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the brightness in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and sends a command (see CMD: 8CH shown in the right column of FIG. 56) for setting the brightness to the projector control board B23. To send. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

  In S492, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is a test pattern. When the setting change content is a test pattern (S492: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S493. If the setting change content is not a test pattern (S492: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a test pattern command transmission process (S493). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the test pattern in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and sends a command (see CMD: 92H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) for setting the test pattern to the projector control board B23. Send to. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process. Such projector setting change processing is executed when a maintenance worker in the game hall or an inspection worker makes various optical adjustments to the projector device B2 before shipment from the factory.

[Projector reception confirmation reception process]
FIG. 92 shows processing upon reception of a projector reception confirmation by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the projector setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 is 'ON' (S501). When the projector setting changing flag is “ON” (S501: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S502. If the projector setting changing flag is not “ON” (S501: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the process for receiving the projector reception confirmation.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires setting change contents (projector setting values to be changed) from the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S502).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the projector setting value storage area is an end block (S503). When the projector setting value storage area is an end block (S503: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S506. If the projector setting value storage area is not an end block (S503: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S504.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs projector setting change processing using the acquired setting change content as an argument (S504). This process is as shown in FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 updates the data acquisition position (block number) in the projector setting value storage area (S505). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the process for receiving the reception confirmation of the projector.

  In S506, the sub CPU 400 performs a setting completion command transmission process. In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command (see CMD: 82H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) indicating completion of setting of the projector setting value to the projector control board B23.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the projector setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to 'OFF' (S507). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the process for receiving the reception confirmation of the projector.

[Processing when a projector error notification is received]
FIG. 93 shows processing at the time of receiving a projector error notification by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs projector error occurrence processing in response to an error notification from the projector control board B23 (S511).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 outputs a projector error occurrence display request to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL in order to display the error of the projector control board B23 (projector device B2) on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 (S512). ).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 makes a sound projector error occurrence output request to the speaker group 62 to notify the error of the projector control board B23 (projector apparatus B2) by sound (S513). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector error notification reception process.

[Processing when projector status is received]
FIG. 94 shows a projector status reception process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of the command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is 'LED temperature (see CMD: 85H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)' (S521). . When the command type is “LED temperature” (S521: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S522. When the command type is not “LED temperature” (S521: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S523.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the LED temperature data included in the acquired command as a status (parameter value, CMD: 85H, refer to D1 to D3 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41. (S522). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S535.

  In S523, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of the command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is “FAN rotation speed (see CMD: 86H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)”. When the command type is 'FAN rotation speed' (S523: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S524. When the command type is not “FAN rotation speed” (S523: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S525.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the FAN rotational speed data included in the acquired command as the status (parameter value, CMD: 86H, refer to D1 to D3 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41. (S524). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S535.

  In S525, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of the command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is “LED brightness (see CMD: 87H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)”. If the command type is 'LED brightness' (S525: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S526. If the command type is not 'LED luminance' (S525: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S527.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the LED luminance data included in the acquired command as a status (parameter value, CMD: 87H, refer to D1 to D3 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41. (S526). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S535.

  In S527, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of the command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is “horizontal adjustment value (see CMD: 88H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)”. When the command type is “horizontal adjustment value” (S527: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next processing of S528. When the command type is not “horizontal adjustment value” (S527: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S529.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the horizontal direction adjustment value included in the acquired command as a status (parameter value, CMD: 88H, D1 to D10 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41. (S528). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S535.

  In step S529, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command type acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is “vertical adjustment value (CMD: 89H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)”. When the command type is 'vertical adjustment value' (S529: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S530. When the command type is not “vertical adjustment value” (S529: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S531.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the vertical adjustment value included in the acquired command as a status (parameter value, CMD: 89H, see D1 to D5 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41. (S530). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S535.

  In S531, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is “focus adjustment value (CMD: refer to 8AH shown in the left column of FIG. 56)”. When the command type is 'focus adjustment value' (S531: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S532. If the command type is not 'focus adjustment value' (S531: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S533.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the focus adjustment value included in the acquired command as a status (parameter value, CMD: 8AH, see D1 to D10 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41. (S532). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S535.

  In S533, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command type acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is “drift correction temperature (see CMD: 8BH shown in the left column of FIG. 56)”. If the command type is 'drift correction temperature' (S533: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S534. If the command type is not 'drift correction temperature' (S533: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S535.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the drift temperature included in the acquired command as a status (parameter value, see CMD: 8BH, D1 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S534). .

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs status request completion command transmission processing (S535). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command indicating completion of the status request (see CMD: 84H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) to the projector control board B23. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector status reception process.

[Projector drift correction processing]
FIG. 95 shows projector drift correction processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 adds 1 to the value of the drift correction monitoring counter of the sub RAM board 41 (S541). The drift correction monitoring counter is an addition counter for measuring the timing of periodically performing correction and monitoring of the temperature drift related to the optical characteristics of the projector device B2.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is equal to or greater than 120 (approximately equivalent to 1 minute) as a predetermined value (S542). When the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S542: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S543. If the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is less than the predetermined value (S542: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S545.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 clears the value of the drift correction monitoring counter (S543).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets a status request command (see CMD: 83H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) with the projector control board B23 as a transmission destination in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S544). At this time, a drift correction temperature (refer to CMD: 83H, D1, * 1 shown in the right column of FIG. 56) is specified as a parameter in the status request command. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. Note that the command set in the process of S544 is transmitted to the projector control board B23 by the process of S450 of FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the received data is 'drift correction temperature (see CMD: 8BH shown in the left column of FIG. 56)' (S545). When the received command is 'drift correction temperature' (S545: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next processing of S546. If the received command is not 'drift correction temperature' (S545: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 obtains the drift correction temperature from the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and obtains the position coefficient of the focus position (S546). The position coefficient of the focus position is a constant factor for obtaining an optimal correction position (focus correction value) according to the temperature characteristics for each of the focus positions A to E. For example, such a position coefficient may be transmitted as a status from the projector control board B23, or may be stored in advance in the sub-ROM board 42 or the like, or may be displayed on the adjustment screen at the time of optical adjustment shown in FIG. A menu for inputting the position coefficient may be provided and set.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the focus drift correction value by multiplying the acquired drift correction temperature and the position coefficient (S547). The focus drift correction value means a value obtained by correcting the focus position according to the ambient temperature around the lens.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the latest focus drift correction value calculated in S547 is equal to the existing correction value in the focus correction value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S548). When the latest focus drift correction value is equal to the existing correction value (S548: Yes), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. When the latest focus drift correction value is different from the existing correction value (S548: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next processing of S549.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 overwrites and saves the focus drift correction value in the focus correction value storage area (S549).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a focus drift correction value setting change request command to the projector control board B23 (S550).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the focus position and the focus drift correction value in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S551). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process.

(Memory map of scaler board SK)
As shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, various types of information are stored in the ROM included in the SDRAM 712 and the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK. The various storage areas shown in FIGS. 96 and 97 do not indicate all information used in the scaler substrate SK. For example, the control program executed by the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK, the work area used by the MCU 700, and the like are not shown in FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 96, the SDRAM 712 receives a first command for receiving each command in order to exchange commands with the sub control board SS, the projector control board B23, and the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL. To third reception storage area, first to third transmission storage areas for transmitting commands to each, a scaler LSI setting storage area, a status storage area, a flag and other storage area for the multi-output scaler LSI 710, a multi-output scaler LSI 710 In addition, a scaler LSI use area of MCU (control LSI) 700 is provided. For example, the scaler LSI setting storage area stores output first to fourth screen horizontal resolution, output first to fourth screen vertical resolution, input first and second screen horizontal resolution, and output first and second screen vertical resolution. The The flag and other storage areas store the first to third reception completion flags, the first to third EXT reception flags, the scaler LSI setting flag, the reset request flag, the transmission cycle counter, the error management area, and the self-diagnosis storage area. Such stored information will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 97, the MCU 700 ROM stores, as the initial setting values of the scaler LSI, the number of output divisions related to video division, the number of input divisions, the output first to fourth screen horizontal resolution, and the output first to fourth screen vertical resolution. , The input first and second screen horizontal resolution, the input first and second screen vertical resolution are stored, and the first to third line baud rates, the first to third line data lengths, -3rd line parity, 1st-3rd line stop are stored, and a diagnostic value (55AAH) is stored as a value for self-diagnosis. Such stored information will be described later.

(Processing of scaler substrate SK)
[Scaler board main processing by MCU700]
FIG. 98 shows the scaler substrate main processing by the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK. As shown in the figure, when the power is turned on, the MCU 700 performs initialization processing of the scaler substrate SK (S561). This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the first reception completion flag in the SDRAM 712 other storage area is “ON” (S562). When the first reception completion flag is “ON” (S562: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of the next S563. If the first reception completion flag is not “ON” (S562: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S568.

  Next, the MCU 700 acquires reception data (command) from the first reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S563).

  Next, the MCU 700 sets the first reception completion flag in the flag or other storage area to “OFF” (S564).

  Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the acquired reception data indicates “scaler (see ID: 30H shown in FIG. 53)” (S565). When the transmission destination ID indicates “scaler” (S565: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S567. When the transmission destination ID does not indicate “scaler” (S565: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next processing of S566.

  Next, the MCU 700 performs sub-device bypass transmission processing (S566). This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the MCU 700 performs sub-control-scaler reception processing (S567). This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the MCU 700 performs a scaler self-diagnosis process (S568). This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the MCU 700 performs processing during transmission between the sub-control and the scaler (S569). This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the MCU 700 performs a sub control bypass transmission process (S570). This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the flag of the SDRAM 712 or other reset request flag in the storage area is “ON” (S571). When the reset request flag is “ON” (S571: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of the next S572. If the reset request flag is not 'ON' (S571: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S573.

  Next, the MCU 700 waits for the watchdog timer (WDT) to be reset (S572). The watchdog timer reset wait is a process of performing an infinite loop process without clearing (or setting to a predetermined value) the watchdog timer and waiting for the watchdog timer to output a reset signal to the MCU 700. When the timer outputs a reset signal to the MCU 700, the MCU 700 is reset, and the process is restarted from the first step (S561) in the scaler board main process (also referred to as “reboot”). The same applies to S700 of the projector control main process described later and S871 of the sub liquid crystal control main process.

  In S573, the MCU 700 clears the value of the watchdog timer (WDT).

  Next, the MCU 700 waits for a period of 2 msec, for example (S574). Thereafter, the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S562.

[First serial line reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 99 shows the first serial line reception interrupt processing by the MCU 700 of the scaler board SK. The first serial line reception interrupt process is a communication interrupt process for capturing received data in response to an external request from the sub-control board BB via the first serial line during execution of the scaler board main process. The MCU 700 is configured to execute a second serial line reception interrupt process and a third serial line reception interrupt process as well as the first serial line reception interrupt process. The second serial line reception interrupt process is a communication interrupt process that captures received data in response to an external request from the projector control board B23 that passes through the second serial line. This is a communication interrupt process for capturing received data in response to an external request from the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL via the three serial lines. The second and third serial line reception interrupt processes are substantially the same as the first serial line reception interrupt process except that the lines are different.

  As shown in FIG. 99, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the received data from the first serial line (sub control board SS) is “STX (02H)” indicating the start of data (S581). If the received data is 'STX' (S581: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next process of S582. If the received data is not 'STX' (S581: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S583.

  Next, the MCU 700 sets the first ETX reception flag and the first reception completion flag in the SDRAM 712 flag and other storage areas to “OFF”, and clears the first reception storage area (S582). Thereafter, the MCU 700 ends the first serial line reception interrupt process.

  In S583, the MCU 700 saves the reception data from the first serial line (sub control board SS) in the first reception storage area of the SDRAM 712.

  Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the received data is “ETX (03H)” indicating the end of the data (S584). If the received data is “ETX” (S584: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of the next S585. When the received data is not “ETX” (S584: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S586.

  Next, the MCU 700 sets the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the first ETX reception flag in the other storage area to “ON” (S585). Thereafter, the MCU 700 ends the first serial line reception interrupt process.

  In S586, the MCU 700 determines whether the first ETX reception flag in the flag 712 other storage area of the SDRAM 712 is “ON” or not. When the first ETX reception flag is 'ON' (S586: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next process of S587. If the first ETX reception flag is not “ON” (S586: No), the MCU 700 ends the first serial line reception interrupt process.

  Next, the MCU 700 performs a received data sum check process (S587).

  Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the sum value obtained in S587 is normal (S588). When the sum value is normal (S588: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S590. When the sum value is not normal (S588: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of the next S589. The sum value calculation method is the same as that described in the sub-device reception interrupt process (S258 in FIG. 74).

  Next, the MCU 700 discards the data in the first serial line reception storage area (S589). Thereafter, the MCU 700 ends the first serial line reception interrupt process.

  In S590, the MCU 700 sets the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the first reception completion flag in the storage area to “ON”. Thereafter, the MCU 700 ends the first serial line reception interrupt process.

[Scaler initialization processing]
FIG. 100 shows a scaler initialization process by the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK. As shown in the figure, the MCU 700 initializes internal functions (S601).

  Next, the MCU 700 initializes the first to third serial lines (S602).

  Next, the MCU 700 acquires various initial setting values related to input / output of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 from the ROM (S603).

  Next, the MCU 700 performs initial settings related to input / output of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 (S604). In this processing, the MCU 700 performs initial settings for the DSF (α) 821 and DSF (β) 822 and select areas A to D801 to 804 of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 based on the initial setting values acquired from the ROM.

  Next, the MCU 700 sets the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the scaler LSI setting flag and the reset request flag in the storage area to “OFF” (S605). Thereafter, the MCU 700 ends the scaler initialization process.

[Sub-device bypass transmission processing]
FIG. 101 shows sub-device bypass transmission processing by the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK. As shown in the figure, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the destination ID of the received data indicates “projector (30H)” (S611). When the transmission destination ID indicates “projector” (S611: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of the next S612. When the transmission destination ID does not indicate “projector” (S611: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S614.

  Next, the MCU 700 copies the data once taken into the first reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 to the second transmission storage area (S612).

  Next, the MCU 700 performs a second serial line transmission process (S613). In this processing, the MCU 700 outputs the data transmitted from the sub control board SS to the projector control board B23 to the second serial line. Thereafter, the MCU 700 ends the sub device bypass transmission process.

  In S614, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the received data indicates “sub liquid crystal (ID: 40H shown in FIG. 53)”. When the transmission destination ID indicates “sub liquid crystal” (S614: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next process of S615. When the transmission destination ID does not indicate “sub liquid crystal” (S614: No), the MCU 700 ends the sub device bypass transmission process.

  Next, the MCU 700 copies the data once taken into the first reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 to the third transmission storage area (S615).

  Next, the MCU 700 performs third serial line transmission processing (S616). In this process, the MCU 700 outputs the data transmitted from the sub control board SS to the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL to the third serial line. Thereafter, the MCU 700 ends the sub device bypass transmission process.

[Processing during reception between sub-control and scaler]
FIG. 102 shows the sub control-scaler reception process by the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK. As shown in the figure, the MCU 700 receives a command (CMD) of received data (hereinafter referred to as “acquired received data”) acquired from the first reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 from the sub control board SS through S563. It is determined whether or not it is a status request (see CMD: 03H shown in the right column of FIG. 54) (S621). When the acquired command of received data is “status request” (S621: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the processing of the next S622. When the acquired received data command is not “status request” (S621: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S624.

  Next, the MCU 700 registers a command transmission request indicating a “status” corresponding to the output setting (D1: 01H) and the input setting (D1: 02H) of the “status request” to the sub control board SS (S622). ).

  Next, the MCU 700 stores various parameter values (D1) included in the acquired received data in the status storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S623). Thereafter, the MCU 700 ends the sub-control-scaler reception process.

  In S624, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the command of the acquired reception data is “setting complete (see CMD: 02H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)”. If the acquired received data command is “setting complete” (S624: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next processing of S625. If the acquired received data command is not 'setting complete' (S624: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S626.

  Next, the MCU 700 changes the setting of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 with the setting value in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S625). Thereafter, the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S636.

  In S626, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the command of the acquired reception data is “activation parameter request confirmation (see CMD: 01H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)”. If the acquired command of received data is “startup parameter request confirmation” (S626: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next processing of S627. When the acquired command of the received data is not “activation parameter request confirmation” (S626: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S628.

  Next, the MCU 700 sets the flag scaler LSI setting flag in the other storage area of the SDRAM 712 to “ON” (S627). Thereafter, the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S636.

  In S628, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the command of the acquired reception data is “output screen division setting number (see CMD: 05H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)”. If the acquired received data command is “output screen division setting number” (S628: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of the next S629. When the acquired received data command is not the “output screen division setting number” (S628: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S630.

  Next, the MCU 700 saves the output screen division setting number included in the acquired received data in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S629). Thereafter, the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S636.

  In S630, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the command of the acquired reception data is “output screen resolution setting (see CMD: 06H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)”. If the acquired received data command is “output screen resolution setting” (S630: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next processing of S631. If the acquired received data command is not “output screen resolution setting” (S630: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S632.

  Next, the MCU 700 stores the output screen resolution included in the acquired received data in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S631). Thereafter, the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S636.

  In S632, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the command of the acquired reception data is “input screen division setting number (see CMD: 07H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)”. When the acquired command of received data is “input screen division setting number” (S632: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of the next S633. If the acquired received data command is not the “input screen division setting number” (S632: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S634.

  Next, the MCU 700 stores the input screen division setting number included in the acquired received data in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S633). Thereafter, the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S636.

  In step S634, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the command of the acquired reception data is “input screen resolution setting (see CMD: 08H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)”. If the acquired received data command is “input screen resolution setting” (S634: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of the next S635. When the acquired received data command is not “input screen resolution setting” (S634: No), the MCU 700 indicates that the acquired received data command is “status request complete (see CMD: 04H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)”. Therefore, the process proceeds to S636.

  Next, the MCU 700 saves the input screen resolution included in the acquired received data in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S635).

  Next, the MCU 700 registers a transmission request for a command indicating “reception confirmation (see CMD: 04H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)” with respect to the sub control board SS (S636). Thereafter, the MCU 700 ends the sub-control-scaler reception process.

[Scalar self-diagnosis processing]
FIG. 103 shows a scaler self-diagnosis process performed by the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK. As shown in the figure, the MCU 700 writes, for example, “55AAH” as the diagnostic value read from the ROM in the self-diagnosis storage area of the SDRAM 712 by the verify check (S641).

  Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the value (load value) read from the self-diagnosis storage area correctly matches the diagnosis value (S642). When the load value matches the diagnosis value (S642: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S644. If the load value does not match the diagnostic value (S642: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next process of S643.

  Next, the MCU 700 sets “self-diagnostic abnormality” as error data in the error management area of the SDRAM 712 (S643).

  Next, the MCU 700 reads the status of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 (S644).

  Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the status of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 is normal (S645). When the status of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 is normal (S645: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S647. When the status of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 is not normal (S645: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next process of S646.

  Next, the MCU 700 sets “WDT (watchdog timer) -scaler abnormality” as error data in the error management area of the SDRAM 712 (S646).

  Next, the MCU 700 reads the output setting of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 (S647).

  Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the data related to the output setting stored in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 and the output setting of the implementation of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 are the same set value (S648). When the output setting data of the SDRAM 712 and the actual output setting are the same setting value (S648: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S650. When the output setting data of the SDRAM 712 is different from the actual output setting (S648: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next process of S649.

  Next, the MCU 700 sets “scaler output setting abnormality” as error data in the error management area of the SDRAM 712 (S649).

  Next, the MCU 700 reads the input settings of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 (S650).

  Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the data related to the input settings stored in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 and the input settings of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 are the same set values (S651). When the input setting data of the SDRAM 712 and the actual input setting are the same setting value (S651: Yes), the MCU 700 ends the scaler self-diagnosis process. If the input setting data of the SDRAM 712 is different from the actual input setting (S651: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next processing of S652.

  Next, the MCU 700 sets “scaler input setting abnormality” as error data in the error management area of the SDRAM 712 (S652). Thereafter, the MCU 700 ends the scaler self-diagnosis process.

[Transmission between sub-control and scaler]
FIG. 104 shows processing during transmission between the sub control and the scaler by the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK. As shown in the figure, the MCU 700 adds 1 to the transmission cycle counter (S661). This transmission cycle counter is an addition counter for measuring the cycle of transmitting a command from the scaler board SK.

  Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the value of the transmission cycle counter is, for example, 100 or more as a predetermined value (S662). When the value of the transmission cycle counter is equal to or larger than the predetermined value (S662: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next process of S663. If the value of the transmission cycle counter is less than the predetermined value (S662: No), the MCU 700 ends the sub-control-scaler transmission process. In the present embodiment, since the processing is performed at a cycle of 2 msec in the scaler substrate main processing described above, the value of the transmission cycle counter being 100 or more is 2 msec × 100 = 200 msec or more. As a result, data is transmitted to the sub-control board SS approximately at a cycle of 200 msec. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined value of the transmission cycle counter is an arbitrary value (for example, transmission cycle counter: 50 × 2 msec). = 100 msec cycle).

  Next, the MCU 700 clears the value of the transmission cycle counter (S663).

  Next, the MCU 700 determines whether the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the scaler LSI setting flag in the storage area are 'OFF' (S664). When the scaler LSI setting flag is “OFF” (S664: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of the next S665. When the scaler LSI setting flag is not “OFF” (S664: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S666.

  Next, the MCU 700 creates, as transmission data, a command indicating “activation parameter request (see CMD: 01H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)” for the sub-control board SS (S665). This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by a first serial line transmission process of S676 described later. After the process of S665, the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S676.

  In S <b> 666, the MCU 700 determines whether error data exists in the error management area of the SDRAM 712. When error data exists in the error management area (S666: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next process of S667. If there is no error data in the error management area (S666: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S669.

  Next, the MCU 700 creates a command indicating “error notification (see CMD: 05H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)” as transmission data for the sub control board SS (S667). This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by a first serial line transmission process of S676 described later.

  Next, the MCU 700 sets the flag of the SDRAM 712 and other reset request flags in the storage area to “ON” (S668). Thereafter, the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S676.

  In S669, the MCU 700 determines whether or not there is a command transmission request indicating “reception confirmation (see CMD: 04H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)” with respect to the sub control board SS. When there is a transmission request for a command indicating 'reception confirmation' (S669: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next processing of S670. If there is no transmission request for a command indicating 'reception confirmation' (S669: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S671.

  Next, the MCU 700 creates a command indicating “reception confirmation” as transmission data for the sub control board SS (S670). This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by a first serial line transmission process of S676 described later. After the process of S670, the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S676.

  In S671, the MCU 700 determines whether or not there is a command transmission request indicating “status (see CMD: 03H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)” with respect to the sub control board SS. If there is a transmission request for a command indicating 'status' (S671: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next processing of S672. If there is no transmission request for a command indicating 'status' (S671: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S675.

  Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the data in the status storage area of the SDRAM 712 is data relating to output settings (S672). When the data in the status storage area is data related to the output setting (D1: 01H) (S672: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of the next S673. When the data in the status storage area is not data relating to output setting, that is, data relating to input setting (D1: 02H) (S672: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S674.

  Next, the MCU 700 creates, as transmission data, a command indicating “status” related to output setting for the sub-control board SS (S673). This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by a first serial line transmission process of S676 described later. After the process of S673, the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S676.

  In step S674, the MCU 700 creates a command indicating “status” related to the input setting for the sub control board SS as transmission data. This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by a first serial line transmission process of S676 described later. After the process of S674, the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S676.

  In S675, the MCU 700 creates a command indicating “parameter request” for the sub control board SS as transmission data. This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the first serial line transmission processing of the next S676.

  Next, the MCU 700 performs a first serial line transmission process (S676). By this transmission processing, various commands are transmitted from the scaler substrate SK to the sub control substrate SS. Thereafter, the MCU 700 ends the sub-control-scaler transmission process.

[Sub control bypass transmission processing]
FIG. 105 shows sub control bypass transmission processing by the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK. As shown in the figure, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the second reception completion flag in the flag and other storage areas of the SDRAM 712 is 'ON' (S681). When the second reception completion flag is “ON” (S681: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next process of S682. When the second reception completion flag is not “ON” (S681: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S684.

  Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the data stored in the second reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 indicates “sub control” (S682). When the transmission destination ID indicates “sub control” (S682: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the processing of the next S683. When the transmission destination ID does not indicate “sub control” (S682: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S684.

  Next, the MCU 700 copies the data once taken into the second reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 to the first transmission storage area (S683). Thereafter, the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S687.

  In S684, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the third reception completion flag in the SDRAM 712 other storage area is “ON” (S684). When the third reception completion flag is “ON” (S684: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of the next S685. When the third reception completion flag is not “ON” (S684: No), the MCU 700 ends the sub-control bypass transmission process.

  Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the data stored in the third reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 indicates “sub control” (S685). When the transmission destination ID indicates “sub control” (S685: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the processing of the next S686. When the transmission destination ID does not indicate “sub control” (S685: No), the MCU 700 ends the sub control bypass transmission processing.

  Next, the MCU 700 copies the data once taken into the third reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 to the first transmission storage area (S686).

  Next, the MCU 700 performs first serial line transmission processing (S687). By this transmission processing, various data are transmitted from the sub device (projector control board B23, sub liquid crystal I / F board SL) to the sub control board SS via the scaler board SK. Thereafter, the MCU 700 ends the sub control bypass transmission process.

(Memory map of projector control board B23)
As shown in FIG. 106, various information is stored in the DRAM, EEPROM 231 and ROM included in the control LSI 230 included in the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23.

  As shown in FIG. 106, the DRAM of the control LSI 230 is provided with a reception storage area, a transmission storage area, various flags & work areas, a general setting value storage area, a setting data storage area, and various work areas not shown. . For example, various flags & work areas include reception completion flag, EXT reception flag, start setting flag, horizontal position setting flag, vertical position setting flag, focus position setting flag, error management area, transmission cycle counter, status storage area, reset A request flag and a self-diagnosis storage area are stored. In the general setting value storage area, horizontal position A to E offset, vertical position A to E offset, focus position offset A to E, focus drift correction value A to E, LED brightness setting, trapezoidal distortion correction value, white color Stores temperature settings, brightness settings, gamma settings, and contrast settings. The setting data storage area stores horizontal position adjustment values, vertical position adjustment values, focus position adjustment values, LED brightness settings, trapezoidal distortion correction values, white color temperature settings, brightness settings, gamma settings, and contrast settings. . Such stored information will be described later.

  The EEPROM 231 is provided with a basic set value storage area. The basic set value storage area stores horizontal position A to E adjustment values, vertical position A to E adjustment values, and focus position A to E adjustment values. The ROM of the control LSI 230 stores an LED temperature table, a control program for the projector control board B23 (not shown), and various constant values. Such stored information will be described later.

(Processing of projector control board B23)
[Projector control main processing by control LSI 230]
FIG. 107 shows projector control main processing by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, when the power is turned on, the control LSI 230 performs a projector initialization process (S691). This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the reception completion flag in the various flags & work area of the DRAM is “ON” (S692). When the reception completion flag is “ON” (S692: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S693. When the reception completion flag is not “ON” (S692: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S697.

  Next, the control LSI 230 acquires received data from the reception storage area of the DRAM (S693).

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets the various flags & work area flags of the DRAM to “OFF” (S694).

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the acquired received data indicates “projector (ID: 30H shown in FIG. 53)” (S695). When the transmission destination ID indicates “projector” (S695: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next processing of S696. When the transmission destination ID does not indicate “projector” (S695: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S697.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs sub-control-projector reception processing (S696). This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs projector self-diagnosis processing (S697). This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs sub-control-projector transmission processing (S698). This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the various flag & work area reset flag of the DRAM is “ON” (S699). When the reset request flag is “ON” (S699: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next processing of S700. When the reset request flag is not “ON” (S699: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S701.

  Next, the control LSI 230 waits for a reset of the watchdog timer (WDT) (S700). The watchdog timer reset wait is a process for performing an infinite loop process without clearing (or setting a predetermined value) the watchdog timer and waiting for the watchdog timer to output a reset signal to the control LSI 230. When the timer outputs a reset signal to the control LSI 230, the control LSI 230 is reset, and the process is restarted from the first step (S691) in the projector control main process (also referred to as “reboot”).

  In S701, the control LSI 230 clears the value of the watchdog timer (WDT).

  Next, the control LSI 230 waits for a period of 4 msec, for example (S702). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S692.

[Projector serial line reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 108 shows projector serial line reception interrupt processing by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. This process is a communication interrupt process for fetching received data in response to an external request via the second serial line during execution of the projector control main process described above.

  As shown in FIG. 108, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the received data from the second serial line is 'STX (02H)' indicating the start of data (S711). When the received data is 'STX' (S711: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S712. If the received data is not 'STX' (S711: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S713.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets the ETX reception flag and the reception completion flag in the various flags & work area of the DRAM to “OFF”, and clears the reception storage area (S712). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the projector serial line reception interrupt process.

  In S713, the control LSI 230 saves the reception data from the second serial line in the reception storage area of the DRAM.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the received data is “ETX” indicating the end of the data (S714). If the received data is “ETX” (S714: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S715. When the received data is not “ETX” (S714: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S716.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets the ETX reception flag in the various flags & work area of the DRAM to “ON” (S715). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the projector serial line reception interrupt process.

  In S716, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the various flags & work area of the DRAM and the ETX reception flag in the work area are 'ON'. When the ETX reception flag is 'ON' (S716: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S717. When the ETX reception flag is not “ON” (S716: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector serial line reception interrupt process.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs a received data sum check process (S717).

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the sum value obtained in S717 is normal (S718). When the sum value is normal (S718: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S720. When the sum value is not normal (S718: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S719. The sum value calculation method is the same as that described in the sub-device reception interrupt process (S258 in FIG. 74).

  Next, the control LSI 230 clears the reception storage area of the DRAM (S719). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the projector serial line reception interrupt process.

  In S720, the control LSI 230 sets the various flags & work area reception flags in the DRAM to 'ON'. Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the projector serial line reception interrupt process.

[Projector initialization processing]
FIG. 109 shows projector initialization processing by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 initializes internal functions (S721).

  Next, the control LSI 230 initializes the second serial line (S722).

  Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the horizontal position A adjustment value, the vertical position A adjustment value, and other common settings from the EEPROM 231 (S723).

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs setting control processing of the DLP control circuit 232 based on the data acquired in S723 (S724).

  Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the focus adjustment value A (focus on the projection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D) from the EEPROM 231 (S725).

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs an electric focus control process of the focus mechanism 242 based on the data acquired in S725 (S726). Specifically, according to the electric focus control process, a motor drive signal (excitation signal) for the focus motor 242C is output and the focus is adjusted to the focus position. The same applies to the processing of S755 described later.

  Next, the control LSI 230 initializes various flags and work areas of the DRAM (S727). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the projector initialization process.

[Sub-control-projector reception processing]
FIG. 110 shows the sub-control-projector reception processing by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 determines whether the command (CMD) of the received data acquired from the second serial line is a “status request” (S731). When the command of the reception data acquired from the reception storage area of the DRAM in S693 (hereinafter referred to as “acquired reception data” in this process) is “status request” (S731: Yes), the control LSI 230 The process proceeds to S732. If the acquired command of received data is not “status request” (S731: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S734.

  Next, the control LSI 230 registers a command transmission request corresponding to the status (see CMD: 85H to 8BH shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in accordance with the “status request” of the sub control board SS (S732).

  Next, the control LSI 230 stores various parameter values (see CMD: 83H, D1, * 1 shown in the right column of FIG. 56) included in the acquired received data in the status storage area of the DRAM (S733). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the sub-control-projector reception process.

  In S734, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the command of the acquired reception data is “setting complete (see CMD: 82H shown in the right column of FIG. 56)”. When the command of the acquired received data is “setting complete” (S734: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S735. When the acquired command of received data is not “setting complete” (S734: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S736.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs projector internal setting change processing (S735). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S742.

  In S736, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the command of the acquired reception data is “activation parameter request confirmation (see CMD: 81H shown in the right column of FIG. 56)”. If the acquired command of received data is “startup parameter request confirmation” (S736: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next processing of S737. If the acquired command of received data is not 'start parameter request confirmation' (S736: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S738.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets the activation setting flag in the DRAM flag and other storage area to “ON” (S737). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S742.

  In S738, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired received data command is a setting-related command (see CMD: 85H to 91H shown in the right column of FIG. 56). When the acquired received data command is a setting-related command (S738: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S739. When the acquired received data command is not a setting-related command (S738: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S740.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs projector setting value storage processing (S739). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S742.

  In S740, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the command of the acquired reception data is “refer to CMD: 92H shown in the right column of the test pattern diagram 56”. If the acquired received data command is 'test pattern' (S740: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next step S741. If the acquired received data command is not a “test pattern” (S740: No), the control LSI 230 indicates that the acquired received data command is “status request complete (see CMD: 84H shown in the right column of FIG. 56)”. , The process proceeds to S742.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs a test pattern display process (S741). According to this process, when the optical adjustment of the projector apparatus B2 is performed, a test pattern for the operator to confirm the adjustment degree is displayed as a projection image by the projector apparatus B2. When the test pattern is displayed, the simple test pattern is displayed on the screen of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 as a virtual image by simulation. The display mode of the simple test pattern will be described later with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124.

  Next, the control LSI 230 registers a transmission request for a command indicating 'reception confirmation' (S742). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the sub-control-projector reception process.

[Projector internal setting change processing]
FIG. 111 shows projector internal setting change processing by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the various flags & work areas of the DRAM are “ON” (S751). When the activation setting flag is “ON” (S751: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S752. When the activation setting flag is not “ON” (S751: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S757.

  Next, the control LSI 230 reads the horizontal position A adjustment value, the vertical position A adjustment value, the LED brightness setting value, the trapezoidal distortion correction value, the white value from the basic setting value storage area of the EEPROM 231 and the general setting value storage area of the DRAM. A color temperature setting value, a brightness setting value, a gamma setting value, and a contrast setting value are acquired (S752).

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs setting change control processing of the DLP control circuit 232 based on the data acquired in S752 (S753).

  Next, the control LSI 230 calculates a value that becomes the focus position A adjustment value + the focus position offset A as the focus position control data value (S754).

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs an electric focus control process of the focus mechanism 242 based on the control data value acquired in S754 (S755).

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets all the setting flags in the various flags & work area of the DRAM to “OFF” (S756). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the projector internal setting change process.

  In S757, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the position type (A to E) is set in the various flags and work position setting flags in the DRAM. If the position type is set in the horizontal position setting flag (S757: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S758. If the position type is not set in the horizontal position setting flag (S757: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S760.

  Next, the control LSI 230 calculates a value that is a horizontal position (change) adjustment value + horizontal position (change) offset as a control data value indicating the horizontal position of the video projection (S758). Note that (change) corresponds to the position after the change in the horizontal position adjustment values A to E and the horizontal position offsets A to E. For example, if the change is (B), the horizontal position control data value is the horizontal position B adjustment value + the horizontal position B offset.

  Next, the control LSI 230 clears various flags and work position setting flags in the DRAM (S759). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 transitions to the process of S763.

  In S760, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the position type (A to E) is set in the various flags & work area of the DRAM and the vertical position setting flag in the work area. If the position type is set in the vertical position setting flag (S760: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next step S761. When the position type is not set in the vertical position setting flag (S760: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S7640.

  Next, the control LSI 230 calculates a value that is a vertical position (change) adjustment value + a vertical position (change) offset as a control data value indicating the vertical position of the video projection (S761). Note that (change) corresponds to the position after the change in the vertical position adjustment values A to E and the vertical position offsets A to E.

  Next, the control LSI 230 clears various flags and work position setting flags in the DRAM (S762).

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs a setting change control process of the DLP control circuit 232 based on the control data value acquired in S758 or S761 (S763). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the projector internal setting change process.

  In step S764, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the position types (A to E) are set in the various flags and work position setting flags in the DRAM. When the position type is set in the focus position setting flag (S764: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S765. When the position type is not set in the focus position setting flag (S764: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector internal setting change process.

  Next, the control LSI 230 calculates a value that becomes the focus position (change) adjustment value + focus position offset (change) + focus drift correction (change) as the control data value of the focus position (S765). (Change) corresponds to the position after the change of the focus adjustment values A to E and the focus position offsets A to E.

  Next, the control LSI 230 clears various flags and work position setting flags in the DRAM (S766).

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs the electric focus control process of the focus mechanism 242 based on the control data value acquired in S765 as in S755 (S767). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the projector internal setting change process.

[Projector setting value storage processing]
FIG. 112 shows projector setting value storage processing by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 performs a setting range determination process based on the setting value data of the reception data acquired from the reception storage area in S693 (S771). In this setting range determination process, it is determined whether or not the value is in the range described in the parameter column of CMD: 85H to 8AH shown in the left column of FIG. 56, and the determination result is returned as a return value.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether the acquired set value data is valid data from the return value of the determination result (S772). When the acquired set value data is valid data (S772: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S773. If the acquired setting value data is not valid data (S772: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector setting value storage processing.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired setting value is a type to be stored in the EEPROM 231 (basic setting value, CMD: 89H, 8B, 90H shown in the right column of FIG. 56, and EEPROM shown in FIG. 106). (S773). When the acquired setting value is a type to be stored in the EEPROM 231 (S773: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next processing of S774. The acquired setting value is not the type to be stored in the EEPROM 231, that is, the general setting value to be stored in the DRAM (CMD: 85H to 88H, 8AH, 8CH to 8FH, 91H shown in the right column of FIG. 56 and the DRAM shown in FIG. 106) ) Or the like (S773: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S776.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the transmission source ID of the acquired data is “adjustment PC (ID: 05H shown in FIG. 53)” (S774). When the transmission source ID is “adjustment PC” (S774: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next processing of S775. When the transmission source ID is not 'adjustment PC' (S774: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector setting value storage process.

  Next, the control LSI 230 saves the acquired setting value in a designated position in the basic setting value storage area of the EEPROM 231 (see the EEPROM shown in FIG. 106) (S775). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the projector setting value storage process. Thereby, the basic setting items related to the optical adjustment of the projector apparatus B2 can be changed on the EEPROM 231 in accordance with the operation of the adjustment PC 1000.

  In S776, the control LSI 230 saves the acquired setting value at a designated position in the general setting value storage area of the DRAM (see the DRAM shown in FIG. 106). Thereby, the general setting items related to the optical adjustment of the projector device B2 can be changed on the DRAM not only by the operation of the adjustment PC 1000 but also by the operation using the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 or the touch panel DD19T.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the type of installation value is a horizontal position offset (S777). When the type of the installation value is horizontal position offset (S777: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S778. When the type of the installation value is not the horizontal position offset (S777: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S779.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets the position types (A to E) in various flags and work area setting flags in the DRAM (S778). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the projector setting value storage process.

  In step S779, the control LSI 230 determines whether the type of the setting value is a vertical position offset. When the type of the installation value is the vertical position offset (S779: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S780. When the installation value type is not the vertical position offset (S779: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S781.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets the position type (A to E) in the various flags & work area vertical setting flag of the DRAM (S780). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the projector setting value storage process.

  In step S781, the control LSI 230 determines whether the type of the setting value is a focus position offset. When the type of the setting value is the focus position offset (S781: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S782. If the installation value type is not the focus position offset (S781: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector setting value storage process.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets the position types (A to E) in the various flags and work position setting flags in the DRAM (S782). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the projector setting value storage process.

[Projector self-diagnosis processing]
FIG. 113 shows projector self-diagnosis processing by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 writes, for example, “55AAH” as the diagnostic value read from the ROM in the self-diagnosis storage area of the DRAM by the verify check (S791).

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the value (load value) read from the self-diagnosis storage area correctly matches the diagnosis value (S792). If the load value matches the diagnostic value (S792: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S794. When the load value does not match the diagnostic value (S792: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next processing of S793.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets “self-diagnostic abnormality (see projector control board error information shown in FIG. 57)” as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S793).

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs LED temperature diagnosis processing (S794). In this process, the control LSI 230 acquires the LED temperature based on the temperature detection signal from the temperature sensor B25.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired LED temperature is normal (S795). When the acquired LED temperature is normal (S795: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S797. When the acquired LED temperature is not normal (S795: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S796.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets “LED temperature abnormality” as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S796). More specifically, the temperature sensor B25 detects the temperature in the vicinity of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B and in the vicinity of the lens unit B21. The control LSI 230 measures each temperature through the temperature sensor B25, so that when the condition in the condition column for abnormal LED temperature in the projector control board error information shown in FIG. Set to area. For example, the LED (G) temperature abnormality related to the LED light source 240G is a warning (01B (B means Bit) when the temperature in the vicinity of the LED light source 240G detected by the temperature sensor B25 is 105 ° C. or higher and lower than 110 ° C. )) Is set, and if it is 110 ° C. or higher, shutdown (11B) is set.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs FAN rotation diagnosis processing (S797). In this process, the control LSI 230 acquires the FAN rotation speed based on the fan rotation speed signal from the fans 244A, 244B, and 245.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired FAN rotation speed is normal (S798). When the acquired FAN rotation speed is normal (S798: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S800. If the acquired FAN rotation speed is not normal (S798: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S799.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets “FAN rotation abnormality” as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S799). Specifically, the FAN rotation abnormality is set according to the conditions of the FAN1 to 4 rotation abnormality of the projector control board error information shown in FIG.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs projector power supply diagnosis processing (S800). In this process, the control LSI 230 detects the operating voltage supplied to the projector device B2.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the operating voltage of the projector device B2 is equal to or higher than a specified voltage (S801). When the operating voltage of the projector device B2 is equal to or higher than the specified voltage (S801: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S803. When the operating voltage of the projector device B2 is less than the specified voltage (S801: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S802.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets “voltage abnormality” as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S802). Specifically, the voltage abnormality is set according to the voltage abnormality condition of the projector control board error information shown in FIG.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs a DLP operation diagnosis process (S803). In this process, the control LSI 230 checks the operation of the DLP control circuit 232.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is normal (S804). When the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is normal (S804: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S806. When the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is not normal (S804: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S805.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets “DLP abnormality” as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S805). Specifically, the DLP abnormality is set according to the WDT-DLP condition of the projector control board error information shown in FIG.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not data indicating “LED temperature abnormality” (forced shutdown), “FAN rotation abnormality”, or “voltage abnormality” is set in the error management area (S806). . When data indicating any of the above abnormalities is set in the error management area (S806: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next processing of S307. If none of the data indicating the abnormality is set in the error management area (S806: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector self-diagnosis process.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sends a rotation stop command to the FANs 1 to 3 (fans 244A, 244B, 245) or to the DLP control circuit 232 and the LEDs (R, G, B) (LED substrates 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba). Then, a drive stop command is issued (S807). Thereby, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped. Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the projector self-diagnosis process. In this embodiment, when data indicating “LED temperature abnormality”, “FAN rotation abnormality”, or “voltage abnormality” is set in the error management area, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped. The power supply must be turned off for restoration. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation of the projector apparatus B2 may be resumed when the abnormality that has occurred is recovered while the operation of the projector apparatus B2 is stopped.

[Sub-control-projector transmission processing]
FIG. 114 shows sub-control-projector transmission processing by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 adds 1 to the transmission cycle counter (S811). This transmission cycle counter is an addition counter for measuring the cycle of transmitting a command from the projector control board B23.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the value of the transmission cycle counter is a predetermined value, for example, 125 (4 msec × 125 = 500 msec) or more (S812). When the value of the transmission cycle counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (500 msec or more has elapsed since the previous transmission) (S812: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S813. If the value of the transmission cycle counter is less than the predetermined value (S812: No), the control LSI 230 ends the sub-control-projector transmission time process.

  Next, the control LSI 230 clears the value of the transmission cycle counter (S813).

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the various flags & work area of the DRAM is “OFF” (S814). When the projector setting flag is “OFF” (S814: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S815. When the projector setting flag is not “OFF” (S814: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S816.

  Next, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating “activation parameter request” as transmission data for the sub-control board SS (S815). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by a second serial line transmission process in S825 described later. After the process of S815, the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S825.

  In S816, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not error data exists in the error management area of the DRAM. When error data exists in the error management area (S816: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S817. If there is no error data in the error management area (S816: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S820.

  Next, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating “error notification (CMD: 84H shown in the left column of FIG. 56; see FIG. 57)” as transmission data for the sub control board SS (S817). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by a second serial line transmission process in S825 described later.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether the error data in the error management area is data indicating a self-diagnosis abnormality or a DLP abnormality (S818). When the error data is data indicating a self-diagnosis abnormality or a DLP abnormality (S818: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S819. When the error data is neither the self-diagnosis abnormality nor the data indicating the DLP abnormality (S818: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S825.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets the various flags & work area reset request flag of the DRAM to “ON” (S819). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S825.

  In S820, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not there is a command transmission request indicating “reception confirmation (see CMD: 83H in the left column of FIG. 56)” with respect to the sub-control board SS. If there is a transmission request for a command indicating 'reception confirmation' (S6820: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next processing of S821. If there is no transmission request for a command indicating 'reception confirmation' (S820: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the processing of S822.

  Next, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating 'reception confirmation' as transmission data for the sub-control board SS (S821). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by a second serial line transmission process in S825 described later. After the process of S821, the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S825.

  In S822, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not there is a command transmission request corresponding to the status (see the left column CMD: 85H to 8BH in FIG. 56) with respect to the sub control board SS. When there is a command transmission request corresponding to the status (S822: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S823. When there is no command transmission request corresponding to the status (S823: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S824.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs status transmission data creation processing (S823). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S825.

  In S824, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating “parameter request (see CMD: 82H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)” for the sub-control board SS as transmission data. This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the second serial line transmission processing of the next S825.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs a second serial line transmission process (S825). By this transmission processing, various commands are transmitted from the projector control board B23 to the sub control board SS via the scaler board SK. Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the sub-control-projector transmission process.

[Status transmission data creation process]
FIG. 115 shows status transmission data creation processing by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the parameter in the DRAM status storage area is the LED temperature (S831). When the parameter of the status storage area is the LED temperature (S831: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S832. When the parameter of the status storage area is not the LED temperature (S831: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S834.

  Next, the control LSI 230 inputs data from the temperature sensor B25 of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B and generates temperature data (S832).

  Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data using the temperature data (CMD: 85H, D1 to D3 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) as parameters in the “LED temperature (CMD: 85H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)” command ( S833). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

  In S834, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the parameter in the status storage area is the FAN rotation speed. When the parameter of the status storage area is the FAN rotation speed (S834: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S835. When the parameter of the status storage area is not the FAN rotation speed (S834: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S837.

  Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the rotation pulse numbers of FAN1 (intake fan 244A), FAN2 (intake fan 244B), and FAN3 (exhaust fan 245) as rotation pulse data (S835).

  Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data using the FAN rotation pulse number (CMD: 86H shown in the left column of FIG. 56) command as a parameter for the FAN rotation pulse number (S836). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

  In S837, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the parameter in the status storage area is LED brightness. When the parameter of the status storage area is LED luminance (S837: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S838. When the parameter of the status storage area is not LED brightness (S837: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S840.

  Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the luminance data of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B from the DLP control circuit 232 (S838).

  Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data using the LED luminance data acquired from the 'LED luminance number (see CMD: 87H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)' command including the LED luminance setting in the status as a parameter (S839). . Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

  In S840, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the status storage area parameter is a horizontal adjustment value. When the parameter of the status storage area is the horizontal direction adjustment value (S840: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S841. When the parameter of the status storage area is not the horizontal adjustment value (S840: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S843.

  Next, the control LSI 230 acquires horizontal position A to E adjustment values from the EEPROM 231 (S841).

  Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data using the values of the horizontal position A to E adjustment values as parameters in the “horizontal adjustment value (see CMD: 88H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)” command (S842). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

  In S843, the control LSI 230 determines whether the parameter in the status storage area is a vertical adjustment value. When the status storage area parameter is the vertical adjustment value (S843: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next processing of S844. If the parameter of the status storage area is not the vertical adjustment value (S843: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S846.

  Next, the control LSI 230 acquires vertical position adjustment values A to E from the EEPROM 231 (S844).

  Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data using the values of the vertical position A to E adjustment values as parameters in the “vertical adjustment value (see CMD: 89H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)” command (S845). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

  In step S846, the control LSI 230 determines whether the parameter in the status storage area is a focus adjustment value. When the parameter of the status storage area is a focus adjustment value (S846: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S847. When the parameter of the status storage area is not the focus adjustment value (S846: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S849.

  Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the focus position A to E adjustment values from the EEPROM 231 (S847).

  Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data using the values of the focus position A to E adjustment values as parameters for the “focus adjustment value (see CMD: 8AH shown in the left column of FIG. 56)” command (S848). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

  In S849, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the parameter in the status storage area is the drift correction temperature. When the parameter of the status storage area is the drift correction temperature (S849: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S850. If the parameter in the status storage area is not the drift correction temperature (S849: No), the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

  Next, the control LSI 230 inputs data from the temperature sensor B25 related to the drift correction temperature, and generates drift correction temperature sensor data (S850).

  Next, the control LSI 230 creates a “drift correction temperature (see CMD: 8BH shown in the left column of FIG. 56)” command including the drift correction temperature sensor data in the status as transmission data (S851). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

(Memory map of sub liquid crystal I / F board SL)
As shown in FIG. 116, various information is stored in the DRAM and the ROM included in the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL.

  As shown in FIG. 116, the DRAM of the MCU 900 is provided with a reception storage area, a transmission storage area, a flag area, various storage areas, and a sub liquid crystal setting storage area. For example, a reception completion flag, an EXT reception flag, and a sub liquid crystal setting flag are stored in the flag area. The various storage areas store a transmission cycle counter, a status storage area, a reset request flag, an error management area, and a self-diagnosis storage area. The sub-liquid crystal setting storage area stores horizontal resolution, vertical resolution, and luminance. Such stored information will be described later.

  The ROM of the MCU 900 stores horizontal resolution, vertical resolution, and luminance as data values in the liquid crystal initial setting area, and serial line setting values include baud rate (third serial line), data length, parity, A stop is stored, and a diagnostic value (55AAH) is stored as a value for self-diagnosis. Such stored information will be described later. Although not shown in FIG. 116, the DRAM stores various other work areas used by the MCU 900, and the ROM stores a control program executed by the MCU 900 and constant data.

(Processing of sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL)
[Sub liquid crystal control main processing by MCU900]
FIG. 117 shows sub liquid crystal control main processing by the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. As shown in the figure, when the power is turned on, the MCU 900 performs the sub liquid crystal initialization process (S861). This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the MCU 900 performs touch panel input processing (S862). In this process, the MCU 900 performs a predetermined operation based on an operation signal (a signal corresponding to a touch operation, a flick operation, or a pinch operation) from the touch panel DD19T.

  Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the reception completion flag in the flag area of the DRAM is “ON” (S863). When the reception completion flag is “ON” (S863: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next process of S864. If the reception completion flag is not “ON” (S863: No), the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of S868.

  Next, the MCU 900 acquires received data from the reception storage area of the DRAM (S864).

  Next, the MCU 900 sets the reception completion flag in the flag area of the DRAM to “OFF” (S865).

  Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the acquired reception data indicates “sub liquid crystal (see ID: 40H shown in FIG. 53)” (S866). When the transmission destination ID indicates “sub liquid crystal” (S866: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of next S867. When the transmission destination ID does not indicate “sub liquid crystal” (S866: No), the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of S868.

  Next, the MCU 900 performs processing during reception between the sub control and the sub liquid crystal (S867). This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the MCU 900 performs sub liquid crystal self-diagnosis processing (S868). This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the MCU 900 performs processing during transmission between the sub control and the sub liquid crystal (S869). This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the reset request flag in various storage areas of the DRAM is “ON” (S870). When the reset request flag is “ON” (S870: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next process of S871. If the reset request flag is not 'ON' (S870: No), the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of S872.

  Next, the MCU 900 waits for a watchdog timer (WDT) to be reset (S871). The watchdog timer reset wait is a process of performing an infinite loop process without clearing (or setting a predetermined value) the watchdog timer and waiting for the watchdog timer to output a reset signal to the MCU 900. When the reset signal is output to the MCU 900, the MCU 900 is reset, and the process is restarted from the first step (S861) of the sub liquid crystal control main process (also referred to as “reboot”).

  In S872, the MCU 900 clears the value of the watchdog timer (WDT).

  Next, the MCU 900 waits for a period of 4 msec, for example (S873). Thereafter, the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of S862.

[Sub LCD serial line reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 118 shows sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt processing by the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. This process is a communication interrupt process for capturing received data in response to an external request via the third serial line during execution of the above-described sub liquid crystal control main process.

  As shown in FIG. 118, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the received data from the third serial line is “STX (02H)” indicating the start of data (S881). If the received data is 'STX' (S881: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next process of S882. If the received data is not 'STX' (S881: No), the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of S883.

  Next, the MCU 900 sets the ETX reception flag and the reception completion flag in the flag area of the DRAM to “OFF”, and clears the reception storage area (S882). Thereafter, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt process.

  In S883, the MCU 900 saves the reception data from the third serial line in the reception storage area of the DRAM.

  Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the received data is “ETX (03H)” indicating the end of the data (S884). If the received data is “ETX” (S884: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of the next S885. When the received data is not “ETX” (S884: No), the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of S886.

  Next, the MCU 900 sets the ETX reception flag in the flag area of the DRAM to “ON” (S885). Thereafter, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt process.

  In S886, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the ETX reception flag in the DRAM flag area is 'ON'. If the ETX reception flag is 'ON' (S886: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next process of S887. If the ETX reception flag is not 'ON' (S886: No), the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt process.

  Next, the MCU 900 performs received data sum check processing (S887).

  Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the sum value obtained in S887 is normal (S888). When the thumb value is normal (S888: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of S890. If the sum value is not normal (S888: No), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next process of S889. The sum value calculation method is the same as that described in the sub-device reception interrupt process (S258 in FIG. 74).

  Next, the MCU 900 clears the reception storage area of the DRAM (S889). Thereafter, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt process.

  In S890, the MCU 900 sets the reception completion flag in the flag area of the DRAM to “ON”. Thereafter, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt process.

[Sub LCD initialization processing]
FIG. 119 shows sub liquid crystal initialization processing by the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. As shown in the figure, the MCU 900 initializes internal functions (S891).

  Next, the MCU 900 initializes the third serial line (S892).

  Next, the MCU 900 performs initial screen setting of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 based on the horizontal resolution, vertical resolution, and luminance stored in the ROM (S893).

  Next, the MCU 900 initializes the touch panel DD19T (S894).

  Next, the MCU 900 sets the sub liquid crystal setting flag and the reset request flag to “OFF” in the flag area and various storage areas of the DRAM (S895). Thereafter, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal initialization process.

[Processing during reception between sub-control and sub-liquid crystal]
FIG. 120 shows processing during reception between the sub-control and sub-liquid crystal by the MCU 900 of the sub-liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. As shown in the figure, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the command of the received data acquired from the third serial line in S864 is “status request (see CMD: 43H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)” (S901). When the acquired command of received data is “status request” (S901: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next processing of S902. If the acquired received data command is not “status request” (S901: No), the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of S904.

  Next, the MCU 900 registers a transmission request for a command indicating “status” in response to the “status request” (S902).

  Next, the MCU 900 stores various parameter values included in the acquired received data in the status storage area of the DRAM (S903). Thereafter, the MCU 900 ends the sub-control-sub liquid crystal reception process.

  In step S904, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the command of the acquired reception data is “setting complete (see CMD: 42H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)”. If the acquired received data command is “setting complete” (S904: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next processing of S905. If the acquired received data command is not 'setting complete' (S904: No), the MCU 900 proceeds to the processing of S906.

  Next, the MCU 900 changes the setting of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL with the setting value of the sub liquid crystal setting storage area of the DRAM (S905). Thereafter, the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of S912.

  In step S <b> 906, the MCU 900 determines whether the command of the acquired reception data is “startup parameter request confirmation (see CMD: 41 </ b> H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)”. If the acquired command of received data is “startup parameter request confirmation” (S906: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next processing of S907. If the acquired command of received data is not “startup parameter request confirmation” (S906: No), the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of S908.

  Next, the MCU 900 sets the sub liquid crystal setting flag in the flag area of the DRAM to “ON” (S907). Thereafter, the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of S912.

  In step S908, the MCU 900 determines whether the command of the acquired reception data is a “sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting (see CMD: 45H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)” command. If the acquired received data command is the 'sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting' command (S908: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next processing of S909. When the acquired received data command is not the 'sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting' command (S908: No), the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of S910.

  Next, the MCU 900 stores the setting value of the sub liquid crystal screen resolution of the received data acquired in the sub liquid crystal setting storage area of the DRAM (S909). Thereafter, the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of S912.

  In step S <b> 910, the MCU 900 determines whether the command of the acquired reception data is “sub-liquid crystal luminance setting (see CMD: 46 </ b> H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)”. If the acquired received data command is “sub-liquid crystal luminance setting” (S910: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next processing of S911. If the acquired received data command is not “sub liquid crystal brightness setting” (S910: No), the acquired received data command is “status request complete (see CMD: 44H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)”. Shifts to the processing of S912.

  Next, the MCU 900 stores the luminance setting value of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 in the sub liquid crystal setting storage area of the DRAM (S911). According to such processing, when performing the optical adjustment of the projector device B2, the resolution and brightness are arbitrarily changed so that an operator who visually recognizes the simple test pattern can easily see through the screen of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. be able to.

  Next, the MCU 900 registers a transmission request for a command indicating 'reception confirmation' (S912). Thereafter, the MCU 900 ends the sub-control-sub liquid crystal reception process.

[Sub LCD self-diagnosis processing]
FIG. 121 shows sub liquid crystal self-diagnosis processing by the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. As shown in the figure, the MCU 900 writes, for example, “55AAH” as the diagnostic value read from the ROM in the self-diagnosis storage area of the DRAM by the verify check (S921).

  Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the value (load value) read from the self-diagnosis storage area correctly matches the diagnosis value (S922). When the load value matches the diagnostic value (S922: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of S924. If the load value does not match the diagnostic value (S922: No), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next process of S923.

  Next, the MCU 900 sets “self-diagnostic abnormality (see sub liquid crystal I / F substrate error information shown in FIG. 57)” as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S923).

  Next, the MCU 900 reads the status (operation state) of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL (S924).

  Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the status of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL is normal (S925). When the status of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL is normal (S925: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of S927. When the status of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL is not normal (S925: No), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next process of S926.

  Next, the MCU 900 sets “WDT-sub liquid crystal abnormality (see sub liquid crystal I / F substrate error information shown in FIG. 57)” as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S926).

  Next, the MCU 900 reads actual data (actual resolution, brightness, etc.) regarding the sub liquid crystal image setting (S927).

  Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the setting value in the sub liquid crystal setting storage area and the actual data related to the sub liquid crystal image setting are the same setting value (S928). When the setting value in the sub liquid crystal setting storage area and the actual data related to the sub liquid crystal image setting are the same setting value (S928: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of S930. If the setting value in the sub liquid crystal setting storage area and the actual data related to the sub liquid crystal image setting do not match (S928: No), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next process of S929.

  Next, the MCU 900 sets “sub liquid crystal screen setting abnormality (see sub liquid crystal I / F board error information shown in FIG. 57)” as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S929).

  Next, the MCU 900 reads temperature information (sensor temperature) based on a signal from a temperature sensor (not shown) incorporated in the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 (S930).

  Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the sensor temperature is 100 ° C. or higher (S931). When the sensor temperature is 100 ° C. or higher (S931: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next process of S931. When the sensor temperature is less than 100 ° C. (S931: No), the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of S933.

  Next, the MCU 900 sets “sub liquid crystal temperature abnormality (see sub liquid crystal I / F substrate error information shown in FIG. 57)” as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S932).

  Next, the MCU 900 performs an operation state determination process of the touch panel DD19T (S933).

  Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the ON state (touch, flick, or pinch state) of the touch panel DD19T is detected for 30 minutes or more (S934). When the ON state of the touch panel DD19T is detected for 30 minutes or more (S934: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next process of S935. When the state is not detected for 30 minutes or more (S934: No), the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of S936.

  Next, the MCU 900 sets “touch panel input abnormality (see sub liquid crystal I / F substrate error information shown in FIG. 57)” as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S935).

  Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not data indicating a status, a set value, or 'temperature abnormality' is set in the error management area (S936). If any of the above data is set in the error management area (S936: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of the next S937. If none of the above data is set in the error management area (S936: No), the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal self-diagnosis process.

  Next, the MCU 900 performs sub liquid crystal operation stop processing (S937). As a result, the operations of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and the touch panel DD19T are stopped. Thereafter, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal self-diagnosis process.

[Transmission between sub-control and sub-liquid crystal]
FIG. 122 shows sub-liquid crystal transmission processing between the sub control and the sub liquid crystal by the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. As shown in the figure, the MCU 900 adds 1 to the transmission cycle counter (S941). This transmission cycle counter is an addition counter for measuring the cycle of transmitting a command from the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL.

  Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the value of the transmission cycle counter is a predetermined value, for example, 50 (200 msec) or more (S942). When the value of the transmission cycle counter is equal to or larger than the predetermined value (S942: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next process of S943. When the value of the transmission cycle counter is less than the predetermined value (S942: No), the MCU 900 ends the transmission process between the sub control and the sub liquid crystal.

  Next, the MCU 900 clears the value of the transmission cycle counter (S943).

  Next, the MCU 900 determines whether error data exists in the error management area of the DRAM (S944). When error data exists in the error management area (S944: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next process of S945. If there is no error data in the error management area (S944: No), the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of S947.

  Next, the MCU 900 sends an “error notification (see CMD: 45H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)” command to the sub control board SS in an error management area (CMD: 45H, D1: error information shown in the left column of FIG. 55). The transmission data is created (S945). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by a third serial line transmission process in S956 described later.

  Next, the MCU 900 sets a reset request flag in various storage areas of the DRAM to ‘ON’ (S946). Thereafter, the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of S956.

  In step S947, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the sub liquid crystal setting flag in the flag area of the DRAM is “OFF”. When the sub liquid crystal setting flag is “OFF” (S947: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next process of S948. If the sub liquid crystal setting flag is not “OFF” (S947: No), the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of S949.

  Next, the MCU 900 creates transmission data of a “startup parameter request (see CMD: 41H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)” command for the sub control board SS (S948). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by a third serial line transmission process in S956 described later. After the process of S948, the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of S956.

  In S949, the MCU 900 determines whether or not there is a transmission request for the “reception confirmation” command to the sub control board SS. If there is a transmission request for the 'reception confirmation' command (S949: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next processing of S950. When there is no transmission request for the “reception confirmation” command (S949: No), the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of S951.

  Next, the MCU 900 creates transmission data of the “reception confirmation (see CMD: 44H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)” command with respect to the sub-control board SS (S950). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by a third serial line transmission process in S956 described later. After the process of S950, the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of S956.

  In step S951, the MCU 900 determines whether there is a transmission request for the “status” command to the sub control board SS. If there is a transmission request for the 'status' command (S951: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next process of S952. If there is no transmission request for the 'status' command (S951: No), the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of S955.

  Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the data type in the status storage area of the DRAM relates to touch input (S952). If the data type of the status storage area is related to touch input (S952: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next process of S953. When the data type of the status storage area is not related to touch input, that is, related to liquid crystal setting (S952: No), the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of S954.

  Next, the MCU 900 creates the transmission data by adding the touch panel input area data to the 'status (see CMD: 43H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)' command related to the touch input to the sub control board SS (S953). ). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by a third serial line transmission process in S956 described later. After the process of S953, the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of S956.

  In S954, the MCU 900 creates transmission data of a command indicating “status (refer to CMD: 43H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)” related to the liquid crystal setting for the sub control board SS. This transmission data is stored in the third transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by a third serial line transmission process in S956 described later. After the process of S954, the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of S956.

  In step S955, the MCU 900 creates transmission data of a command indicating “parameter request (see CMD: 42H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)” for the sub control board SS. This transmission data is stored in the third transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the third serial line transmission processing of the next S956.

  Next, the MCU 900 performs a third serial line transmission process (S956). By this transmission processing, various commands are transmitted from the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL to the sub control substrate SS via the scaler substrate SK. Thereafter, the MCU 900 ends the sub-control-sub liquid crystal transmission process.

(Optical adjustment of projector device B2)
FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a test pattern projected during optical adjustment of projector device B2. A factory inspection person (also called a quality assurance person) activates application software for optical adjustment on the adjustment PC 1000 and performs a predetermined operation according to the menu of the software, whereby the fixed screen mechanism D and the front screen mechanism E1. Alternatively, the reel screen mechanism F1 can be operated to display a test pattern TP as shown in FIG. 123 on each projection plane. FIG. 123 shows a state where the test pattern TP is displayed on the reflection portion D1 of the fixed screen mechanism D as an example. The factory inspection worker can observe the display mode of the test pattern TP from the upper display window UD1 of the gaming machine 1.

  The test pattern TP is, for example, a pattern in which a SMPTE (Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers) color bar is sprite-shaped in a circle and small circular patterns arranged in four corners on a background cross-hatch pattern It is.

  Specifically, the factory inspector operates the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 so that they are projection targets. While observing the display mode of the test pattern TP, the projector apparatus B2 can be adjusted so that the display mode is appropriate. Thereby, for the projector device B2, the horizontal position adjustment value, the vertical position adjustment value, the focus position adjustment value, the LED brightness setting, the keystone distortion correction value, the white color temperature setting, the brightness setting, the contrast setting, the gamma setting, and the test. Optical adjustment can be performed for each item such as a pattern, a horizontal position offset, a vertical position offset, and a focus position offset.

  In this embodiment, at the time of adjustment work such as before assembly of the gaming machine, identification symbols 'A' to 'C' are assigned to the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1, for example. Using these identification symbols, different horizontal position A to C adjustment values, vertical position A to C adjustment values, and focus position A to C adjustment values for each projection target are set in the EEPROM 231 of the projector control board B23. Other adjustment items (LED brightness setting, keystone distortion correction value, white color temperature setting, brightness setting, contrast setting, gamma setting, test pattern, horizontal position offset, vertical position offset, focus position offset) After being assembled, it is set in the SRAM 401 of the sub control board SS. Note that the horizontal position offset, the vertical position offset, and the focus position offset can be adjusted by offset adjustment by a maintenance worker at a site such as a game arcade at the factory.

  On the other hand, FIG. 124 is a diagram showing a test pattern TP ′ and the like displayed on the screen (touch panel DD19T) of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 at the time of optical adjustment of the projector device B2 in the field such as a game hall. After the gaming machine 1 is installed in a game arcade or the like, the test pattern TP ′ or the like can be displayed on the touch panel DD19T serving as the screen of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 by performing a predetermined operation by the maintenance worker. . The maintenance worker can appropriately perform optical adjustment of the projector apparatus B2 individually using such a test pattern TP '.

  Unlike the test pattern TP displayed directly on the projection target, the test pattern TP ′ displayed on the touch panel DD19T is displayed as an operation target that can be intuitively deformed as a virtual image by simulation. In addition, the touch panel DD19T displays buttons T1 and T2 for changing the setting of horizontal position offset, vertical position offset, focus position offset, and focus drift correction for each projection target, as well as trapezoidal distortion correction and LED brightness. A button T3 and an indicator T4 for changing the setting of white color temperature, brightness, contrast, and gamma value are displayed, and a numeric keypad T5 for inputting various numerical values is also displayed.

  Specifically, the maintenance worker displays a test pattern TP ′ or the like on the touch panel DD19T by performing a predetermined operation, and any one of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 is projected. Operate to be the target. Thereafter, the maintenance operator operates the buttons T1 and T2 to select any one of the horizontal position offset, the vertical position offset, the focus position offset, and the focus drift correction, and the test pattern TP ′ is directly selected by operating the touch panel. Adjustment can be performed so that the display mode becomes appropriate while changing. In other words, the display position of the test pattern TP ′ changes vertically and horizontally and the image quality changes according to the operation of the maintenance worker. Thereby, about projector apparatus B2, a setting change can be performed for every different projection object about horizontal position offset, vertical position offset, focus position offset, and focus drift correction. At this time, the maintenance operator can also observe the actual test pattern TP because the test pattern TP is projected from the projector device B2 onto the national screen mechanism D at the same time. The horizontal position offset, vertical position offset, focus position offset, and focus drift correction are set in the projector setting value storage area of the SRAM 401 and the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 of the sub control board SS.

  In addition, the maintenance worker operates the button T3, the numeric keypad T5, etc. while observing the test pattern TP ′ together with the actual test pattern TP, thereby correcting trapezoidal distortion, LED brightness, white color temperature, brightness, contrast, and gamma value. These settings can be changed by directly inputting numerical values. At this time, the overall shape or color tone of the test pattern TP ′ changes according to the operation of the maintenance worker. The values of various items such as trapezoidal distortion correction, LED brightness, white color temperature, brightness, contrast, and gamma value that have been changed in this way are the projector setting value storage area of the SRAM 401 of the sub control board SS and the sub RAM board 41. Is set in the projector setting value storage area.

  Next, a modified example of the present invention will be described. Note that the same or similar components as those according to the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

(Projector cooling structure)
FIG. 125 shows a first modification of the projector device. The projector apparatus X shown in the figure has a bottom plate X21 and a cover case X22. In the interior partitioned by the bottom plate X21 and the cover case X22, the lens unit B21 (partially not shown) including the projection lens 210, the LED light sources (240R, 240G, 240B), and DMD (the same as described above) are provided. 241) and other optical mechanisms (not shown) are provided, and an exhaust fan 245, heat radiation plates 2430 and 2431, and a heat sink 243Xa are further provided. A heat sink 243Xc is externally attached to the outside of the cover case X22 so as to be exposed. An opening X22B for guiding the irradiation light from the projection lens 210 to the outside is provided on one surface (front surface in FIG. 125) of the cover case X22. The projector device X of the first modification is directly attached to the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G and is provided so as to guide the irradiation light directly to the projection target without using a mirror.

  An LED light source (240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba) (not shown) and a DMD substrate (241a) are provided in contact with one surface (the lower surface in FIG. 125) of the heat radiating plate 2430. Another heat radiating plate 2431 is disposed on the other surface (the upper surface in FIG. 125) of the heat radiating plate 2430, and the two heat radiating plates 2430 and 2431 are attached by screws. A heat conducting sheet (or heat conducting gel) is attached to the surface where the heat radiating plate 2430 and the heat radiating plate 2431 are in contact with each other. ) A mounting hole for screwing with a screw is provided on the upper surface of the heat radiating plate 2431. Further, the heat pipe 243Xd and the heat sink 243Xc can be removed by removing the screws of the heat sink 2431. The heat radiating plate 2430 is connected to transmit heat generated in the LED light source and the DMD substrate to the heat sink 243Xa through the heat pipe 243Xb. The heat dissipated in the air by the heat sink 243Xa is forcibly exhausted by the exhaust fan 245 through the exhaust port X22D provided in the cover case X22.

  On the other hand, the heat radiating plate 2431 is connected to transfer heat to the heat sink 243Xc through the heat pipe 243Xd. The heat pipe 243Xd extends from the inside of the cover case X22 to the outside through a hole X22A provided in the cover case X22, and is connected to a heat sink 243Xc provided outside. That is, the heat radiating plate 2431 receives heat generated from the LED light source and the DMD substrate from the heat radiating plate 2430, and is further connected to transmit heat to the heat sink 243Xc via the heat pipe 243Xd. Thereby, the heat generated in the LED light source and the DMD board is transmitted to the heat sink 243Xc located outside the cover case X22 through the heat radiating plate 2431 and the heat pipe 243Xd, and is guided to the outside of the projector device X and is transmitted by the heat sink 243Xc. The heat is exhausted. Such an external heat sink 243Xc can also effectively eliminate the accumulation of heat inside the projector apparatus X and prevent overheating of optical components such as lenses.

  FIG. 126 shows a second modification of the projector device. The projector device X ′ shown in the figure has a bottom plate X21 and a cover case X22, and a lens unit B21 (partially omitted) including a projection lens 210 therein, as in the first modification. In addition, an optical mechanism (not shown) including an LED light source (240R, 240G, 240B) and DMD (241) is provided, and an exhaust fan 245, a heat radiating plate 2430, and heat sinks 243Xa, 243Xc are provided. Yes. Unlike the above-described first modification, the heat sink 243Xc is arranged as follows.

  The heat sink 243Xc is directly bonded to one surface (the upper surface in FIG. 126) of the heat radiating plate 2430, and is provided so that heat is directly transmitted from the heat radiating plate 2430. Further, the fin portion of the heat sink 243Xc is exposed to the outside through an opening X22C provided on one surface (the upper surface in FIG. 126) of the cover case X22. According to such an arrangement structure of the heat sink 243Xc, the heat generated in the LED light source and the DMD substrate is efficiently transmitted to the fin portion of the heat sink 243Xc located outside the cover case X22 through the heat radiating plate 2430. It will be exhausted outside. Such a heat sink 243Xc with the fin portion exposed to the outside can also effectively eliminate the accumulation of heat inside the projector apparatus X and prevent overheating of optical components such as lenses.

  FIG. 127 shows an arrangement of projector apparatuses according to the third modification. The projector apparatus X ″ shown in the figure does not have a detailed structure, but employs the same structure as the projector apparatus X ′ shown in FIG. 126 described above except that a heat sink exposed to the outside is not provided. That is, in the projector apparatus X ″, a heat radiating plate 2430 is provided so as to face the opening X22C of the cover case X22 instead of the heat sink 243Xc described above, and the upper surface of the heat radiating plate 2430 is slightly protruded from the opening X22C. It is exposed (not shown in FIG. 127). In such a projector device X ″, the heat radiating plate 2430 exposed from the opening X22C of the cover case X22 is connected to the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G via the metal heat conducting member Y, and the upper surface wall G4 is not shown. The top wall G4 is made of a metal plate member having a high thermal conductivity such as stainless steel. According to such a mounting structure of the projector device X ″, the upper surface wall G4 is generated inside the device. Heat is efficiently transmitted to the upper surface wall G4 through the heat radiating plate 2430 and the heat conducting member Y, and the upper surface wall G4 itself functions as a heat radiating member, so that the heat accumulation inside the projector device X ″ is effectively eliminated. And overheating of optical components such as lenses can be prevented.

  FIG. 128 shows a circuit configuration of a projector device applied to modifications after the fourth modification described later. Note that the projector device B2 as shown in FIG. 33 is also applied to the modified examples after the fourth modified example. Therefore, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 128, the projector apparatus B2 applied to the fourth and subsequent modifications includes, as electrical components, a first temperature sensor B25a, a second temperature sensor B25b, an intake air temperature sensor B26a, and an exhaust gas. A temperature sensor B26b and a plurality of pulse sensors B27a, B27b, B27c are included. In addition, power is supplied to the projector device B2 to an unillustrated intake fan 244A (FAN1), 244B (FAN2), exhaust fan 245 (FAN3), LED boards 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba, DMD board 241a, and the like. A power supply circuit B20 is also included.

  The first temperature sensor B25a and the second temperature sensor B25b perform the same functions as the temperature sensor B25 described above. The first temperature sensor B25a is provided to detect the temperature in the vicinity of the LED light source 240R on the LED board 240Ra and output a temperature detection signal to the projector control board B23. The second temperature sensor B25b is provided to detect temperatures near the LED light source 240G and the LED light source 240B in the LED substrate 240Ga and the LED substrate 240Ba, and to output a temperature detection signal to the projector control substrate B23. As described above, regarding the heat generation characteristics of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B, the LED light source 240G and the LED light source 240B tend to be relatively high, while the LED light source 240R tends to be relatively low. Specifically, the temperature detected by the second temperature sensor B25b tends to be higher than the temperature detected by the first temperature sensor B25a. In addition, about this kind of temperature sensor B25a, B25b, you may make it provide only any one according to a specification. Moreover, when not distinguishing 1st temperature sensor B25a and 2nd temperature sensor B25b in particular, it describes as temperature sensor B25.

  The intake air temperature sensor B26a is disposed near the intake port of the intake fan 244B (FAN2), detects the temperature of the air supplied from the outside to the inside of the projector device B2 through the intake fan 244B, and controls the projector. A temperature detection signal is output to the substrate B23. The exhaust temperature sensor B26b is disposed in the vicinity of the exhaust port of the exhaust fan 245 (FAN3), detects the temperature of the air discharged from the inside of the projector device B2 through the exhaust fan 245, and controls the projector. A temperature detection signal is output to the substrate B23. Generally, the temperature detected by the exhaust temperature sensor B26b tends to be higher than the temperature detected by the intake air temperature sensor B26a. In addition, about this kind of temperature sensor B26a, B26b, you may make it provide only any one according to a specification. The intake air temperature sensor B26a and the exhaust gas temperature sensor B26b may be referred to as a ventilation temperature sensor.

  The pulse sensor B27a is provided to output a pulse signal corresponding to the rotational speed of the intake fan 244A (FAN1) to the projector control board B23 as a rotational speed detection signal of FAN1. The pulse sensor B27b is provided to output a pulse signal corresponding to the rotational speed of the intake fan 244B (FAN2) to the projector control board B23 as a rotational speed detection signal of FAN2. The pulse sensor B27c is provided to output a pulse signal corresponding to the rotational speed of the exhaust fan 245 (FAN3) to the projector control board B23 as a rotational speed detection signal of FAN3. In the present embodiment, a relatively high rotation type is used for the intake fans 244A and 244B (FAN1, FAN2), and a relatively low rotation type is used for the exhaust fan 245 (FAN3). As a result, the rotational speed detected via the pulse sensors B27a and B27b corresponding to FAN1 and FAN2 tends to be higher than the rotational speed detected via the pulse sensor B27c corresponding to FAN3. In addition, about this kind of pulse sensor 27a, 27b, 27c, you may make it provide only one or any two according to a specification. The pulse sensor may be constituted by a photo interrupter, for example.

  On the premise of the projector device B2 as described above, fourth to twenty-third modifications will be described below. Note that the following modifications are not limited to using all of the temperature sensor and the pulse sensor, and can be realized using only a part of them. In addition, with respect to each of the following modifications, any modification can be appropriately combined unless there is a special reason that makes the combination difficult, for example, the technical prerequisites fail.

  FIG. 129 shows a projector control main process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 as a process according to the fourth modification. The process shown in FIG. 129 is obtained by improving a part of the process shown in FIG. 107 so that the process is suitable for the projector apparatus B2 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 129, when the power is turned on, the control LSI 230 performs a projector initialization process (S1001). This processing corresponds to the processing in FIG.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the reception completion flag in the various flags & work area of the DRAM is “ON” (S1002). When the reception completion flag is “ON” (S1002: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next processing of S1003. If the reception completion flag is not “ON” (S1002: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S107.

  Next, the control LSI 230 acquires received data from the reception storage area of the DRAM (S1003).

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets the various flags & work area flag of the DRAM to “OFF” (S1004).

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the acquired reception data indicates “projector” (S1005). When the transmission destination ID indicates “projector” (S1005: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next processing of S1006. When the transmission destination ID does not indicate “projector” (S1005: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the processing of S1007.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs sub-control-projector reception processing (S1006). This process corresponds to the process of FIG.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs projector self-diagnosis processing (S1007). This process corresponds to the process of FIG. The projector self-diagnosis process can also be applied as a process as shown in FIG.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs sub-control-projector transmission processing (S1008). This process corresponds to the process of FIG. Note that the sub-control-projector transmission process can also be applied as shown in FIG.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether LED temperature abnormality (shutdown), FAN rotation abnormality, FAN temperature abnormality, or voltage abnormality is written in the error management area of the DRAM (S1009). The LED temperature abnormality (shutdown) means an LED temperature abnormality that leads to a forced shutdown described later, and any temperature in the vicinity of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B is predetermined using the LED temperature control table shown in FIG. 131 (a). Generated and stored when detected as above temperature. FAN rotation abnormality means FAN rotation abnormality leading to forced shutdown, and any one of FAN1 to FAN3 is set to be less than a predetermined rotation number under a predetermined temperature environment by using the FAN temperature rotation number control table shown in FIG. Generated and stored when detected. The FAN temperature abnormality is generated and stored when the intake air temperature near FAN2 is detected as a predetermined temperature or higher using the FAN temperature control table shown in FIG. 131 (b). The voltage abnormality is generated and stored when, for example, a voltage boost lower than a predetermined specified voltage value is detected in the power supplied from the power supply circuit B20. If any of these abnormalities is written in the error management area (S1009: Yes), the control LSI 230 basically transmits an error notification command to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. Transition to processing. The error notification will be described later. On the other hand, when no abnormality is written in the error management area (S1009: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the processing of S1013. Note that the FAN temperature control table shown in FIG. 132, which will be described later, can be applied instead of the one shown in FIG. 131 (b). Also, a FAN temperature rotation speed control table as shown in FIG. 134 described later can be applied.

  Next, in response to the error notification command transmission, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS has responded, for example, by returning a status request command (S1010). When the sub CPU 400 responds (S1010: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S1012. When the sub CPU 400 is not responding (S1010: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the processing of S1011.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after confirming that any abnormality has been written in the error management area of the DRAM (S1011). When the predetermined time has elapsed (S1011: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S1012. When the predetermined time has not elapsed (S1011: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S1013.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sends a rotation stop command to the FANs 1 to 3 and a drive stop command to the LED driver 233 that drives the DLP control circuit 232 and the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B (S1012). As a result, the main operation of the projector device B2 is forcibly shut down.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the various flag & work area reset request flag of the DRAM is “ON” (S1013). When the reset request flag is “ON” (S1013: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S1014. When the reset request flag is not “ON” (S1013: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S1015.

  Next, the control LSI 230 waits for a watchdog timer (WDT) to be reset (S1014). The watchdog timer reset wait is a process for performing an infinite loop process without clearing (or setting a predetermined value) the watchdog timer and waiting for the watchdog timer to output a reset signal to the control LSI 230. When the timer outputs a reset signal to the control LSI 230, the control LSI 230 is reset, so that the process is restarted from the first step (S1001) in the projector control main process (also referred to as “reboot”).

  In S1015, the control LSI 230 clears the value of the watchdog timer (WDT).

  Next, the control LSI 230 waits for a period of, for example, 4 msec (S1016). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S1002.

  FIG. 130 shows a self-diagnosis process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 as the process according to the fourth modification. The process shown in FIG. 130 is obtained by improving a part of the process shown in FIG. 113 so that the process is suitable for the projector apparatus B2 in FIG. 128 in conjunction with the projector control main process in FIG. 129.

  As shown in FIG. 130, the control LSI 230 writes, for example, '55AAH' as a diagnostic value read from the ROM in the self-diagnosis storage area of the DRAM by the verify check (S1021).

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the value (load value) read from the self-diagnosis storage area correctly matches the diagnosis value (S1022). If the load value matches the diagnostic value (S1022: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S1024. When the load value does not match the diagnostic value (S1022: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S1023.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets “self-diagnostic abnormality” as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S1023). This self-diagnosis abnormality includes an error due to a watchdog timer (WDT) reset wait described later. When the error information related to the self-diagnosis abnormality including the WDT reset waiting is set, the control LSI 230 transmits a command indicating error notification in the sub-control-projector transmission process (S1008) shown in FIG. (See S817 in FIG. 135 to be described later), the reset request flag is set to “ON” (see S818 and S819 in FIG. 135 to be described later), and the above is described according to the reset signal from the watchdog timer. The projector initialization process (S1001) shown in FIG. 129 is executed. Sub-control-projector transmission processing and projector initialization processing executed in this case will be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136 separately.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs LED temperature diagnosis processing (S1024). In this process, the control LSI 230 acquires the LED temperature based on the temperature detection signals from the first temperature sensor B25a and the second temperature sensor B25b.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired LED temperature is normal (S1025). When the acquired LED temperature is normal (S1025: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S1027. When the acquired LED temperature is not normal (S1025: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S1026.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets “LED temperature abnormality” as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S1026). More specifically, the first temperature sensor B25a and the second temperature sensor B25b detect temperatures near the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B. The control LSI 230 measures each temperature through the first temperature sensor B25a and the second temperature sensor B25b, thereby determining whether or not the measured temperature is equal to or higher than a predetermined temperature based on the LED temperature control table of FIG. 131 (a). If the temperature is equal to or higher than a predetermined temperature, error information indicating an abnormality relating to a warning or forced shutdown is set in the error management area of the DRAM. A warning means a warning displayed before reaching a forced shutdown, and the forced shutdown is an abnormality such as temperature or FAN rotation speed in main operations of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B and FAN1 to 3 of the projector apparatus B2. It means to stop forcibly according to.

  For example, as error information of LED (R) temperature abnormality related to the LED light source 240R, a warning is set when the temperature in the vicinity of the LED light source 240R detected by the first temperature sensor B25a is 85 ° C. or higher and lower than 90 ° C. If it is 90 ° C. or higher, forced shutdown is set. Further, the error information of the LED (G) temperature abnormality related to the LED light source 240G and the error information of the LED (B) temperature abnormality related to the LED light source 240B are different from the error information of the LED (R) temperature abnormality and the generation conditions are different. A warning is set when the temperature near the LED light source 240G or the LED light source 240B detected by the temperature sensor B25b is 100 ° C. or higher and lower than 105 ° C., and when it is 105 ° C. or higher, forced shutdown is set. When such error information related to LED temperature abnormality is set, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating error notification as transmission data in the above-described sub-control-projector transmission process (S1008) shown in FIG. 135), the command indicating the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS without setting the reset request flag to “ON” (see S818 and S819 in FIG. 135 described later). (See S825 in FIG. 135 described later). Sub-control-projector transmission processing and projector initialization processing executed in this case will also be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136 separately.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs FAN rotation diagnosis processing (S1027). In this process, the control LSI 230 acquires the FAN rotation speed based on the fan rotation speed signals from the pulse sensors B27a to B27c of the FAN1 to FAN3.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired FAN rotation speed is normal (S1028). When the acquired FAN rotation speed is normal (S1028: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S1030. If the acquired FAN rotation speed is not normal (S1028: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S1029.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets “FAN rotation abnormality” as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S1029). Specifically, the pulse sensors B27a to B27c detect the rotation speeds of the FAN1 to FAN3. Further, for example, the intake air temperature sensor B26a detects the intake air temperature of FAN2 as a reference FAN temperature. The control LSI 230 measures each rotation speed through the pulse sensors B27a to B27c and measures the FAN temperature through the intake air temperature sensor B26a, so that the FAN temperature is a predetermined temperature based on the FAN temperature rotation speed control table of FIG. It is determined whether or not the temperature is equal to or lower than (for example, 32 ° C.). : 4410 rpm, FAN3: 3710 rpm), error information indicating an abnormality related to forced shutdown is set in the error management area of the DRAM. If the FAN temperature is higher than a predetermined temperature, one of FAN1 to FAN3 The rotational speed is individually specified as a severer condition than the one described above. Specific rotation speed (e.g., FAN1: 6090rpm, FAN2: 4410rpm, FAN3: 4410rpm) is less than, sets an error information to the error management area of the DRAM indicating an abnormality relating to forced shutdown.

  For example, based on the FAN temperature rotation speed control table of FIG. 134, the error information of the rotation speed abnormality related to FAN1 is when the rotation speed detected by the pulse sensor B27a is less than 4410 rpm when the FAN temperature is 32 ° C. or lower. Forced shutdown is set. Further, as the error information of the rotation speed abnormality related to FAN1, forcible shutdown is set when the rotation speed detected by the pulse sensor B27a is less than 6090 rpm when the FAN temperature is higher than 32 ° C. Based on the FAN temperature rotation speed control table of FIG. 134, the forced shutdown is set when the error information of the rotation speed abnormality related to FAN2 and FAN3 also satisfies the same condition. When such error information relating to the FAN rotation speed abnormality is set, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the above-described sub-control-projector transmission process (S1008) shown in FIG. A command indicating the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS without setting the reset request flag to “ON” (see S818 and S819 in FIG. 135 described later). (Refer to S825 in FIG. 135 described later). Sub-control-projector transmission processing and projector initialization processing executed in this case will also be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136 separately.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs FAN temperature diagnosis processing (S1030). In this process, the control LSI 230 acquires the intake air temperature as the FAN temperature based on, for example, a temperature detection signal from the intake air temperature sensor B26a.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired FAN temperature is normal (S1031). When the acquired FAN temperature is normal (S1031: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S1033. When the acquired FAN temperature is not normal (S1031: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S1032. For example, a temperature sensor may be installed in each of the FANs 1 to 3, and the FAN rotation speed may be controlled according to the FAN temperatures 1 to 3 detected by the temperature sensors.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets “FAN temperature abnormality” as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S1032). Specifically, the intake air temperature sensor B26a detects the FAN temperature (intake air temperature) near FAN2. The control LSI 230 measures the FAN temperature through the intake air temperature sensor B26a to determine whether or not the FAN temperature is equal to or higher than a predetermined temperature based on the FAN temperature control table in FIG. 131 (b). For example, error information indicating an abnormality related to forced shutdown is set in the error management area of the DRAM. For example, as the error information of the FAN temperature abnormality, if the FAN temperature detected by the intake air temperature sensor B26a is 67 ° C. or higher, forced shutdown is set. When such error information relating to the FAN temperature abnormality is set, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission process (S1008) shown in FIG. 135), the command indicating the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS without setting the reset request flag to “ON” (see S818 and S819 in FIG. 135 described later). (See S825 in FIG. 135 described later). Sub-control-projector transmission processing and projector initialization processing executed in this case will also be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136 separately.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs projector power supply diagnosis processing (S1033). In this process, the control LSI 230 detects the operating voltage of the power supplied from the power supply circuit B20 of the projector device B2.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the operating voltage of the projector device B2 is equal to or higher than a specified voltage (S1034). When the operating voltage of the projector device B2 is equal to or higher than the specified voltage (S1034: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S1036. When the operating voltage of the projector device B2 is less than the specified voltage (S1034: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S1035.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets “voltage abnormality” as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S1035). Specifically, for example, error information of voltage abnormality indicating an abnormal voltage drop is set. When such error information related to voltage abnormality is set, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission process (S1008) shown in FIG. 135 (see S817 in FIG. 135), the command indicating the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS without setting the reset request flag to “ON” (see S818 and S819 in FIG. 135 to be described later). (See S825 in FIG. 135 described later). Sub-control-projector transmission processing and projector initialization processing executed in this case will also be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136 separately.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs DLP operation diagnosis processing (S1036). In this process, the control LSI 230 checks the operation of the DLP control circuit 232.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is normal (S1037). When the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is normal (S1037: Yes), the control LSI 230 ends the projector self-diagnosis process. If the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is not normal (S1037: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S1038.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets “DLP abnormality” as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S1038). When such error information relating to DLP abnormality is set, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission process (S1008) shown in FIG. 135 (see S817 in FIG. 135), the reset request flag is set to “ON” (see S818 and S819 in FIG. 135 to be described later), and the projector initial stage shown in FIG. (S1001) is executed. That is, since a command indicating an error notification is created as transmission data in S1008 and the reset request flag is set to 'ON', the error notification command created in S1008 is the process of S727 'of FIG. 136 after rebooting. Will be sent. At this time, an error notification command or information indicating the error notification can also be stored in the EEPROM 231. In such a case, even if a voltage change (abnormality due to a drop, disconnection, rise, etc.) occurs due to power interruption or restart, commands and information can be retained without being erased. Sub-control-projector transmission processing and projector initialization processing executed in this case will also be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136 separately. Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the projector self-diagnosis process.

  According to the projector control main process and the projector self-diagnosis process, an error notification command is transmitted to the sub-control board SS according to various abnormalities of the projector device B2, and a response from the sub-control board SS is received at that time. If so, the operation of the projector apparatus B2 is forcibly shut down, so that it is possible to avoid malfunction due to heat accumulation in the projector apparatus B2 and to eliminate the discomfort of the video over a long period of time.

  Even if there is no response from the sub-control board SS, the operation of the projector device B2 is automatically shut down after a predetermined time of, for example, 30 seconds, so that the malfunction of the projector device B2 can be reliably avoided. Can do. In the case of DLP abnormality, that is, error processing by the watchdog timer, reboot (initialization processing) is performed, and error transmission is performed after the reboot. In the case of this type of DLP abnormality, the projector device B2 is likely to be frozen, and it is difficult to send an error notification to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS (for example, the communication status is not normal, transmission Command and information that should be created normally). Therefore, error transmission is executed after reboot. Note that a DLP error may be handled in the same way as other errors, and an error transmission related to the DLP error may be performed before rebooting. Further, when the projector device B2 itself reboots or shuts down, communication with the sub CPU 400 is not performed for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) or longer, so the sub CPU 400 detects an abnormality and the sub CPU 400 detects the projector. A reboot command (or restart) may be issued to the device B2. If the sub CPU 400 has not received a signal from the projector device B2 for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) or longer, it is determined that the projector device B2 is performing a reboot process and is transmitted after the reboot process. When the sub CPU 400 cannot receive the error notification command (that is, when a time longer than 1000 ms, for example, 5000 ms elapses), the sub CPU 400 controls the projector device B2 to be forcibly rebooted. Alternatively, an error notification may be performed.

  FIG. 131 shows an LED temperature control table and a FAN temperature control table stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector control board B23 as reference tables according to the fourth modification.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (a), in the LED temperature control table, the control conditions corresponding to the temperature abnormality of the LED light source 240R (LED (R)), the LED light source 240G (LED (G)), and the LED light source 240B ( It is specified that the control conditions corresponding to the temperature abnormality of LED (B) are different.

  For example, regarding the LED light source 240R (LED (R)), the operation is normally controlled when the LED temperature is 0 ° C. or higher and lower than 85 ° C., and the operation is controlled without stopping when the LED temperature is 85 ° C. or higher and lower than 90 ° C. However, it is controlled to perform a warning (warning display) as a temperature abnormality based on the projected image on the screen and the display image of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, and when the LED temperature becomes 90 ° C. or higher, the projector device B2 Controlled to forcibly shut down main operations. At the time of a warning, a process corresponding to the warning is performed by the control LSI 230, and a command related to an error warning is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. On the other hand, in the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, an image indicating shutdown of the projector device B2 is displayed. At the time of forced shutdown, an error notification command is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, so that an image indicating shutdown of the projector device B2 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19.

  On the other hand, regarding the LED light source 240G (LED (G)) and the LED light source 240B (LED (B)), the operation is normally controlled if the LED temperature is 0 ° C. or higher and lower than 100 ° C., and the LED temperature is 100 ° C. or higher and 105 ° C. Although the operation is controlled without stopping when the temperature is lower than 0 ° C., a warning (warning display) is performed as a temperature abnormality by a projected image on the screen or a display image of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, and the LED temperature is When the temperature is 105 ° C. or higher, the main operation of the projector apparatus B2 is controlled to be forcibly shut down. Also in the case of such a warning, a process corresponding to the warning is performed by the control LSI 230, and a command related to an error warning is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. In the projector apparatus B2, a warning is displayed on the screen. While the projected image is displayed, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 displays an image indicating the shutdown of the projector device B2. In addition, since the command related to the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS at the time of forced shutdown, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 displays an image indicating the shutdown of the projector device B2. Note that an image indicating a warning or shutdown is projected by the projector device B2 and also displayed on the liquid crystal display device DD19 in the same manner as the projected image. Thereby, even when projection by the projector device B2 is difficult or impossible, or even when display by the liquid crystal display device DD19 is difficult or impossible, an image indicating a warning or shutdown is displayed by any one of the display means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the player or the game hall manager. At this time, in addition to the projection by the projector device B2 and the display by the liquid crystal display device DD19, an error is generated from the external concentration terminal board 31 of the gaming machine 1 to a game hall management device such as a hall computer or an island control computer. You may make it inform and inform. In addition, as a display means of the present embodiment, a projection device, a screen, a liquid crystal display device, a display device by lighting in dot units using an LED, a touch panel, a flexible liquid crystal display device, Illumina array (registered trademark), transparent liquid crystal A display, a transparent screen, a movable accessory, a non-movable accessory, etc. can be applied. Further, the number of projector devices, screens, and liquid crystal display devices is not particularly limited. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a security signal is externally output from the main control board MS and the payout / launch control circuit (not shown) via the external concentration terminal board 31, but from the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. A security signal may be output externally.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 131 (b), in the FAN temperature control table, basically, the FAN temperature (intake air temperature) of FAN2 is defined as a control condition corresponding to this FAN temperature.

  For example, if the FAN temperature is 0 ° C. or more and less than 67 ° C., the operation is normally controlled. If the FAN temperature is 67 ° C. or more, the main operation of the projector device B2 is forcibly shut down without performing a warning (warning display). Controlled. Also in such a forced shutdown due to the FAN temperature, an error notification command is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, so that the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 displays an image indicating the shutdown of the projector device B2. Is done. In this case as well, an image indicating a warning or shutdown is projected by the projector device B2 and also displayed on the liquid crystal display device DD19 in the same manner as the projected image. Thereby, even when projection by the projector device B2 is difficult or impossible, or even when display by the liquid crystal display device DD19 is difficult or impossible, an image indicating a warning or shutdown is displayed by any one of the display means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the player or the game hall manager. Further, in addition to the projection by the projector device B2 and the display by the liquid crystal display device DD19, the occurrence of an error is transmitted from the external concentration terminal board 31 of the gaming machine 1 to a game hall management device such as a hall computer or an island computer. You may make it alert | report.

  According to the LED temperature control table and the FAN temperature control table, the LED temperatures associated with the LED light source 240R (LED (R)), the LED light source 240G (LED (G)), and the LED light source 240B (LED (B)) When the temperature rises to a specified temperature (for example, LED (R): 85 ° C., LED (G), (B): 100 ° C.) or higher, a warning is issued due to an abnormality, and the LED temperature further rises. Thus, the temperature is higher than a specified temperature (for example, LED (R): 90 ° C., LED (G), (B): 105 ° C.) or even if the intake air temperature (FAN temperature) near FAN 2 is lower than the LED temperature. Since the main operation of the projector device B2 is temporarily stopped by the forced shutdown when the temperature of the projector device B2 becomes higher than (for example, 67 ° C.), The malfunction appropriately avoided on which made known a priori by the warning, it is possible to eliminate the discomfort of the image, such as up to long.

  Further, according to the LED temperature control table and the FAN temperature control table, when the temperature of the LED (R) is, for example, 85 ° C. or higher, or the temperature of the LEDs (G), (B) is higher, for example, 100 ° C. or higher, An error warning is issued to the CPU 400, and the temperature of the LED (R) further rises, for example, 90 ° C. or higher, or the temperature of the LEDs (G), (B) rises, for example, 105 ° C. or higher, or When the intake air temperature of FAN2 is lower than the temperature (85 ° C.) at which the warning (error warning) of the LED (R) is performed and reaches a prescribed temperature of FAN 2, for example, 67 ° C. or higher, the operation of the projector device B2 Is temporarily stopped by the forced shutdown, so that the malfunction of the projector device B2 due to heat accumulation is preliminarily indicated by a warning to the sub CPU 400. Appropriately avoided on which made known, it is possible to eliminate the discomfort of the image, such as up to long. Note that the temperature (85 ° C.) at which the warning of the LED (R) is performed is not limited to the LED (R), but is a temperature that is a criterion for the occurrence of abnormality in the entire LED including the LED (G) and the LED (B). It is good. That is, when there are a plurality of types of LEDs such as LED (R), LED (G), and LED (B), whether or not an abnormality has occurred may be determined based on any one type of LED temperature. The intake air temperature of FAN 2 is a temperature that can be recognized as the ambient temperature of the intake fan, the temperature of the intake fan itself, the temperature outside the projector device, or the outside air temperature.

  Further, according to the LED temperature control table and the FAN temperature control table, for example, when the temperature of the LED (R) becomes 85 ° C. or higher, a warning is given to the sub CPU 400 and a warning related to error notification is displayed on the screen accordingly. Is projected and displayed, and an image indicating a warning related to similar error notification is separately displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. Further, when the temperature of the LED (R) rises to, for example, 90 ° C. or higher, or the intake temperature of the FAN 2 becomes, for example, 67 ° C. or higher, an error notification is sent to the sub CPU 400, and a warning is accordingly generated. After an image related to a different error notification is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, the operation of the projector device B2 is forcibly stopped by a response from the sub CPU 400 to the error notification. As a result, the malfunction due to the heat accumulation of the projector device B2 is appropriately avoided by informing in advance by the error notification related to the warning and the error notification related to the subsequent forced shutdown, and the discomfort of the video over a long time is avoided. Can be resolved. In such a case, if there is no response from the sub CPU 400 even if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, it can be forcibly shut down.

  FIG. 132 shows a FAN temperature control table stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector control board B23 as a table according to the fifth modification. The table shown in FIG. 132 is an improvement of the FAN temperature control table shown in FIG. 131 (b).

  In the FAN temperature control table shown in FIG. 132, the control condition corresponding to the temperature abnormality of the intake air temperature (FAN2) and the control condition corresponding to the temperature abnormality of the exhaust gas temperature (FAN3) are defined to be different.

  For example, the intake air temperature is controlled so as to forcibly shut down the main operation of the projector apparatus B2 when it becomes 67 ° C. or higher, as in the case shown in FIG. 131 (b). During the forced shutdown, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 displays an image indicating the shutdown of the projector device B2. On the other hand, the exhaust temperature is controlled normally until it reaches 75 ° C., which is somewhat higher than that of the intake air temperature, and the operation is controlled without stopping at 75 ° C. or higher and lower than 80 ° C. Control is performed so as to perform a warning (warning display) as a temperature abnormality based on the projected image and the display image of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. Further, when the exhaust temperature reaches 80 ° C. or higher, the main operation of the projector device B2 is forcibly shut down. Be controlled. Also in the case of such a warning, a process corresponding to the warning is performed by the control LSI 230, and a command related to an error warning is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. In the projector apparatus B2, a warning is displayed on the screen. While the projected image is displayed, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 displays an image indicating the shutdown of the projector device B2. In addition, since the command related to the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS at the time of forced shutdown, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 displays an image indicating the shutdown of the projector device B2.

  FIG. 133 shows a projector error notification reception process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as a process according to the sixth modification. The process shown in FIG. 133 is obtained by improving a part of the process shown in FIG. 93 described above so that the process is suitable for the projector apparatus B2 in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 133, the sub CPU 400 performs projector error occurrence processing in response to an error notification from the projector control board B23 (S1041).

  Next, if the projector error is a warning, the sub CPU 400 makes a display request to both the projector and the projector device B2 so as to notify both of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and the projector device B2 and to make a warning notification. A response signal (command) corresponding to the error notification is transmitted (S1042). If the projector error is not a warning, the sub CPU 400 skips the process of S1042 and proceeds to the next process of S1043.

  Next, if the projector error is shutdown, the sub CPU 400 issues a display request to the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 so as to notify the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 of the shutdown of the projector device B2, and then the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. When the notification regarding the shutdown is performed in the display device DD19, a response signal (command) corresponding to the error notification is transmitted to the projector device B2 (S1043).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 makes a sound projector error generation output request to the speaker group 62 to notify the error of the projector control board B23 (projector apparatus B2) by sound (S1044). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector error notification reception process.

  By using the FAN temperature control table of FIG. 132 in combination with the LED temperature control table of FIG. 131 (a) and executing the projector error notification reception process of FIG. 133, for example, the LED (R) When the temperature is 85 ° C. or higher, or the exhaust temperature of FAN 3 is lower than that temperature, for example, 75 ° C. or higher, an error is notified to the sub CPU 400 by determining that there is an abnormality, and LED (R) When the temperature of the projector apparatus B2 rises to, for example, 90 ° C. or higher, or the intake temperature of the FAN 2 becomes, for example, 67 ° C. or higher, which is lower than the exhaust temperature, the operation of the projector device B2 is automatically stopped by forced shutdown. Informing the malfunction of the projector device B2 due to heat accumulation in advance by warning to the sub CPU 400 Appropriately avoided, it is possible to eliminate the discomfort of the image, such as up to long.

  FIG. 134 shows a FAN temperature rotation speed control table stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector control board B23 as a table according to the seventh modification.

  As shown in FIG. 134, in the FAN temperature rotational speed control table, the shutdown control conditions are defined differently based on the lower limit of the FAN rotational speed defined for each of FAN1 to FAN3. As the FAN temperature, for example, the intake air temperature of FAN2 is applied.

  For example, when the FAN temperature (FAN2) is 32 ° C. or lower, if the FAN rotation speed is less than 4410 rpm defined as the lower limit value, it is determined that there is a rotation speed error due to insufficient intake capacity, For FAN2, when the FAN rotational speed is less than 4410 rpm specified as the lower limit value, it is determined that the rotational speed error is due to insufficient intake capacity, and for FAN3 for exhaust, the FAN rotational speed is less than 3710 rpm specified as the lower limit value. Then, it is determined that there is a rotation speed error due to insufficient intake capacity. When it is determined that the rotation speed error has occurred in this way, the main operation of the projector apparatus B2 is controlled to be forcibly shut down.

  On the other hand, when the FAN temperature (FAN2) is higher than 32 ° C., it is required to exhibit a larger intake / exhaust (ventilation) capability. Therefore, when the FAN temperature (FAN2) is higher than 32 ° C., the lower limit value of a part of the FAN rotational speed is raised. As a result, when the FAN temperature (FAN2) is higher than 32 ° C., the FAN1 for intake is determined as a rotation speed error due to insufficient intake capacity when the FAN rotation speed is less than 6090 rpm defined as the lower limit value higher than the above. For the intake FAN2, when the FAN rotational speed is less than 4410 rpm defined as the same lower limit as described above, it is determined that the intake speed is insufficient and the rotational speed error is determined. For the exhaust FAN3, the FAN rotational speed is When it becomes less than 4410 rpm defined as a higher lower limit value, it is determined that the rotational speed error is due to insufficient intake capacity. Even when it is determined that the rotation speed error has occurred in this way, the main operation of the projector apparatus B2 is controlled to be forcibly shut down.

  According to such a FAN temperature rotation speed control table, when the FAN temperature becomes higher than 32 ° C., for example, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped by the forced shutdown. Accordingly, for the exhaust FAN 3 and the intake FAN 1, the operation of the projector device B 2 is stopped by the forced shutdown in accordance with the respective FAN rotation speeds. When the FAN temperature is 32 ° C. or lower, the operation of the projector B2 is stopped by the forced shutdown according to the FAN rotation speed of the intake FAN2 corresponding to the FAN temperature regardless of the temperature. A malfunction due to accumulation can be appropriately avoided according to the FAN temperature and the FAN rotation speed, and the discomfort of the video over a long time can be solved.

  Further, according to the FAN temperature rotation speed control table, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped by the forced shutdown in accordance with the FAN temperature and the FAN rotation speed of the exhaust FAN 3, while for the intake air regardless of the detected FAN temperature. Since the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped by forced shutdown even according to the FAN rotation speed of the FAN2, the malfunction due to the heat accumulation of the projector device B2 is appropriately avoided according to the FAN temperature and the FAN rotation speed, and for a long time. The discomfort of the image that reaches the end can be eliminated.

  Further, according to the FAN temperature rotation speed control table, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped by a forced shutdown in accordance with the FAN temperature of the intake FAN2 and the FAN rotation speed of the exhaust FAN3 and the intake FAN1. Therefore, malfunction due to heat accumulation in the projector apparatus B2 can be appropriately avoided according to the FAN temperature and the FAN rotation speed, and the discomfort of the video over a long time can be solved.

  It should be noted that all of the FANs 1 to 3 are provided with temperature sensors, and the FANs of the FANs 1 to 3 according to the airflow temperatures passing through the FANs 1 to 3 detected via the respective temperature sensors. You may make it perform stop control by rotation speed or a shutdown.

  FIG. 135 shows a sub-control-projector transmission process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 as a process according to the eighth modification. The process shown in FIG. 135 is executed in S1008 in the projector control main process in FIG. 129 described above, and is a partial improvement of only the process in S819 shown in FIG. Therefore, in FIG. 135, processes other than S819 'are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and only the process of S819' is described.

  As shown in FIG. 135, in S819 ', the control LSI 230 sets various flags & work area reset request flags of the DRAM to' ON '. Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the sub-control-projector transmission process. That is, in the case of a self-diagnosis error or DLP error including an error due to a watchdog timer (WDT) reset waiting, an “error notification” command indicating these errors is not sent immediately, and the reset request flag is set to “ON”. In response to ', wait for the reset signal to be output from the watchdog timer (WDT), and when the reset signal is output, the projector initialization process shown in FIG. 136 is executed by rebooting (restarting). It becomes.

  FIG. 136 shows projector initialization processing by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 as processing according to the eighth modification. The process shown in FIG. 136 is executed in S1001 in the projector control main process in FIG. 129 described above, and is a partial improvement of only the process in S727 shown in FIG. 109 described above. Therefore, in FIG. 136, processes other than S727 'are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and only the process of S319' is described.

  As shown in FIG. 136, in S727 ′, the control LSI 230 initializes various flags and work areas of the DRAM, and before this projector initialization process by reboot (restart), a self-diagnosis abnormality (watchdog timer (WDT ) Or an “error notification” command indicating a DLP error is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the projector initialization process.

  In addition to the projector control main process and projector self-diagnosis process shown in FIGS. 129 and 130 described above, the sub-control-projector transmission process and the projector initialization process shown in FIGS. R, G, B), FAN 1 to 3, or the power supply circuit B20, even if an abnormality occurs due to a thermal factor, the operation of the projector device B2 is forcibly shut down after an error is notified to the sub CPU 400 accordingly. To be stopped. On the other hand, for example, when the watchdog timer is not cleared (or set to a predetermined value) and falls into an infinite loop and becomes abnormal processing, the operation of the projector device B2 is also stopped in this case, but reboot (restart) When the watchdog timer is reset and the operation of the projector apparatus B2 is restored, an error notification is sent to the sub CPU 400. Therefore, after making sure that the sub CPU 400 is informed of various malfunctions of the projector apparatus B2. It can be avoided.

  As described above, when the abnormality process is performed using the watchdog timer, it is highly possible that the projector device B2 is frozen. Therefore, it is unlikely that normal operation is guaranteed, and an early reboot ( Reset or restart). Even if an attempt is made to transmit a transmission command at this stage, there is a high possibility that the transmission command will not be transmitted normally. Therefore, it is desirable to perform control so that an error is notified to the sub CPU 400 after reboot. As described above, when the projector device B2 is frozen, the watchdog timer is not cleared and the time is up (including the addition type and subtraction type counts). Notification will be made. Rebooting can also be recognized as a process for restarting. In addition, when abnormal processing is performed using the watchdog timer, it is highly possible that the projection is frozen and normal projection is difficult, so the liquid crystal display device DD19 and the gaming machine 1 Constituent members (for example, frame constituent members, panel constituent members, front door constituent members, cabinets, reels, levers, payout control board segment indicators and light sources (mainly LEDs, for example), segment indications provided on the housing Reflects the projector and light source (for example, LED), body frame member, dish unit, game machine side component, button, front panel (including liquid product display device), projector device B2 component, and projector device B2 projection The abnormality may be notified by various constituent members such as a reflecting member that is projected and a decorative member that protrudes from the frame. According to this, even when various abnormalities are detected except when abnormal processing is performed using the watchdog timer, abnormalities are caused by projection by the constituent members of the gaming machine 1 and the projector device B2. Notification and display (for example, error notification, warning, warning, abnormality notification, etc.) can be performed.

  As for abnormal operations of the gaming machine 1 and the projector device B2, external communication means (external concentration terminal board 31, wireless communication means, short-range wireless communication, optical communication means, encrypted communication means, decryption communication) of the gaming machine 1 Devices, encryption and decryption communication means, etc., external communication means provided in the projector device B2, etc., and a game room device (for example, hall computer evening, island computer, sand device, outbox, each unit counting) Machine, game media lending device with each counter, data display, digital signage, representative lamp, call button, game media number notification means (for example, the number of game media when the case is driven or emits light), Management device, peripheral device, CR unit, etc.) may indicate that an error has occurred. It can be combined in various ways, such as using a single unit or a plurality of units in the gaming machine 1, or adopting any one of the devices, and the gaming machine 1 has various communication modes. And can communicate with the outside. When such an error is notified to the outside, the game room manager turns on / off the gaming machine 1 (power interruption and power interruption recovery, setting change, etc.), and the gaming machine setting screen An operation for eliminating an error can be performed from a setting screen for a player, a setting screen for a game hall, or the like. In addition to the medals and balls, various game media such as the number of game media on data are assumed as game media. Further, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which the number of game media on the data (held balls, outgoing balls, lending balls, stored balls, credits, input numbers, firing numbers, payout numbers, foul ball numbers, etc.) increases or decreases. Note that holding balls, playing balls, lending balls, and storing balls are terms that can be applied to various game media such as medals and balls. In the case of an error for rebooting in this embodiment, error information (such as a self-diagnosis error, a DLP error, or a reset request flag) stored before rebooting at the time of restart is stored (for example, in an EEPROM). Since it is stored in a storage area that is not cleared before and after rebooting, it is possible to send an error notification during the initialization process that is executed at the time of restart. Part or all, clearing only the work area related to error notification, etc.). In addition, it is also possible to determine whether communication between boards or communication between control devices is normally performed using a watchdog timer. In this case as well, abnormality detection using the watchdog timer is performed. You can also express what to do. Further, the error information transmitted to the sub CPU 400 after the projector device B2 is rebooted is transmitted at the time of initialization processing executed at power-on or reboot, but is not limited to this. Error information may be transmitted in the step after the conversion process.

  FIG. 137 shows projector control processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as processing according to the ninth modification. The process shown in FIG. 137 is obtained by improving a part of the process shown in FIG. 88 described above so that the process is suitable for the projector apparatus B2 in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 137, the sub CPU 400 receives a command indicating that the transmission source ID of the reception data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 indicates “projector” for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) or more. It is determined whether or not it is not performed (S1051). If the command has not been received for a predetermined time or longer (S1051: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1052. When any command is received within the predetermined time (S1051: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1053. At this time, if the received data is normal, it is transmitted at a cycle of, for example, 500 ms using a transmission cycle counter, so that the presence or absence of the received data is monitored based on a longer time of 1000 ms. ing.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 outputs a projector error occurrence display request to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL in order to display an error of the projector control board B23 (projector device B2) on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 (S1052). ). Thus, for example, if there is no response from the projector device B2 even after a time of 500 ms or longer, an image for notifying the error of the projector device B2 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

  In step S1053, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the transmission source ID of the reception data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area indicates “projector”. When the transmission source ID indicates “projector” (S1053: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1054. When the transmission source ID does not indicate “projector” (S1053: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector control received data consistency check process for controlling the projector device B2 (S1054). In this process, the sub CPU 400 checks whether or not the value of the command ID included in the received data matches the value of “81H” to “8BH” indicating the transmission command from the projector control board B23 shown in FIG. The check result is returned as a return value.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines from the return value of the check result whether there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S1055). If there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S1055: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1056. If there is no abnormality in the consistency of received data (S1055: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1057.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 discards the data in the sub device reception storage area (S1056). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

  In step S1057, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector control reception process. This process corresponds to the process of FIG. 89 described above.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector drift correction process (S1058). This process corresponds to the process of FIG. 95 described above. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

  According to such projector control processing, the operation of the projector apparatus B2 should be restored by, for example, reboot (restart), but the sub CPU 400 has a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) longer than the transmission time interval of the projector apparatus B2. For example, if a predetermined response is not received from the projector device B2 even after a lapse of 1000 ms), it is determined that some malfunction has occurred that the projector device B2 cannot be restored by rebooting, and this is indicated by an image relating to the error notification. It can be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. Thereby, it is possible to avoid any malfunction of the projector device B2 after notifying the error reliably and promptly. Note that the predetermined time is not limited to 1000 ms as an example, and various times such as a time of 500 ms or more can be set if the transmission time interval for one communication is 500 ms, for example.

  FIG. 138 shows projector control reception processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as processing according to the tenth modification. In the process shown in FIG. 138, the process of S448 shown in FIG. 89 is changed to the process of FIG. 140 described later, and only the process of S449 is deleted. Therefore, in FIG. 138, the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 89 are used to omit the description, and the case of S445: No and the processing of S450 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 138, when there is no request for changing the projector setting value (S445: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S450. In S450, the sub CPU 400 performs status request command transmission processing. In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request command to the projector control board B23. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control reception process. In the tenth modification, the parameter request command transmitted from the projector control board B23 does not include a parameter value such as a setting change or status. For example, a focus position setting change including a focus position origin adjustment to be described later. A parameter value indicating whether or not it is a projector setting value change request is included. In other words, a parameter request command can be transmitted from the projector control board B23 at an arbitrary timing. Based on the parameter value included in such a command, whether or not there is a projector setting value change request in S445. Is determined. When a parameter request command is transmitted from the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 at an arbitrary timing, the sub CPU 400 receives the parameter request command (or triggered by the reception of the parameter request command). If there is a request for changing the projector setting values such as adjusting the focus position, changing the projection contents, moving the screen, etc., the projector setting values and parameters can be transmitted to the projector device B2. As described above, the projector apparatus B2 side can control the transmission timing of the command transmitted from the sub CPU 400, and the projector apparatus B2 periodically transmits a parameter request command to the sub CPU 400. It is also possible to notify the sub CPU 400 that a command can be received. In addition, the timing at which a parameter request command is transmitted from the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 to the sub CPU 400 is set to a predetermined interval (eg, 500 ms interval, constant interval, constant cycle, etc.), but is not limited thereto. When the sub CPU 400 determines to change the parameters of the projector device B2, the parameters may be transmitted to the projector control board B23. Further, when a parameter request command is transmitted from the projector control board B23 at a predetermined interval, a transmission / reception process in one process (for example, a transmission / reception process during startup of the projector apparatus, a transmission / reception process during parameter change in the projector apparatus, an error) In the transmission / reception process, etc., the parameter request command may be received a plurality of times, and it is assumed that the start of the transmission / reception process and reception of the parameter request in one process do not correspond one-on-one. In such a case, as described above, it is desirable that the sub CPU 400 independently transmits to the projector control board B23 at an arbitrary timing. The parameter request command, the reception confirmation command transmitted from the projector device B2 to the sub CPU 400, or the setting completion command transmitted from the sub CPU 400 to the projector device B2 has a special meaning because the commands are duplicated. Unless otherwise specified, some commands may be discarded. By periodically sending and receiving commands in this way, while monitoring that the communication status is normal, discard unnecessary commands (or just check the receipt of received commands and perform subsequent processing) The processing can be simplified.

  FIG. 139 shows projector drift correction processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as processing according to the tenth modification. The process shown in FIG. 139 is obtained by improving a part of the process shown in FIG. 95 described above so that the process is suitable for the projector apparatus B2 in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 139, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is a focus position setting change request based on the parameter request command from the projector control board B23 (S1061). This focus position setting change request is issued when the focus position should be changed while drift correction is performed after the focus position is once returned to the focus origin described later. When there is a focus position setting change request (S1061: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1062. When there is no focus position setting change request (S1061: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1063. Regarding the movement to the focus position, the focus position is calculated after incorporating drift correction in advance, and the focus position is moved according to the offset value without incorporating drift correction, and then the drift correction is performed. There is a method of moving the focus position, but either one of the methods may be applied, or any one of the methods may be appropriately selected according to the situation. Further, after the focus position is moved by drift correction, a predetermined focus position may be further moved according to the situation, or from the position before the movement to the position after the movement in a batch of focus movement. The focus position may be moved. As focus control at that time, when grasping the position before movement, when grasping the position after movement without grasping the position before movement, or when grasping only the movement amount, etc. Various controls are conceivable.

  In step S <b> 1062, the sub CPU 400 sets a status request command whose destination is the projector control board B <b> 23 in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM board 41. At this time, the drift correction temperature is specified as a parameter in the status request command. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. Note that the command set in the process of S1062 is transmitted to the projector control board B23 by the process of S450 of FIG. 138 described above.

  In S1063, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is 'drift correction temperature'. When the received command is 'drift correction temperature' (S1063: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1064. If the received command is not 'drift correction temperature' (S1063: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 obtains the drift correction temperature from the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and obtains the position coefficient of the focus position (S1064). As described above, the position coefficient of the focus position is a constant factor for obtaining an optimal correction position (focus correction value) according to the temperature characteristics for each of the focus positions A to E.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 multiplies the acquired drift correction temperature and the position coefficient to calculate a focus drift correction value (S1065). As described above, the focus drift correction value means a value obtained by correcting the focus position according to the ambient temperature.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the latest focus drift correction value calculated in S1065 is equal to the existing correction value in the focus correction value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S1066). When the latest focus drift correction value is equal to the existing correction value (S1066: Yes), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. When the latest focus drift correction value is different from the existing correction value (S1066: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1067.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 overwrites and saves the focus drift correction value in the focus correction value storage area (S1067).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a focus drift correction value setting change request command to the projector control board B23 (S1068).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 adds 1 to the focus drift correction number counter (S1069). The drift correction number counter is an addition counter for accumulating the number of times the focus position drift correction is performed in accordance with the rewrite of the focus drift correction value by the drift correction temperature. The focus drift correction number counter is set to an initial value in a process in which it is determined that the focus drift correction is performed after the focus position is returned to the focus origin described later, and 1 is added by actually performing the focus drift correction. The That is, when the focus drift correction is performed after returning to the focus origin, −1 is set as the initial value of the focus drift correction number counter in order to count the next focus drift correction as the first time. The initial value of the focus drift correction number counter is also set when the projector apparatus B2 is activated. In addition, since the focus drift correction is performed after the focus position is returned to the origin, the initial value of the focus drift correction counter may be set to 0 in order to count as the first focus drift correction. Further, when the initial value of the focus drift correction counter is set to 0, the count when the focus drift correction is performed after returning to the focus origin may not be performed. Regarding the focus drift correction, the temperature (the temperature of the LED, fan, projector device, etc.) when the previous focus drift correction was performed is compared with the temperature when the focus drift correction is performed this time, and based on the comparison result Depending on the amount of change in temperature, it may be performed according to the temperature when (or when) the focus is moved (including motorized focus movement or image movement by software image processing) or other predetermined conditions. The focus may be adjusted.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the focus position and the focus drift correction value in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S1070). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. Thereby, drift correction of the focus position is performed according to the drift correction temperature. Note that the drift correction is a process of moving by a difference amount corresponding to the drift correction from the focus position before correction for each drift correction temperature, and the drift error included in the difference amount increases as the number of drift corrections increases. For such a drift error, the focus position is temporarily returned to the focus positions A to E (hereinafter referred to as “focus origin”) as reference positions for each projection plane, and then the focus is adjusted to a position corresponding to the adjustment value or offset. By moving the position and then moving the focus position by the difference amount corresponding to the drift correction, the drift error accumulated so far is eliminated. This will be described later. Note that the calculation of the focus position may be performed by the projector device B2 based on the information necessary for that, such as an electric focus position offset or a focus correction value transmitted from the sub CPU 400. The drift error is considered to be caused by the following factors. That is, since the electric focus adjustment according to the drift correction temperature is physically performed by making full use of the focus motor 242C, if this is performed at every change of 1 ° C., for example, the focus motor 242C is driven and controlled very finely. It becomes. At this time, if the focus motor 242C is driven quickly and with high accuracy to the extent that the player does not feel uncomfortable while projecting an image, the possibility of so-called motor step-out increases, and if the motor step-out occurs, the control circuit An error occurs between the focus position recognized on the side and the actual physical focus position. Such a phenomenon is likely to occur when the electric focus adjustment is performed very finely. Therefore, as described later, in the case of a predetermined drift correction temperature (for example, in the case of a temperature change of 1 to 5 ° C.), the electric focus is adjusted. This can be dealt with by controlling not to make adjustments. Further, if the driving speed of the focus motor 242C is suppressed, the possibility of motor step-out may be reduced, but there is a demerit that the focus time becomes longer, and a required focus is required when images are continuously projected. If the electric focus adjustment is performed over time, the player will be disturbed or discomforted. This is particularly likely to occur significantly when a plurality of projection objects (screens) are provided and the projection objects are changed as in this embodiment. Therefore, if the player does not feel uncomfortable even if the video is visually distorted (for example, in the case of demonstration, darkening, stage change for production, etc.), the drive speed of the focus motor 242C is normal. It is also possible to cope with the slower speed.

  FIG. 140 shows projector setting change processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as processing according to the tenth modification. The process shown in FIG. 140 is obtained by improving a part of the process shown in FIG. 91 so that the process is suitable for the projector apparatus B2 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 140, the sub CPU 400 extracts the setting change contents of the projector setting value received as an argument (S1071).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a horizontal position offset (horizontal position A to E offset) (S1072). When the setting change content is the horizontal position offset (S1072: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1073. When the setting change content is not the horizontal position offset (S1072: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1074.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a horizontal position offset command transmission process (S1073). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the horizontal position offset (horizontal position A to E offset) in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and sends a command for setting the horizontal position offset to the projector control board B23. Send to. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process. Note that the horizontal position offset (horizontal image position offset) in the present embodiment is a horizontal position of a projection image that is offset from the reference position in the horizontal direction for each projection plane, and the entire projection image without performing the electric focus adjustment. Means a position to be finely adjusted in the horizontal direction.

  In step S1074, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is a vertical position offset. When the setting change content is the vertical position offset (S1074: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1075. When the setting change content is not the vertical position offset (S1074: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1076.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs vertical position offset command transmission processing (S1075). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the vertical position offset in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and transmits a command for setting the vertical position offset to the projector control board B23. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process. Note that the vertical position offset (vertical image position offset) in the present embodiment is a vertical position of the projection image that is offset-adjusted in the vertical direction from the reference position for each projection plane, and the entire projection image without performing the electric focus adjustment. Means a position to be finely adjusted in the vertical direction. In other words, the horizontal position offset and the vertical position offset control which two-dimensional position within the projection range the projection image is displayed on, so that the projection image can be moved without the electric focus adjustment. It is. The focus position may be moved by electric focus adjustment, and the horizontal position and vertical position of the projection image may be moved during rendering, and the position of the projection image may be changed by software video processing. Further, the electric focus adjustment may be performed based on the values of the horizontal position offset and the vertical position offset.

  In step S1076, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is a focus offset. When the setting change content is the focus offset (S1076: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1077. When the setting change content is not the focus offset (S1076: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1079.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a focus origin adjustment instruction transmission process (S1077). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 performs a focus position offset command transmission process (S1078). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the focus position offsets A to E in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and controls a command (focus position offset command) for setting the focus position offsets A to E by projector control. Transmit to the substrate B23. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

  In step S1079, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is focus drift correction. If the setting change content is focus drift correction (S1079: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1080. When the setting change content is not focus drift correction (S1079: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1082.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a focus origin adjustment instruction transmission process (S1080). This process is the same as the process of S1077, and will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 performs focus drift correction value command transmission processing (S1081). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the focus drift correction values A to E in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 and sets the focus drift correction values A to E (focus drift correction value command). Is transmitted to the projector control board B23. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

  In S1082, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is LED brightness setting. When the setting change content is LED brightness setting (S1082: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1083. When the setting change content is not the LED brightness setting (S1082: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1084.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs LED brightness setting command transmission processing (S1083). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the LED brightness setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits a command for setting the LED brightness to the projector control board B23. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

  In step S1084, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is a trapezoidal distortion correction value. If the setting change content is a trapezoidal distortion correction value (S1084: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1085. When the setting change content is not the trapezoidal distortion correction value (S1084: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1086.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a trapezoidal distortion correction value command transmission process (S1085). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the trapezoidal distortion correction value in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits a command for setting the trapezoidal distortion correction value to the projector control board B23. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

  In step S1086, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is a contrast setting. When the setting change content is the contrast setting (S1086: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1087. When the setting change content is not the contrast setting (S1086: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1088.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs contrast setting command transmission processing (S1087). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the contrast setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits a command for setting the contrast to the projector control board B23. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

  In step S1088, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is a gamma setting. If the setting change content is gamma setting (S1088: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next processing of S1089. If the setting change content is not gamma setting (S1088: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1090.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs gamma setting command transmission processing (S1089). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the gamma setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits a command for setting the gamma value to the projector control board B23. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

  In step S1090, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is a white color temperature. If the setting change content is the white color temperature (S1090: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1091. When the setting change content is not the white color temperature (S1090: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1092.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs white color temperature command transmission processing (S1091). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the white color temperature in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits a command for setting the white color temperature to the projector control board B23. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

  In step S1092, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is brightness. When the setting change content is brightness (S1092: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1093. When the setting change content is not brightness (S1092: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1094.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a brightness command transmission process (S1093). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the brightness in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits a command for setting the brightness to the projector control board B23. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

  In step S1094, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is a test pattern. When the setting change content is a test pattern (S1094: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1095. If the setting change content is not a test pattern (S1094: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a test pattern command transmission process (S1095). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the test pattern in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits a command for setting the test pattern to the projector control board B23. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process. Such projector setting change processing is executed when a maintenance worker in the game hall or an inspection worker makes various optical adjustments to the projector device B2 before shipment from the factory.

  FIG. 141 shows focus origin adjustment instruction transmission processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as processing according to the tenth modification.

  As shown in FIG. 141, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the focus origin adjustment flag is “ON” (S1101). This origin adjustment flag is flag information for designating whether or not to return the focus position to the focus origin. When the focus origin adjustment flag is “ON” (S1101: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1102. If the focus origin adjustment flag is not 'ON' (S1101: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the focus origin adjustment instruction transmission process.

  In step S1102, the sub CPU 400 sets a command indicating a focus origin adjustment instruction. This command, together with the focus position offset command or the focus drift correction value command, is transmitted to the projector control board B23 by the process of S1078 and the process of S1081 of FIG. 140 described above.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to “OFF”. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the focus origin adjustment instruction transmission process.

  FIG. 142 shows projector control processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as processing according to the tenth modification. The process shown in FIG. 142 is obtained by improving a part of the process shown in FIG. 88 described above so that the process is suitable for the projector device B2 of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 142, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the transmission source ID of the reception data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 indicates 'projector' (S1110). When the transmission source ID indicates “projector” (S1110: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1111. When the transmission source ID does not indicate “projector” (S431: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1118.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector control received data consistency check process for controlling the projector device B2 (S1111). In this process, the sub CPU 400 checks whether or not the value of the command ID included in the received data matches the value of “81H” to “8BH” indicating the transmission command from the projector control board B23 shown in FIG. The check result is returned as a return value.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets 0 to the reception counter of the projector control reception data (S1112). This reception counter is for counting commands transmitted from the control LSI 230 at a transmission period of 500 ms as an example in the present embodiment. For example, if the value of the reception counter is 3 or more, at least 1000 ms has elapsed since the reception counter was reset to 0.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the consistency of received data from the return value of the check result obtained in the process of S1111 (S1113). If there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S1113: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1114. When there is no abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S1113: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1115.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 discards the data in the sub device reception storage area (S1114). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1118.

  In step S1115, the sub CPU 400 performs a focus origin adjustment determination process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector control reception process (S1116). This process corresponds to the process of FIG. 138 described above.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs projector drift correction processing (S1117). This process corresponds to the process of FIG. 139 described above. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

  In step S1118, the sub CPU 400 adds 1 to the reception counter of the projector control reception data.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the reception counter of the projector control reception data is 3 or more (S1119). That is, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not at least 1000 ms has elapsed since the reception counter was reset. When the value of the reception counter is 3 or more and at least 1000 ms has elapsed (S1119: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1120. On the other hand, if the value of the reception counter is less than 2 and 1000 ms has not elapsed (S1119: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

  In S1120, the sub CPU 400 causes the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 to display an image relating to the error notification. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

  FIG. 143 shows focus origin adjustment determination processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as processing according to the tenth modification.

  As shown in FIG. 143, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not it is time for demo transition (when demo command is received) (S1121). The demo means a state where an image similar to the actual effect is displayed by the projector device B2 or the like when a predetermined time has passed without a medal being inserted, and the demo command is a main CPU 300 of the main control board MS. To the sub CPU 400 when shifting to the demo mode. The demo command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. When it is time for demo transition (S1121: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1128. If it is not during the demo transition ((S1121): No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of the next S1122.

  In S <b> 1122, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not it is time to start a chance time (hereinafter referred to as “CT”) as a gaming state. CT is a gaming state that progresses while displaying, for example, an image for production using the reel screen mechanism F1 as a projection target. The transition of the gaming state including this CT will be described later with reference to FIG. When it is time to start CT (S1122: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1128. If it is not at the start of CT, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1123.

  In step S <b> 1123, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the focus position origin adjustment is selected by the setting of the member menu. For example, when the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, password input operation) on the touch panel DD19T, the member menu is called as a screen as shown in FIG. 124, and the focus position is displayed on the member menu screen. The player can arbitrarily select whether or not to adjust the origin. When the origin adjustment of the focus position is selected by the member menu (S1123: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1128. When the origin adjustment of the focus position is not selected by the member menu, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1124.

  In S1124, the sub CPU 400 acquires the value of the focus drift correction number counter as the drift correction number, and determines whether or not the drift correction number is, for example, 30 or more as a predetermined value. If the number of drift corrections is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S1124: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1125. If the number of drift corrections is less than the predetermined value (S1124: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1126.

  In S1125, the sub CPU 400 sets −1 as an initial value in the focus drift correction number counter. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1128.

  In S1126, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the number of symbol fluctuations (or the number of games, the number of times of starting, etc.) has reached, for example, 300 times or more when the focus origin adjustment flag is “OFF”. The symbol variation count means the number of times that the symbol (identification information) variation display is started every time the reels RL, RC, RR are rotationally driven. The number of symbol variations (the number of identification information variations displayed) is counted using a variation counter. If the focus origin adjustment flag is “OFF” and the number of symbol fluctuations reaches, for example, 300 times or more (S1126: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S1127. Even when the focus origin adjustment flag is “OFF”, if the number of symbol variations is less than 300, for example (S1126: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the focus origin adjustment determination process.

  In step S <b> 1127, the sub CPU 400 clears the value of the variation count counter that counts the number of symbol variations when the focus origin adjustment flag is “OFF”.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to “ON” (S1128).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 makes a focus position setting change request in order to change the focus position while performing drift correction after returning the focus position to the focus origin (S1129). In this process, the sub CPU 400 stores setting change request data including the origin adjustment of the focus position in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits this data to the projector apparatus B2. The focus position setting change request data includes contents for changing the focus position after the focus position is once returned to the focus origin. Thereby, for example, when the screen to be projected is switched, the projector device B2 controls the focus mechanism 242 based on the focus position setting change request data to temporarily return the focus position to the focus origin, respectively. The focus of the projection lens 210 can be adjusted while performing drift correction at the focus position corresponding to the screen. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the focus origin adjustment determination process.

  According to the processes in FIGS. 138 to 143, the focus position is compensated by the drift correction even when the temperature of the projector apparatus B2 rises. Further, the drift error accumulates for each drift correction. By changing the setting so that the focus position is temporarily returned to the focus origin in accordance with the game state (CT) and the setting in the member menu, all accumulated drift errors are removed. Therefore, with respect to an image projected from the projector device B2 while performing drift correction during the electric focus control, image quality deterioration due to drift correction can be effectively suppressed at an appropriate timing.

  Also, when the number of drift corrections is a predetermined number of times, for example, 30 times or more, all drift errors accumulated so far are removed by changing the setting so that the focus position once returns to the focus origin during drift correction. As a result, with respect to an image projected from the projector device B2 while repeatedly performing drift correction, image quality deterioration due to drift correction can be effectively suppressed.

  In addition, even if the number of symbol fluctuations reaches, for example, 300 times or more as the predetermined number of times without the focus position returning to the focus origin, the drift that has accumulated up to that time is changed by changing the setting so that the focus position returns to the focus origin once. Since all the errors are removed, image quality deterioration caused by drift correction can be effectively suppressed with respect to an image projected from the projector apparatus B2 by repeatedly changing the focus position.

  The control entity that changes the focus position setting is not limited to the sub CPU 400, and the control LSI 230 of the projector apparatus B2 itself may change the focus position setting. In this case, the control LSI 230 automatically adjusts the focus position, for example, by monitoring the LED temperature and performing feedback control to perform drift correction after temporarily returning the focus position to the focus origin according to the LED temperature. be able to. At this time, whether or not the setting change is accompanied by the focus position origin adjustment can be appropriately determined according to the flag and conditions related to the focus position origin adjustment.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, a main series of projector control processes are executed according to a command transmitted from the projector apparatus B2 at a transmission cycle of, for example, 500 ms, and the focus position is determined by the process of S1115 in the series of processes. It is determined whether or not to perform the origin adjustment. For this reason, the timing at which the focus position origin adjustment is actually performed may be delayed from the point in time when the predetermined condition is satisfied due to a slight time lag. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the command may be immediately transmitted to the control LSI 230 of the projector apparatus B2. When it is necessary to transmit a command for changing the focus position, the command may be transmitted immediately at that time. The projector device B2 can immediately adjust the focus position in response to receiving such a command, and change the focus position while performing drift correction.

  FIG. 144 shows effect content determination processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as processing according to the eleventh modification. The process shown in FIG. 144 corresponds to the effect content determination process in S222 shown in FIG. 71, which is suitable for being executed while adjusting the origin of the focus position. FIG. 145 shows a display example of an image projected by the projector apparatus B2 according to the eleventh modification.

  As shown in FIG. 144, the sub CPU 400 determines the content of the effect according to the command received from the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS (S1131).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines, based on the determined content of the effect, whether the effect is accompanied by a change in the focus position that requires screen switching (S1132). When the effect is accompanied by a change of the focus position (S1132: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1137. If the effect is not accompanied by a change in the focus position (S1132: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1133.

  In S1133, the sub CPU 400 acquires the value of the focus drift correction number counter as the drift correction number, and determines whether or not the drift correction number is, for example, 15 or more as a predetermined value. If the number of drift corrections is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S1133: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1134. When the number of drift corrections is less than the predetermined value (S1133: No), the sub CPU 400 finalizes the effect content determined in the process of S1131, and ends the effect content determination process.

  In S1134, the sub CPU 400 discards the effect content determined in the process of S1131, and changes the effect content to an effect accompanied by a change in the focus position.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to “ON” (S1135).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets −1 as an initial value in the focus drift correction number counter (S1136).

  Then, as an effect changed in the process of S1134, the sub CPU 400 requests to change the focus position in order to project the video while changing the focus position while performing drift correction after temporarily returning the focus position to the focus origin. Is performed (S1137). As a result, for the effect image projected from the projector device B2, for example, as shown in FIG. 145 (a), the focus position once returns to the focus origin, so-called out-of-focus occurs, and corresponds to, for example, an internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 145 (b), an image in which the design can be seen clearly is displayed by gradually adjusting the focus position to a position corresponding to the projection target screen. .

  According to such an effect content determination process, the focus position is compensated by the drift correction even when the temperature of the projector device B2 rises, and the drift error accumulates for each drift correction. Since the focus position can be temporarily returned to the focus origin so as to project an effect image that changes into a clearly visible state, all drift errors accumulated so far can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress image quality deterioration due to drift correction while using the image projected from the projector device B2 while performing drift correction in the electric focus control.

  In addition, the image shown in FIG. 145 changes relatively, for example, from a state where the focus is initially shifted and the visibility is lowered to a state where the focus is gradually focused and the visibility is improved. It is possible to provide a state in which the visibility changes as a result of the change as video content for production. More specifically, such a video expression includes a predetermined effect image (for example, a specific small image such as notifying a player of lottery results such as an internal winning combination, a rare combination, a reach symbol, a jackpot symbol, etc.). (Such as images of cherry, watermelon, numbers, letters, symbols, characters, etc., video, effects, etc.) that can be viewed through a telescope, so that the initially blurred image becomes more clearly visible Can be provided. At this time, the outline and color scheme of the predetermined effect image to be projected are vaguely visually recognized by the player. Therefore, when the effect with the origin adjustment is executed, the effect with the origin adjustment is, for example, 10000 ms. At the same time, if the time required for the origin adjustment in the production is 2500 ms, for example, the first 1500 ms displays a common image like a treasure box, and the remaining 1000 ms and the production end (elapse of production time for 7500 ms) The predetermined effect image described above may be displayed. In this way, when the origin is adjusted and the player vaguely grasps the outline and color scheme, the final display content is not known, and notification is made with the effect image at the timing when the outline becomes clear You can also In the production with the origin adjustment, at which timing within the production time the origin adjustment is performed, for example, at the start of the production in 10000 ms, in the middle of the production when 5000 ms has elapsed, or when 7500 ms have elapsed. The timing can be changed as appropriate according to the presentation, such as the timing in accordance with the end of the presentation. Information on the timing of such origin adjustment may be stored in advance or may be changed as appropriate according to the situation. Or may be selected. Further, when the production time is not predetermined (for example, when an identification symbol capable of displaying a game result for the player is stopped according to the operation of the operation means), a treasure box or a predetermined production is provided. The timing for displaying the image is the operation of the player's operation means (for example, the operation of the reel stop button, the operation of the operation means for effects provided in the gaming machine, the operation of the lever, the operation of payout, the operation of lending, 1 Depending on the operation of the bet or MAX bet, the operation of a button that can be moved to the standby position and the protruding position and can be pressed at any position, etc., the displayed timing may be different. The origin adjustment may be executed on the condition that the identification symbol is changing and the operation means is operated. Then, when it is determined that it is the execution period of the effect to perform the origin adjustment in advance, the origin adjustment is performed on the condition that the operation means is operated, the origin adjustment is performed, and the treasure box or the predetermined effect image described above is performed. May be displayed.

  FIG. 146 shows effect content determination processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as processing according to the twelfth modification. The process shown in FIG. 146 corresponds to a modification of the process shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 146, the sub CPU 400 determines the contents of the effect according to the command received from the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS (S1141).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the effect is accompanied by a change in focus position that requires screen switching based on the determined effect content (S1142). When the effect is accompanied by a change in the focus position (S1142: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1148. If the effect is not accompanied by a change in the focus position (S1142: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1143.

  In S1143, the sub CPU 400 acquires the value of the focus drift correction number counter as the number of drift corrections, and determines whether or not the number of drift corrections is, for example, 15 or more as a predetermined value. When the number of drift corrections is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S1143: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1144. When the number of drift corrections is less than the predetermined value (S1143: No), the sub CPU 400 finalizes the effect content determined in the process of S1141, and ends the effect content determination process.

  In S1144, based on the received command, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a specific internal winning combination corresponding to a rare combination such as a so-called RT transition combination or bonus combination. When the internal winning combination is a specific internal winning combination (S1144: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of the next S1145. When the internal winning combination is not a specific internal winning combination (S1144: No), the sub CPU 400 determines the effect content determined in the process of S1141, and ends the effect content determination process.

  In S1145, the sub CPU 400 discards the effect content determined in the process of S1141, and then changes the effect content to an effect accompanied by a change in the focus position.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to “ON” (S1146).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets −1 as an initial value in the focus drift correction number counter (S1147).

  Then, as an effect changed in the processing of S1145, the sub CPU 400 requests to change the focus position in order to project the video while changing the focus position while performing drift correction after temporarily returning the focus position to the focus origin. Is performed (S1148). According to this, the content of the effect once determined according to the internal winning such as a rare role having a relatively low winning probability is changed, and the video for the effect projected from the projector device B2 at that time is shown in FIG. An image similar to that shown will be displayed. Such effect content determination processing may be executed only when the number of games reaches a predetermined number of times without a specific internal winning combination being won internally.

  Even with such production content determination processing, the focus position can be temporarily returned to the focus origin when projecting a video for production with a relatively low appearance frequency, and all accumulated drift errors can be removed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress image quality deterioration due to drift correction.

  FIG. 147 shows an effect content determination process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as the process according to the thirteenth modification. The process illustrated in FIG. 147 corresponds to a modification of the process illustrated in FIG. 144 or FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 147, the sub CPU 400 determines the content of the effect according to the command received from the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS (S1151).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines, based on the determined content of the effect, whether the effect is accompanied by a change in focus position that requires screen switching (S1152). When the effect is accompanied by a change in the focus position (S1152: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1157. If the effect is not accompanied by a change in the focus position (S1152: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1153.

  In S1153, the sub CPU 400 acquires the value of the focus drift correction number counter as the drift correction number, and determines whether or not the drift correction number is, for example, 15 or more as a predetermined value. If the number of drift corrections is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S1153: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1154. When the number of drift corrections is less than the predetermined value (S1153: No), the sub CPU 400 finalizes the effect content determined in the process of S1151, and ends the effect content determination process.

  In step S <b> 1154, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the effect content determined in the process of 1151 is an effect accompanied by darkness of the video. The effect accompanying darkness of the image means an effect that temporarily changes the image to a dark state when the projection target is switched from one screen to another screen, for example. When the effect is accompanied by darkening of the video (S1154: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1155. When the effect is not accompanied by darkening of the video (S1154: No), the sub CPU 400 determines the effect content determined in the process of S1151, and ends the effect content determination process.

  In step S <b> 1155, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to ‘ON’ while using the effect content determined in step S <b> 1151.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets −1 as an initial value in the focus drift correction number counter (S1156).

  Then, the sub CPU 400 makes a focus position setting change request in order to project a relatively dark image while changing the focus position while performing drift correction after the focus position is once returned to the focus origin when the image is dark. (S1157). According to this, when the image is darkened due to the screen switching, the image projected from the projector device B2 is an image that is relatively dark and cannot be visually recognized as being out of focus. . Such effect content determination processing may be executed only when the video is simply darkened to a predetermined level without switching the screen.

  According to such effect content determination processing, the focus position can be temporarily returned to the focus origin in a specific effect state of darkness of a video that is difficult for a player to understand out of focus, and all accumulated drift errors are removed. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress image quality deterioration due to subsequent drift correction.

  FIG. 148 shows a drift correction temperature table stored in the sub ROM substrate 42 of the sub control substrate SS as a table according to the fourteenth modification.

  As shown in FIG. 148, in the drift correction temperature table, for example, the drift correction temperature is effectively applied as a data value to the drift correction temperature obtained via the temperature sensor B25 according to the temperature change situation. Whether or not is defined in a predetermined temperature range.

  For example, when the temperature change per minute is 10 ° C. or more for the drift correction temperature obtained through the temperature sensor B25, the drift correction temperature defined as the data valid value A is applied. According to this, the drift correction temperature is directly applied as the data valid value A regardless of the temperature difference from a predetermined reference temperature. That is, when there is a relatively rapid temperature change, the drift correction temperature is used as it is as a data value for calculating the focus drift correction value.

  On the other hand, for the drift correction temperature obtained via the temperature sensor B25, when the temperature change per minute is less than 10 ° C., the drift correction temperature defined as the data valid value B is applied. According to this, the drift correction temperature is 0 ° C. as the effective data value B to be applied when a temperature difference from a predetermined reference temperature is detected within a range of 0 ° C. to ± 11 ° C. , + 11 ° C. to −11 ° C., the data valid value B is applied as it is. That is, when the temperature change is relatively gradual, the drift correction temperature is not valid as a data value for calculating the focus drift correction value unless the temperature difference from the reference temperature exceeds ± 11 ° C. If the difference is within a temperature range of ± 11 ° C., drift correction is not performed. The temperature change per minute in the present embodiment is, for example, a temperature measured during a predetermined time (for example, a time that is not limited to 1 minute, and may be obtained by time management using a real-time clock or the like). The average value obtained by dividing the total value of the added temperatures by the number of measurements and the maximum and minimum values of the temperatures measured at a given time are obtained, and the intermediate value between the maximum and minimum values and the previous drift correction The result of comparison with the temperature at the time of performing (or the temperature at the time of power-on, etc.) may be obtained as the temperature change per minute.

  FIG. 149 shows projector drift correction processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as processing according to the fourteenth modification. The process shown in FIG. 149 corresponds to a modification of the process shown in FIG. 95 or 139 described above, and is partially improved as a process using the drift correction temperature table of FIG. 148.

  As shown in FIG. 149, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is a focus position setting change request based on the parameter request command from the projector control board B23 (S1161). When there is a focus position setting change request (S1161: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1163. When there is no focus position setting change request (S1161: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1162.

  In S1162, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is equal to or greater than 120 (approximately equivalent to 1 minute) as a predetermined value. The drift correction monitoring counter is, for example, an addition counter for measuring time in order to monitor a temperature change per minute. When the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is equal to or larger than the predetermined value (S1162: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1163. When the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is less than the predetermined value (S1162: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1165.

  In S1163, the sub CPU 400 clears the value of the drift correction monitoring counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets a status request command whose destination is the projector control board B23 in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S1164). At this time, the drift correction temperature is specified as a parameter in the status request command. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. Note that the command set in the process of S1164 is transmitted to the projector control board B23 by the process of S450 in FIG. 138 described above.

  In step S <b> 1165, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is “drift correction temperature”. When the received command is “drift correction temperature” (S1165: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1166. If the received command is not 'drift correction temperature' (S1165: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process.

  In step S <b> 1166, the sub CPU 400 acquires the drift correction temperature from the projector status storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 and acquires the position coefficient of the focus position. As described above, the position coefficient of the focus position is a constant factor for obtaining an optimal correction position (focus correction value) according to the temperature characteristics for each of the focus positions A to E.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 refers to the drift correction temperature table in FIG. 148 based on the temperature change per minute and selects a data value of the drift correction temperature that is effective as the focus drift correction value (S1167). At this time, for example, when the temperature change per minute is 10 ° C. or more, the drift correction temperature is selected as it is as the data valid value A regardless of the temperature difference from the predetermined reference temperature. On the other hand, when the temperature change per minute is less than 10 ° C, the drift correction temperature is 0 ° C as the data valid value B if the temperature difference from the predetermined reference temperature is within the range of 0 ° C to ± 11 ° C. If it is selected and + 11 ° C. or more and −11 or less, it is selected as the data valid value B as it is.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the focus drift correction value by multiplying the drift correction temperature and the position coefficient selected as the data valid value (S1168). The focus drift correction value means a value obtained by correcting the focus position according to the ambient temperature (drift correction temperature) as described above. At this time, if 0 ° C. is selected as the data valid value, the focus drift correction value is 0, and no drift correction is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the latest focus drift correction value calculated in S1168 is equal to the existing correction value in the focus correction value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S1169). When the latest focus drift correction value is equal to the existing correction value (S1169: Yes), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. If the latest focus drift correction value is different from the existing correction value (S1169: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1170.

  In S1170, the sub CPU 400 overwrites and saves the focus drift correction value in the focus correction value storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a focus drift correction value setting change request command to the projector control board B23 (S1171).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets −1 as an initial value in the focus drift correction number counter (S1172).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the focus position and the focus drift correction value in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S1173). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. Thus, when the drift correction temperature is selected as a data valid value other than 0, the focus position drift correction is performed.

  According to such projector drift correction processing, for example, a temperature range in which drift correction is invalid is set according to a temperature change per minute, and drift correction may or may not be performed even at the same drift correction temperature. Yes, drift correction is appropriately performed according to the temperature change situation. This also makes it possible to reduce the drift error accumulated for each drift correction as much as possible, and to effectively suppress the deterioration of the image quality of the image projected from the projector device B2.

  FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a drift correction temperature table stored in the sub ROM substrate 42 of the sub control substrate SS as a table according to the fifteenth modification. This drift correction temperature table corresponds to a modification of the drift correction temperature table shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 150, in the drift correction temperature table, for example, the drift correction temperature obtained via the temperature sensor B25 depends on whether or not a demonstration is being displayed in addition to the temperature change state. Whether or not the correction temperature is effectively applied as a data value is defined in a predetermined temperature range.

  For example, when the temperature change per minute is 10 ° C. or more for the drift correction temperature obtained via the temperature sensor B25 in the case other than the demonstration display, the data valid value A The specified drift correction temperature is applied. According to this, the drift correction temperature is directly applied as the data valid value A regardless of the temperature difference from a predetermined reference temperature. In other words, when a predetermined video corresponding to the gaming state is projected as a presentation display other than during the demonstration display, and there is a relatively rapid temperature change, the drift correction temperature is a data value for calculating the focus drift correction value. As it is.

  On the other hand, even when the demonstration is not being displayed, if the temperature change per minute is less than 10 ° C. (in the case of temperature change b), the data is valid for the drift correction temperature obtained via the temperature sensor B25. The drift correction temperature defined as the value B ′ is applied. According to this, the drift correction temperature is 0 ° C. as the data effective value B ′ to be applied when a temperature difference from a predetermined reference temperature is detected within a range of 0 ° C. to ± 6 ° C. Thus, when detected at + 6 ° C. or more and −6 ° C. or less, the data valid value B ′ is applied as it is. In other words, the drift correction temperature is valid as a data value for calculating the focus drift correction value as long as the temperature difference from the reference temperature does not exceed ± 6 ° C when the temperature change is relatively gentle except during the demonstration display. In other words, drift correction is not performed within a temperature range of ± 6 ° C.

  Further, during the demonstration display, the drift correction temperature defined as the data valid value B is applied to the drift correction temperature obtained via the temperature sensor B25 regardless of the temperature change per minute. According to this, the drift correction temperature is 0 ° C. as the effective data value B to be applied when a temperature difference from a predetermined reference temperature is detected within a range of 0 ° C. to ± 11 ° C. , + 11 ° C. to −11 ° C., the data valid value B is applied as it is. In other words, during the demonstration display, there is no need to project an image with high image quality even after drift correction, so the drift correction temperature is the focus unless the temperature difference from the reference temperature exceeds ± 11 ° C. It is not valid as a data value for calculating the drift correction value, and drift correction is not performed within a temperature range where the temperature difference is ± 11 ° C.

  FIG. 151 shows a demo command transmission process by the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS as a process according to the fifteenth modification. The processing shown in FIG. 151 is sequentially executed in the medal acceptance / start check processing of S103 shown in FIG. 59 described above, or in sequence with each processing shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 151, the main CPU 300 determines whether or not a medal can be inserted (including a state in which the BET button can be operated) (S1181). When the medal can be inserted (S1181: Yes), the main CPU 300 proceeds to the next process of S1182. When the medal cannot be inserted (S1181: No), the main CPU 300 ends the demo command transmission process.

  In S1182, the main CPU 300 determines whether or not the error flag is “1”. The error flag is flag information for indicating whether there is a communication error or the like between the main control board MS and its connection board. If there is an error, “1” is set. When the error flag is “1” (S1182: Yes), the main CPU 300 proceeds to the process of S1188. When the error flag is not “1” but “0” (S1182: No), the main CPU 300 shifts to next processing of S1183.

  In S1183, the main CPU 300 determines whether or not the demo command transmission flag is “1”. The demo command transmission flag is flag information for indicating whether or not the demo command can be transmitted to the sub-control board SS, and is set to “1” when the demo command can be transmitted. When the demo command transmission flag is “1” (S1183: Yes), the main CPU 300 proceeds to the process of S1186. When the demo command transmission flag is not “1” but “0” (S1183: No), the main CPU 300 shifts to the next processing of S1184.

  In S1184, the main CPU 300 sets the initial value of the demo command transmission timer. The demo command transmission timer is a subtraction timer for measuring the waiting time until the demo command is transmitted. For example, a numerical value corresponding to a waiting time of 30 s or 60 s is set as an initial value.

  Next, the main CPU 300 sets “1” in the demo command transmission flag (S1185).

  Next, the main CPU 300 subtracts 1 from the value of the demo command transmission timer (S1186).

  Next, the main CPU 300 determines whether or not the value of the demo command transmission timer is “0” (S1187). When the value of the demo command transmission timer is “0” (S1187: Yes), the main CPU 300 proceeds to the next process of S1188. When the value of the demo command transmission timer is not “0” (S1187: No), the main CPU 300 proceeds to the process of the next S1188.

  In S1188, the main CPU 300 determines whether or not an error such as a communication error is occurring between the main control board MS and its connection board. If an error has occurred (S1188: Yes), the main CPU 300 proceeds to the process of S1192. If no error has occurred (S1188: No), the main CPU 300 proceeds to the next process of S1189.

  In S1189, the main CPU 300 generates demo command data, and stores the generated demo command data in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The stored demo command data is transmitted to the sub control board SS in the data transmission process (command transmission process) of S127 shown in FIG. Thereby, a video for demonstration is projected as a demonstration display from the projector apparatus B2.

  Next, the main CPU 300 sets “0” in the demo command transmission flag (S1190).

  Next, the main CPU 300 sets “0” in the error flag (S1191). Thereafter, the main CPU 300 ends the demo command transmission process.

  In S 1192, the main CPU 300 sets “1” in the error flag and ends the demo command transmission process. In this case, the demonstration is not displayed because an error has occurred.

  According to the projector drift correction process using the drift correction temperature table shown in FIG. 150 depending on whether or not the demonstration is being displayed, the temperature range in which the drift correction is invalid differs depending on whether or not the demonstration is being displayed. While the temperature range that is invalid during the demonstration display is relatively wide, the temperature range that is invalid when the demonstration is not being displayed becomes relatively narrow or disappears. In other words, the drift correction frequency can be changed not only by the drift correction temperature but also by the demo display, and the drift correction frequency can be suppressed even if the state of the demo display becomes long. As a result, it is possible to effectively reduce deterioration of the image quality of the image projected from the projector device B2.

  FIG. 152 shows game state transitions according to the sixteenth modification.

  As shown in FIG. 152, a gaming machine 1 as a pachislot machine has a plurality of gaming states, and as an example, a plurality of gaming states include a normal gaming state and a bonus gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “BB”). ), A chance zone (hereinafter referred to as “CZ”), an ART gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “ART”), and a chance time (hereinafter referred to as “CT”).

  For example, the normal gaming state is a gaming state in which a transfer lottery to CZ or BB is performed according to an internal winning combination, and when the winning lottery is won, the game state shifts to CZ or BB. In this normal gaming state, for example, an effect video is displayed using the front screen mechanism E1.

  BB is a game state in which a so-called regular bonus is repeated until the number of medals paid out exceeds a predetermined number, and the game state shifts from CZ, ART or CT according to the internal winning combination, while the normal game state according to a predetermined end condition In addition to the above, a lottery for the number of ART games or lottery for the first time of ART is performed, and when these lotteries are won, it is a gaming state in which the number of ART games is increased or the state is shifted to ART. For example, in the normal gaming state or BB shifted from CZ, an effect video is displayed using the front screen mechanism E1, and in BB shifted from ART, the effect video is displayed using the reel screen mechanism F1. In the BB of the ART addition zone shifted from CT, an effect image is displayed while appropriately switching between the fixed screen mechanism D and the reel screen mechanism F1.

  CZ shifts from the normal game state according to the internal winning combination, while performing a lottery to transfer to the CT via ART, BB, or ART, and when the transfer lottery is won, the game shifts to ART, BB, or CT State. In the CZ, for example, an effect image is displayed using the front screen mechanism E1.

  In ART, the state in which the sub CPU 400 notifies the reel stop operation so that the internal winning combination is advantageously won or not won for the player is referred to as “AT”, and this AT is combined with a so-called replay high probability state (RT). The gaming state is controlled. During ART, an internal winning combination can be won so that the number of medals can be increased without reducing as much as possible. Therefore, as the number of ART games increases, more medals can be obtained. The ART shifts from BB, CZ, or CT according to the internal winning combination. On the other hand, the ART performs lottery transfer to BB or CT. When the transfer lottery is won, the ART shifts to BB or CT. In this ART, for example, an image for production is displayed using the fixed screen mechanism D. For example, when a transition is made from ART to CT, a game aimed at aligning a specific symbol combination during a replay high-probability state, and winning a lottery that can align the specific symbol combination, It is possible to increase the number of games and the number of CT sets.

  Although CT does not change the winning probability of a small role such as a bell, watermelon, cherry, etc., regardless of the internal winning role, it can be awarded to any small role depending on the so-called stop operation by the player. In addition, in the gaming state in which the reels are controlled, the maximum value of the number of sliding symbols (maximum sliding display number) is basically 1 for one or a plurality of reels during CT. Incidentally, the maximum value of the number of sliding symbols is 4 in a gaming state other than CT. CT shifts from ART depending on the internal winning combination, while lottery to ART, additional lottery of ART games, and additional lottery of CT set number are performed, and when these lotteries are won, it shifts to ART. Or add the number of ART games and the number of CT sets. Such CT continues for the number of games that is added to the number of games. In this CT, an image for production is displayed using the reel screen mechanism F1.

  Thus, at the start of each gaming state, the screen to be projected by the projector device B2 is switched as appropriate. In particular, at the start of CT in which an image is projected onto a specific screen (reel screen mechanism F1), the focus position is changed while drift correction is performed after the focus position is once returned to the focus origin. It has become. As a result, all accumulated drift errors are removed. For this reason, with respect to an image projected from the projector apparatus B2 while performing drift correction in the electric focus control, image quality deterioration due to drift correction can be effectively suppressed every time the CT is shifted to CT.

  Note that the plurality of gaming states are not limited to these. For example, even in the normal gaming state, a state where the winning probability of shifting to the CZ is high or low may be included. Similarly, the gaming state may include a state having a different probability of transition to a more advantageous gaming state.

  FIG. 153 shows a focus adjustment frequency setting table stored in the sub ROM board 42 of the sub control board SS as a table according to the seventeenth modification.

  As shown in FIG. 153, in the focus adjustment frequency setting table, the number of symbol fluctuations after the previous focus position origin adjustment (readjustment) is performed depending on whether the focus position change frequency is relatively high or low. For example, when the number reaches 150 times or 300 times, a setting change request is made to perform the next origin adjustment. The case where the change frequency of the focus position is relatively high corresponds to, for example, the CT described above with reference to FIG. 152, and the case where the change frequency is relatively low is a gaming state other than during such CT. Equivalent to. During CT, since there is a possibility of winning the BB in the ART extra zone, the frequency of changing the focus position is relatively high. In FIG. 153, for example, it is determined whether or not the origin adjustment (re-adjustment) should be performed on the condition of the number of symbol fluctuations. It may be specified that whether or not to perform the next origin adjustment is determined on the condition of the specific number of performance executions from the bonus or the elapsed time since the previous origin adjustment. In addition, for example, in a gaming machine equipped with a so-called pseudo BB, there may be a case where it fluctuates 150 times or more during BB.

  FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing effect content determination processing of the sub control board SS according to the seventeenth modification. The process shown in FIG. 154 is a process using the focus adjustment frequency setting table of FIG. 153 and corresponds to a modification of the process shown in FIG. 144, FIG. 146, or FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 154, the sub CPU 400 determines the contents of the effect according to the command received from the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS (S1201).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines, based on the determined effect content, whether the effect is accompanied by a change in the focus position that requires screen switching (S1202). When the effect is accompanied by a change in the focus position (S1202: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1208. When the effect is not accompanied by a change in the focus position (S1202: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S1203.

  In S1203, the sub CPU 400 acquires the value of the focus drift correction number counter as the number of drift corrections, and determines whether or not the number of drift corrections is, for example, 15 or more as a predetermined value. If the number of drift corrections is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S1203: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S1204. If the number of drift corrections is less than the predetermined value (S1203: No), the sub CPU 400 determines the content of the effect determined in the process of S1201, and then proceeds to the process of S1209.

  In S1204, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a specific small combination such as a rare small combination. When the internal winning combination is a specific small combination (S1204: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of the next S1205. When the internal winning combination is not a specific small combination (S1204: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1209.

  In step S1205, the sub CPU 400 discards the effect content determined in the process of step S1201, and then changes the effect content to an effect corresponding to the winning of a specific small role involving a change in the focus position.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to 'ON' (S1206).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets −1 as an initial value in the focus drift correction number counter (S1207).

  Then, as an effect changed in the processing of S1205, the sub CPU 400 requests to change the focus position in order to project the video while changing the focus position while performing drift correction after temporarily returning the focus position to the focus origin. (S1208). As a result, for the effect image projected from the projector apparatus B2, for example, as shown in FIG. 145 (a), the focus position once returns to the focus origin, so-called out-of-focus occurs and corresponds to a specific small role. The image becomes difficult to see, and then, as shown in FIG. 145 (b), by gradually adjusting the focus position to the position corresponding to the screen to be projected, the design corresponding to the specific small role can be seen clearly. A video like this is displayed.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the gaming state is a bonus (BB) (S1209). When the gaming state is a bonus (BB) (S1209: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1210. When the gaming state is not a bonus (BB) (S1209: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1212.

  In S1210, the sub CPU 400 further determines whether or not the effect mode is the effect mode of the ART extra zone during the bonus. In such an effect mode in the BB in the ART addition zone, since the fixed screen mechanism D and the reel screen mechanism F1 are switched as appropriate, the change frequency (number of fluctuations) of the focus position is relatively higher (more) than in the other effect modes. )Become. If it is the effect mode of the ART extra zone in the bonus (S1210: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1211. When it is not the effect mode of the ART extra zone in the bonus (S1210: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1212.

  In step S1211, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus change frequency to “high”. That is, the case where the focus change frequency is “high” in the focus adjustment frequency setting table of FIG. 153 is referred to. As a result, when the number of symbol fluctuations reaches 150 after the previous focus position origin adjustment (readjustment), the sub CPU 400 once again returns the focus position to the focus origin by readjustment, and then performs drift correction. The image is projected while changing the focus position. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the effect content determination process.

  On the other hand, in S1212, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus change frequency to “low”. That is, the case where the focus change frequency is “low” in the focus adjustment frequency setting table of FIG. 153 is referred to. Thereby, the sub CPU 400 once returns the focus position to the focus origin again by readjustment when the number of symbol fluctuations reaches 300 times, which is more than the previous 150 times after the previous focus position origin adjustment (readjustment). In addition, the image is projected while changing the focus position while performing drift correction. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the effect content determination process.

  According to the effect content determination process using the focus adjustment frequency setting table of FIG. 153, in a specific gaming state (effect mode) in which the change frequency of the focus position is relatively increased as the screen is changed, the change frequency is changed. Since there is a higher possibility that the focus position is adjusted in the origin than in the play mode in other gaming states where there is relatively little, the focus adjustment error that accumulates each time the focus position is changed is reduced according to the change frequency of the focus position. As a result, it is possible to effectively suppress the deterioration of the image quality of the video due to the focus adjustment error.

  FIG. 155 shows focus origin adjustment determination processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as processing according to the eighteenth modification. The process illustrated in FIG. 155 corresponds to a modification of the process illustrated in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 155, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not it is time for demo transition (when demo command is received) (S1221). When it is time for demo transition (S1221: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1228. If it is not during the demo transition ((S1221): No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of the next S1222.

  In S1222, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the gaming state is at the start of CT. When it is time to start CT (S1222: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1228. If it is not at the start of CT, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1223.

  In step S1223, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the focus position origin adjustment has been selected by the setting of the member menu. When the origin adjustment of the focus position is selected from the member menu (S1223: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1228. When the origin adjustment of the focus position is not selected by the member menu, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1224.

  In S1224, the sub CPU 400 acquires the value of the focus drift correction number counter as the number of drift corrections, and determines whether or not the number of drift corrections is, for example, 30 or more as a predetermined value. When the number of drift corrections is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S1224: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1225. When the number of drift corrections is less than the predetermined value (S1224: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1226.

  In S1225, the sub CPU 400 sets −1 as an initial value in the focus drift correction number counter. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S1228.

  In step S1226, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not a condition corresponding to the focus position change frequency, that is, a predetermined condition corresponding to the focus position change frequency defined in the focus adjustment frequency setting table in FIG. 153 is satisfied. . For example, when the frequency of focus position change is “high” and the number of symbol fluctuations reaches 150 after the previous focus position origin adjustment, or when the frequency of focus position change is “low” If the number of symbol fluctuations reaches 300 after the previous focus position origin adjustment (S1226: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1227. On the other hand, even if the focus position change frequency is “high”, the previous origin adjustment or the number of symbol fluctuations has not reached 150 times, or the focus position change frequency is “low”. When the number of symbol fluctuations has not reached 300 (S1226: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the focus origin adjustment determination process.

  In step S <b> 1227, the sub CPU 400 clears the value of the variation counter that counts the variation number of the focus position when the focus origin adjustment flag is “OFF”.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to “ON” (S1228).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 makes a focus position setting change request in order to change the focus position while performing drift correction after returning the focus position to the focus origin (S1229). In this process, the sub CPU 400 stores setting change request data including the origin adjustment of the focus position in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits this data to the projector apparatus B2. The focus position setting change request data includes contents for changing the focus position after the focus position is once returned to the focus origin. Thereby, for example, when the screen to be projected is switched, the projector device B2 controls the focus mechanism 242 based on the focus position setting change request data to temporarily return the focus position to the focus origin, respectively. The focus of the projection lens 210 can be adjusted while performing drift correction at the focus position corresponding to the screen. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the focus origin adjustment determination process.

  According to such a focus origin adjustment determination process, the condition for adjusting the origin of the focus position can be switched according to the change frequency of the focus position, and the focus adjustment error can be appropriately reduced, resulting in the focus adjustment error. It is possible to effectively suppress image quality degradation.

  FIG. 156 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when projector apparatus B2 and sub CPU 400 according to the nineteenth modification are activated.

  As shown in FIG. 156, when communication between the projector device B2 and the sub control board SS is established at the time of starting the gaming machine 1, the control LSI 230 of the projector apparatus B2 sends a start parameter request command to the sub control board SS. It transmits to CPU400. The sub CPU 400 that has received the startup parameter request command transmits a startup parameter request confirmation command to the control LSI 230. Upon receiving the activation parameter request confirmation command, the control LSI 230 transmits the reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits an LED brightness setting command to the control LSI 230. In the control LSI 230 that has received the LED brightness setting command, the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B are controlled based on the LED brightness specified by the command. At this time, according to the LED brightness setting command, for example, 100% brightness is designated as the default value as shown in FIG. Upon receiving the LED brightness setting command, the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits a trapezoidal distortion correction command to the control LSI 230. In the control LSI 230 that has received the trapezoidal distortion correction command, the focus mechanism 242 is controlled based on the trapezoidal distortion correction value specified by the command. At this time, according to the trapezoidal distortion correction command, for example, 40 is designated as the default value (trapezoidal distortion correction value) of the trapezoidal distortion correction, as shown in FIG. Upon receiving the trapezoidal distortion correction command, the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits a white color temperature setting command to the control LSI 230. Upon receiving the white color temperature setting command, the control LSI 230 controls the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B based on the white color temperature specified by the command. At this time, according to the white color temperature setting command, for example, 1 is designated as the default value of the white color temperature, as shown in FIG. Upon receiving the white color temperature command, the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits a horizontal image position offset setting command to the control LSI 230. Upon receiving the horizontal image position offset setting command, the control LSI 230 controls the focus mechanism 242 based on the horizontal image position offset value specified by the command. At this time, according to the horizontal image position offset setting command, as shown in FIG. 157, the value of the horizontal image position offset held in the sub CPU 400 (EEPROM 231) is set. Upon receiving the horizontal image position offset setting command, the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits a vertical image position offset setting command to the control LSI 230. Upon receiving the vertical image position offset setting command, the control LSI 230 controls the focus mechanism 242 based on the vertical image position offset value specified by the command. At this time, according to the command for setting the vertical image position offset, as shown in FIG. 157, the value of the vertical image position offset held in the sub CPU 400 (EEPROM 231) is set. Upon receiving the vertical image position offset setting command, the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits a brightness setting command to the control LSI 230. Upon receiving the brightness setting command, the control LSI 230 controls the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B based on the brightness setting value specified by the command. At this time, according to the brightness setting command, as shown in FIG. 157, for example, 50 is designated as the default value of brightness. Upon receiving the brightness setting command, the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits a contrast setting command to the control LSI 230. Upon receiving the contrast setting command, the control LSI 230 controls the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B based on the contrast setting value specified by the command. At this time, according to the contrast setting command, as shown in FIG. 157, for example, 50 is designated as the default value of contrast. Upon receiving the contrast setting command, the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits a gamma setting command to the control LSI 230. In the control LSI 230 that has received the gamma setting command, the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B are controlled based on the gamma setting value specified by the command. At this time, according to the gamma setting command, for example, 1 is designated as the default value of the gamma value as shown in FIG. Upon receiving the gamma setting command, the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits an electric focus position offset setting command to the control LSI 230. Upon receiving the electric focus position offset setting command, the control LSI 230 controls the focus mechanism 242 based on the electric focus position offset value specified by the command. At this time, according to the electric focus position offset setting command, as shown in FIG. 157, the electric focus position offset value held by the sub CPU 400 (EEPROM 231) is set. Upon receiving the electric focus position offset setting command, the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400. Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits a setting completion command to the control LSI 230, and the control LSI 230 that has received the command transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400. Thereby, the communication sequence at the time of starting ends.

  As described above, a communication sequence as shown in FIG. 156 is performed as one set at the time of activation. In some cases, a startup parameter request command is transmitted from the projector apparatus B2 during such a communication sequence. In this case, the sub CPU 400 reads and discards the command. Further, if the reception confirmation command transmitted from the control LSI 230 to the sub CPU 400 does not indicate a correct reception result, the command is retransmitted by retry processing until the correct reception result is displayed, for example, up to 10 times.

  FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a communication sequence in the normal operation between the projector device B2 and the sub CPU 400 according to the nineteenth modification.

  As shown in FIG. 158, during the normal operation of the projector apparatus B2, the control LSI 230 of the projector apparatus B2 transmits a parameter request command to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. Receiving the parameter request command, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request “LED temperature (R)” command (see FIG. 159) to the projector LSI B 2 to the control LSI 230. The control LSI 230 that has received the status request “LED temperature (R)” command uses the temperature detected by the first temperature sensor B25a as the LED temperature (R), and indicates the LED temperature (R) (see FIG. 159). Is transmitted to the sub CPU 400.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request “LED temperature (G)” command (see FIG. 159) to the projector LSI B 2 to the control LSI 230. The control LSI 230 that has received the command of the status request “LED temperature (G)” uses the temperature detected by the second temperature sensor B25b as the LED temperature (G), and indicates the LED temperature (G) (see FIG. 159). Is transmitted to the sub CPU 400.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request “LED temperature (B)” command (see FIG. 159) to the projector LSI B 2 to the control LSI 230. The control LSI 230 that has received the status request “LED temperature (B)” command uses the temperature detected by the second temperature sensor B25b as the LED temperature (B), and indicates the LED temperature (B) (see FIG. 159). Is transmitted to the sub CPU 400.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request “intake FAN temperature” command (see FIG. 159) to the projector device B 2 to the control LSI 230. The control LSI 230 that has received the status request “intake FAN temperature” command uses the temperature detected by the intake air temperature sensor B 26 a of FAN 2 as the intake FAN temperature, and transmits a command (see FIG. 159) indicating the intake FAN temperature to the sub CPU 400. To do.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request “FAN1 rotation speed” command (see FIG. 159) to the projector device B <b> 2 to the control LSI 230. The control LSI 230 that has received the status request “FAN1 rotational speed” command transmits the command (see FIG. 159) indicating the FAN1 rotational speed to the sub CPU 400 using the rotational speed detected by the pulse sensor B27a of the FAN1 as the FAN1 rotational speed. To do.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command (see FIG. 159) of a status request “FAN2 rotational speed” to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230. The control LSI 230 that has received the status request “FAN2 rotational speed” command transmits the command (see FIG. 159) indicating the FAN2 rotational speed to the sub CPU 400 with the rotational speed detected by the pulse sensor B27b of the FAN2 as the FAN2 rotational speed. To do.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request “FAN3 rotation speed” command (see FIG. 159) to the projector device B 2 to the control LSI 230. Receiving the status request “FAN3 rotation speed” command, the control LSI 230 uses the rotation speed detected by the pulse sensor B27c of the FAN3 as the FAN3 rotation speed and transmits a command indicating the FAN3 rotation speed (see FIG. 159) to the sub CPU 400. To do.

  Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request completion command to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230, and the control LSI 230 that has received the command transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400. Thereby, the communication sequence during the normal operation of the projector device B2 is completed.

  As described above, the communication sequence during the normal operation as illustrated in FIG. 158 is performed as one set, for example, every 30 s after the communication sequence at the time of activation ends. In such a communication sequence, in response to a status request command transmitted from the sub CPU 400 to the control LSI 230, if a reception confirmation command that does not indicate a correct reception result is transmitted from the control LSI 230, for example, it is correct up to 10 times. The reception confirmation command is retransmitted by retry processing until the reception result is indicated.

  FIG. 160 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when the screen is switched between the projector device B2 and the sub CPU 400 according to the nineteenth modification. The screen switching here means after the screen to be projected is changed from one screen to another screen.

  As shown in FIG. 160, at the time of screen switching, the control LSI 230 of the projector apparatus B2 transmits a parameter request command to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. Receiving the parameter request command, the sub CPU 400 transmits an electric focus position offset setting command to the control LSI 230. According to the electric focus position offset setting command, as shown in FIG. 161, the electric focus position offset value held by the sub CPU 400 (EEPROM 231) is set as the setting information of the corresponding screen after the change. Thereby, the focus position is offset adjusted with respect to the focus origin of the screen after the change. Upon receiving the electric focus position offset setting command, the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a horizontal image position offset setting command to the control LSI 230. According to the horizontal image position offset setting command, as shown in FIG. 161, the value of the horizontal image position offset held in the sub CPU 400 (EEPROM 231) is set as the setting information of the corresponding screen after the change. . As a result, the horizontal image position is offset adjusted with respect to the changed screen. Upon receiving the horizontal image position offset setting command, the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a vertical image position offset setting command to the control LSI 230. According to the command for setting the vertical image position offset, as shown in FIG. 161, the value of the vertical image position offset held in the sub CPU 400 (EEPROM 231) is set as the setting information of the corresponding screen after the change. . As a result, the vertical image position is offset adjusted with respect to the changed screen. Upon receiving the vertical image position offset setting command, the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400. Although not shown in FIG. 160, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits a setting completion command to the control LSI 230, and the control LSI 230 that has received the command transmits the reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400 again. After that, the parameter request command is retransmitted to the sub CPU 400.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request “drift correction temperature” command (see FIG. 161) to the projector device B 2 to the control LSI 230. Receiving the status request “drift correction temperature” command, the control LSI 230 uses the temperature detected by the temperature sensor B25 as the drift correction temperature and transmits a command (see FIG. 161) indicating the drift correction temperature to the sub CPU 400.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request completion command to the projector apparatus B2 to the control LSI 230, and the control LSI 230 that has received the command transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400. Although not shown in FIG. 160, the control LSI 230 that transmitted the command then transmits a parameter request command (see FIG. 161) to the sub CPU 400 again.

  Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 that has received the parameter request command transmits a command for commanding electric focus drift correction to the control LSI 230. Thereby, in projector apparatus B2, the focus position offset-adjusted with respect to the focus origin is further compensated and adjusted by drift correction based on the drift correction temperature indicated by the aforementioned command. Then, the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits a setting completion command to the control LSI 230, and the control LSI 230 that has received the command confirms the reception confirmation. Is sent to the sub CPU 400. Thereby, the communication sequence at the time of screen switching is completed.

  As described above, the communication sequence at the time of screen switching is performed with a procedure as shown in FIG. 160 as one set when the screen to be projected is changed. In such a communication sequence, when a reception confirmation command that does not indicate a correct reception result is transmitted from the control LSI 230 to the sub CPU 400, for example, a reception confirmation command is performed by retry processing until a correct reception result is indicated up to 10 times. Will be resent.

  According to such a communication sequence, the focus position is offset adjusted each time the screen is switched, and the focus position is adjusted with high accuracy by drift correction according to the temperature. Even if the adjustment is frequently performed, it is possible to suppress the disturbance of the image and the deterioration of the image quality, and it is possible to continuously project the high-quality image while switching the screen.

  Further, since the horizontal and vertical positions of the projected image are adjusted each time the screen is switched, the image is projected from the projector device B2 to the appropriate horizontal and vertical projection positions on each screen. Image correction can be performed both physically and softly.

  Further, the focus position varies depending on the temperature condition of the projector apparatus B2 though offset adjustment is performed. Therefore, a predetermined time for acquiring the temperature from the projector apparatus B2 is required to perform drift correction at the time of screen switching. . That is, depending on the predetermined time, it is also assumed that the screen is switched while the temperature is acquired from the projector device B2. On the other hand, according to the communication sequence at the time of the screen switching described above, the offset adjustment of the horizontal image position and the vertical image position is performed after adjusting the offset of the focus position, and then the focus position is readjusted by drift correction. Since drift correction is finally performed by following a step-by-step procedure, it is possible to suppress image disturbance with high accuracy even by frequently performing screen switching operations. High quality images can be projected continuously.

  FIG. 162 shows main control main processing executed in the main control board of the pachinko machine according to the twentieth modification.

  In the pachinko machine, when the power is turned on, first, the main CPU of the main control board performs an initial setting process (S1231). In this processing, the main CPU performs processing such as access permission to the main RAM, restoration of backup, and initialization of the work area, for example. Next, the main CPU performs an initial value random number update process (S1232). In this process, the main CPU updates the initial random number counter value.

  Next, the main CPU performs a special symbol control process (S1233). In this process, the main CPU performs a predetermined control process relating to the progress of the special symbol game and the first special symbol and the second special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device.

  Next, the main CPU performs normal symbol control processing (S1234). In this process, the main CPU performs a predetermined control process related to the progress of the normal symbol game and the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display device.

  Next, the main CPU performs control processing of the symbol display device (S1235). In this process, the main CPU performs display control of variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol based on the execution result of the special symbol control process and the normal symbol control process.

  Next, the main CPU performs game information data generation processing (S1236). In this process, the main CPU generates game information data to be transmitted to a hall computer or the like of the game store, and stores the game information data in the main RAM.

  Next, the main CPU performs a storage / game state data generation process (S1237). In this process, the main CPU generates storage / game state data to be transmitted to the sub-control board of the pachinko machine based on the value of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag, and stores the storage / game state data in the main RAM. To do. Thereafter, the main CPU returns to the processing of S1232, and repeats the processing after S1232 described above.

  FIG. 163 shows a system timer interrupt process executed on the main control board of the pachinko machine according to the twentieth modification.

  In the pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU interrupts the main process at a predetermined cycle and executes the system timer interrupt process even during execution of the main process. Specifically, the main CPU executes a system timer interrupt process as shown in FIG. 157 according to a clock pulse generated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 ms) from the reset clock pulse generation circuit.

  As shown in FIG. 157, the main CPU saves the data (information) of each register (S1241). Next, the main CPU performs a random number update process (S1242). In this process, the main CPU updates various random numbers extracted from the big hit determination counter, the symbol determination counter, the hit determination counter, the fall determination counter, the variation pattern determination counter, the effect pattern determination counter, and the like. .

  Note that the jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter lack fairness if the update timing of the counter value is indefinite. Therefore, the jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter are updated at a periodic timing such as 2 ms in order to ensure fairness.

  Next, the main CPU performs a switch input detection process (S1243). In this process, the main CPU detects winnings or passing through various starting ports, various winning ports, and a ball passage detector.

  Next, the main CPU performs timer update processing (S1244). Specifically, the main CPU has various timers such as a waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control board and the sub control board, and a grand prize opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the big prize opening. Perform update processing.

Next, the main CPU performs command output processing (S1245). In this process, the main CPU transmits various commands such as a winning command, a variation command, a demo command, and the like to the sub CPU of the sub control board. For example, a demo command is transmitted when a predetermined time elapses without a game ball being fired after the end of a special symbol change.
(For example, it is transmitted when a state in which no game is played continues for 3 minutes or more.

  Next, the main CPU performs game information output processing (S1246). In this process, the main CPU outputs various information related to the game processed by the main control board, the sub control board, the payout / launch control circuit, etc., to the hall computer of the game store.

  Next, the main CPU restores the data of each register saved in S1241 (S1247). Thereafter, the main CPU ends the system timer interrupt process.

  Even in such a pachinko machine, by installing the projector device B2 and the like, the same effect as the above-described pachislot machine can be exhibited.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment. In the above embodiment, a pachislot machine or a pachinko machine has been described as a representative example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The various techniques of the present invention described above can be applied to other gaming machines, for example, can be applied to enclosed gaming machines. In addition to the gaming machines listed above, general-purpose technology can be applied to various gaming machines such as gaming machines and slot machines.

  The numerical values, information, components, and the like shown in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it goes without saying that they can be changed as appropriate within the scope of the present invention. For example, values and numbers may include 0, and may include negative and positive values.

  For example, in the present embodiment, various conditions include the number of counts and the number of executions, and there are processes for determining the number of executions and the execution time (execution period) that is the period in which they are executed. Is not to be done. For example, when it is a condition that it is executed three times or more, it may be a condition that it is executed once or more or 0 times or more depending on the initial value. This is because, as a predetermined condition, the number of executions is set to 3 times or more. When determining whether or not the execution is executed 3 or more times, from a software viewpoint, whether or not the execution is basically executed is determined. Since it is only necessary to be able to determine, the condition is to determine whether it is 1 or 0 on the information theory (code theory). On the other hand, the same applies to the determination of whether or not it is executed, and it is determined whether it is 0 or 1 in terms of information theory (coding theory).

  In other words, determining the presence or absence of execution is synonymous with determining whether the binary value corresponding to the execution unit is 1 or 0, which sets the flag to “ON” when executed, Even if it is determined whether or not it is “ON”, as a result, whether or not there is a signal input for setting the flag to “ON” (whether or not the signal is received once or plural times, input It is equivalent to determining whether or not there has been output or not. Therefore, even if the presence or absence of a flag is determined, the number of executions itself is not counted, but is synonymous with determining the number of executions (count count, count result, interrupt count, etc.) as a unit. The determination of the flag and the determination of the number of times can be executed by essentially the same comparison calculation process.

  The same applies to determination of time. For example, determination of execution time is synonymous with determination of whether the binary value corresponding to execution time is 1 or 0. Can be executed by a simple comparison operation. However, when the determination is performed using a flag or a variable, it may be determined as being present when the value is 0 by negative logic, and may be determined as absent when the value is 1.

  Further, when the gaming machine is activated, for example, the pack light may be turned off until communication is established so that an afterimage phenomenon does not occur in the sub liquid crystal display device.

  Further, since the movable screen is not returned to the standby position at the time of error notification, an error notification image may be projected according to the screen to be projected at that time.

  Further, the projector device of the present embodiment is configured to be able to perform projection on a plurality of screens, but is not limited to this, and the projector device may be one screen or a plurality of screens. What is necessary is just to be able to project on any screen. The projection target is not limited to the screen, but, for example, an accessory, a board, a front panel, an outer frame, a main body frame, a cabinet, an upper plate, a lower plate, a player, a ceiling above the gaming machine, and a passage from the gaming machine Various projection forms such as an upward projection are conceivable. In addition, as a projection method, for example, various methods such as a so-called rear projection evening, a front projection evening, a rear projector that reflects projection light, a front projector that reflects projection light, and the like can be applied. It is also possible to combine these different methods.

  In addition, the intake fan and the exhaust fan in the present embodiment are ventilation means that can ventilate the inside of the projector device by rotating those components. In other words, the ventilation means includes intake means or exhaust means, and control (shutdown, warning conditions, etc.) for the intake means in this embodiment can also be applied to the exhaust means. The control can also be applied to the intake means.

  Based on the above embodiment, the outline | summary of this invention is enumerated as an additional remark below.

(About Appendix A)
Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays video for a game or the like (for example, JP-A-6-35066 and JP-A-2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

  However, in the above conventional gaming machine, for example, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector body as the operating time becomes longer, so that the optical component or the substrate provided in the projector body causes a problem due to heat, and the plastic lens In some cases, thermal deformation may occur and the image may become unclear or image noise may occur. Due to such a malfunction of the projection apparatus, there is a possibility that an image projected with the game may be uncomfortable.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can avoid a malfunction of the projection device and eliminate the discomfort of the image.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix A1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1 or the like) provided with a projection apparatus (for example, projector apparatus B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image and a control means (for example, a sub-control board SS or the like) that performs control related to effects. ,
The projector is
Ventilation means for performing ventilation (for example, an intake fan 244B (FAN2));
Ventilation temperature detection means (for example, intake air temperature sensor B26a etc.) for detecting the temperature in the vicinity of the ventilation means;
When the temperature detected by the ventilation temperature detection means is equal to or higher than a predetermined temperature, transmission means (for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) that transmits error information that is information indicating abnormality to the control means; With
When the control means receives the error information, it performs a response to the error information to the projection device,
The projection apparatus further includes an operation stop unit (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) that stops an operation during operation when receiving a response to the error information.

  According to such a configuration, for example, when the temperature in the vicinity of the ventilation unit of the projection apparatus rises as the operating time becomes longer, the error information indicating an abnormality is transmitted to the control unit when the temperature exceeds a predetermined temperature. Since the operation in operation is forcibly stopped according to the response from the control means, it is possible to avoid a malfunction due to heat accumulation in the projection apparatus and to eliminate the discomfort of the image over a long period of time.

(Appendix A2)
As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The operation stopping means is characterized in that, after the transmission means transmits the error information, when a predetermined time has passed without a response to the error information from the control means, the operation being stopped is stopped.

  According to such a configuration, even if there is no response from the control means to the error information when the temperature is higher than the predetermined temperature, the operation during operation is automatically stopped after a predetermined time, so that the heat accumulation of the projection apparatus It is possible to reliably avoid malfunctions due to.

(About Appendix B)
Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays video for a game or the like (for example, JP-A-6-35066 and JP-A-2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

  However, in the above conventional gaming machine, for example, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector body as the operating time becomes longer, so that the optical component or the substrate provided in the projector body causes a problem due to heat, and the plastic lens In some cases, thermal deformation may occur and the image may become unclear or image noise may occur. Due to such a malfunction of the projection apparatus, there is a possibility that an image projected with the game may be uncomfortable.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of avoiding an unpleasantness of an image by appropriately avoiding a malfunction of a projection apparatus after being determined in advance. And

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix B1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1 or the like) provided with a projection device (for example, projector apparatus B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image,
The projector is
Optical means for projecting an image (for example, LED light sources 240R, 240B, 240G, DMD241, etc.);
Internal temperature detecting means (for example, temperature sensor B25) for detecting the temperature in the vicinity of the optical means;
Ventilation means for performing ventilation (for example, an intake fan 244B (FAN2));
Ventilation temperature detection means (for example, intake air temperature sensor B26a etc.) for detecting the temperature in the vicinity of the ventilation means;
An abnormality determination means (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) for determining that the abnormality is detected when the temperature detected by the internal temperature detection means is equal to or higher than the first temperature;
When the temperature detected by the internal temperature detection means becomes a second temperature higher than the first temperature or when the temperature detected by the ventilation temperature detection means becomes a third temperature or higher Operation stop means (for example, control LSI 230 of projector control board B23) for stopping the operation of
The second temperature is set higher than the third temperature.

  According to such a configuration, for example, the temperature near the optical means rises as the operating time becomes longer, so that it is determined as abnormal when the temperature exceeds the first temperature, and further, the temperature near the optical means rises and exceeds the second temperature. Or when the temperature in the vicinity of the ventilation means becomes a third temperature that is lower than the second temperature or higher, the operation in operation is stopped. , The discomfort of the video over a long time can be resolved.

(About Appendix C)
Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays video for a game or the like (for example, JP-A-6-35066 and JP-A-2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

  However, in the above conventional gaming machine, for example, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector body as the operating time becomes longer, so that the optical component or the substrate provided in the projector body causes a problem due to heat, and the plastic lens In some cases, thermal deformation may occur and the image may become unclear or image noise may occur. Due to such a malfunction of the projection apparatus, there is a possibility that an image projected with the game may be uncomfortable.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of avoiding an unpleasantness of an image by appropriately avoiding a malfunction of a projection apparatus after being determined in advance. And

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix C1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1 or the like) provided with a projection device (for example, projector apparatus B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image,
The projector is
A first optical means (for example, LED light source 240R) for projecting an image and a second optical means (for example, LED light sources 240B, 240G);
First internal temperature detection means (for example, first temperature sensor B25a) for detecting the temperature of the first optical means;
Second internal temperature detection means (for example, second temperature sensor B25b) for detecting the temperature of the second optical means;
Ventilation means for performing ventilation (for example, an intake fan 244B (FAN2));
Ventilation temperature detection means (for example, intake air temperature sensor B26a etc.) for detecting the temperature in the vicinity of the ventilation means;
If the temperature detected by the first internal temperature detecting means is equal to or higher than the first temperature, or if the temperature detected by the second internal temperature detecting means is equal to or higher than the second temperature, it is abnormal. Abnormality determining means for determining that there is (for example, control LSI 230 of projector control board B23),
When the temperature detected by the first internal temperature detection means is equal to or higher than a third temperature higher than the first temperature, or the temperature detected by the second internal temperature detection means is higher than the second temperature. When the temperature is higher than the fourth temperature, or when the temperature detected by the ventilation temperature detection means is the fifth temperature or higher, the operation stop means (for example, the projector control board B23) is stopped. Control LSI 230, etc.)
The first temperature is set higher than the fifth temperature, and the second temperature is set higher than the first temperature.

  According to such a configuration, for example, heat accumulation occurs in the projection apparatus as the operation time becomes longer, so that the temperature near the first optical means is equal to or higher than the first temperature, or the temperature near the second optical means is increased. When the temperature is equal to or higher than the second temperature, which is higher than the first temperature, it is determined that there is an abnormality. Further, the temperature near the first optical means rises and exceeds the third temperature, or the temperature near the second optical means rises to the fourth. If the temperature exceeds the temperature, or the temperature in the vicinity of the ventilation means exceeds the fifth temperature, which is lower than the first temperature, the operation during operation is stopped. It can be avoided as appropriate, and the discomfort of the video over a long time can be resolved.

(About Appendix D)
Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays video for a game or the like (for example, JP-A-6-35066 and JP-A-2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

  However, in the above conventional gaming machine, for example, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector body as the operating time becomes longer, so that the optical component or the substrate provided in the projector body causes a problem due to heat, and the plastic lens In some cases, thermal deformation may occur and the image may become unclear or image noise may occur. Due to such a malfunction of the projection apparatus, there is a possibility that an image projected with the game may be uncomfortable.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and provides a gaming machine capable of avoiding the discomfort of an image by appropriately avoiding the malfunction of the projection apparatus after being informed beforehand. Objective.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix D1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
Projection device capable of projecting an image (for example, projector device B2), display means capable of displaying information (for example, sub liquid crystal display device DD19), and control means (for example, sub control board SS) for performing control related to effects. Etc.) (for example, gaming machine 1 etc.)
The projector is
Optical means for projecting an image (for example, LED light sources 240R, 240B, 240G, DMD241, etc.);
Internal temperature detecting means (for example, temperature sensor B25) for detecting the temperature in the vicinity of the optical means;
Ventilation means for performing ventilation (for example, an intake fan 244B (FAN2));
Ventilation temperature detection means (for example, intake air temperature sensor B26a etc.) for detecting the temperature in the vicinity of the ventilation means;
First abnormality determination means (for example, control LSI 230 of projector control board B23) that determines that the first abnormality is detected when the temperature detected by the internal temperature detection means is equal to or higher than the first temperature;
When the temperature detected by the internal temperature detection means is equal to or higher than the second temperature higher than the first temperature, or the temperature detected by the ventilation temperature detection means is equal to or higher than a third temperature different from the second temperature. The second abnormality determining means (for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) that determines that the second abnormality is present,
With
The control means includes
In response to the first abnormality, the projection device projects first information, and the display means displays the first information,
In response to the second abnormality, the display means displays second information different from the first information, and responds to the projection device,
The projection apparatus further includes operation stop means (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) for stopping an operation during operation when receiving the response from the control means.

  According to such a configuration, for example, as the operating time becomes longer, a heat accumulation occurs in the projection device, so that when the temperature in the vicinity of the optical means becomes equal to or higher than the first temperature, an image related to the first information is projected and displayed. In addition, an image related to the first information is separately displayed, and when the temperature near the optical means rises to become the second temperature or higher, or when the temperature near the ventilation means becomes the third temperature or higher, the second is changed accordingly. An image relating to the above information is displayed, and an operation in operation is forcibly stopped by a response from the control means. Accordingly, it is possible to appropriately avoid a malfunction caused by a heat accumulation in the projection apparatus in advance using the first information and the subsequent second information, and to eliminate the discomfort of the image over a long period of time. it can.

(About Appendix E)
Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays video for a game or the like (for example, JP-A-6-35066 and JP-A-2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

  However, in the above conventional gaming machine, for example, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector body as the operating time becomes longer, so that the optical component or the substrate provided in the projector body causes a problem due to heat, and the plastic lens In some cases, thermal deformation may occur and the image may become unclear or image noise may occur. Due to such a malfunction of the projection apparatus, there is a possibility that an image projected with the game may be uncomfortable.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of avoiding an unpleasantness of an image by appropriately avoiding a malfunction of a projection apparatus after being determined in advance. And

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix E1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1 or the like) provided with a projection device (for example, projector apparatus B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image,
The projector is
Optical means for projecting an image (for example, LED light sources 240R, 240B, 240G, DMD241, etc.);
Internal temperature detecting means (for example, temperature sensor B25) for detecting the temperature in the vicinity of the optical means;
An intake means for performing intake (for example, an intake fan 244B (FAN2));
Exhaust means (for example, an exhaust fan 245 (FAN3)) for exhausting;
Intake air temperature detection means (for example, intake air temperature sensor B26a) for detecting the temperature in the vicinity of the intake air means;
Exhaust temperature detecting means for detecting the temperature in the vicinity of the exhaust means (for example, an exhaust temperature sensor B26b);
When the temperature detected by the internal temperature detecting means becomes equal to or higher than the first temperature, or when the temperature detected by the exhaust temperature detecting means becomes equal to or higher than the second temperature, an abnormality determining means (determined as abnormal) For example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23),
When the temperature detected by the internal temperature detection means becomes a third temperature higher than the first temperature or when the temperature detected by the intake air temperature detection means becomes a fourth temperature or higher Operation stop means (for example, control LSI 230 of projector control board B23) for stopping the operation of
The second temperature is set higher than the fourth temperature, and the first temperature is set higher than the second temperature.

  According to such a configuration, for example, heat accumulation occurs in the projection apparatus as the operation time becomes longer, so that the temperature near the optical means is equal to or higher than the first temperature, or the temperature near the exhaust means is lower than the first temperature. When the temperature exceeds 2 temperatures, it is determined that there is an abnormality, and when the temperature near the optical means rises to a third temperature or higher, or when the temperature near the intake means reaches a fourth temperature that is lower than the second temperature, Since the operation is automatically stopped, it is possible to appropriately avoid the malfunction caused by the heat accumulation of the projection apparatus in advance and to avoid the discomfort of the image over a long time.

(About Appendix F)
Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays video for a game or the like (for example, JP-A-6-35066 and JP-A-2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

  However, in the above conventional gaming machine, for example, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector body as the operating time becomes longer, so that the optical component or the substrate provided in the projector body causes a problem due to heat, and the plastic lens In some cases, thermal deformation may occur and the image may become unclear or image noise may occur. Due to such a malfunction of the projection apparatus, there is a possibility that an image projected with the game may be uncomfortable.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately avoid the malfunction of the projection apparatus depending on the situation and eliminate the discomfort of the video. .

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix F1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1 or the like) provided with a projection device (for example, projector apparatus B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image,
The projector is
An exhaust fan (eg, exhaust fan 245 (FAN3));
A first intake fan (eg, intake fan 244A (FAN1));
A second intake fan (for example, intake fan 244B (FAN2)) different from the first intake fan;
Temperature detecting means for detecting the temperature at a predetermined location (for example, intake air temperature sensor B26a);
An exhaust speed detecting means (for example, a pulse sensor B27c) for detecting the speed of the exhaust fan;
First intake speed detection means (for example, pulse sensor B27a) for detecting the speed of the first intake fan;
Second intake speed detection means (for example, pulse sensor B27b) for detecting the speed of the second intake fan;
Operation stop means (for example, control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) that stops the operation during operation when the temperature detected by the temperature detection means is equal to or higher than the first temperature;
The operation stop means is
When the temperature detected by the temperature detector is equal to or lower than a second temperature lower than the first temperature, the engine is operating when the engine speed detected by the exhaust engine speed detector is less than the first engine speed. When the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is higher than the second temperature, the second rotational speed in which the rotational speed detected by the exhaust rotational speed detecting means is higher than the first rotational speed. If it becomes less than, stop the operation in operation,
In the case where the temperature detected by the temperature detection means is equal to or lower than the second temperature, the rotation speed detected by the first intake rotation speed detection means is less than the second rotation speed, Thirdly, when the temperature detected by the temperature detection means is higher than the second temperature, the rotation speed detected by the first intake rotation speed detection means is higher than the second rotation speed. If it is less than the number of revolutions, stop the running operation,
Regardless of the temperature detected by the temperature detection means, when the rotation speed detected by the second intake rotation speed detection means is less than the second rotation speed, the operation during operation is stopped. And

  According to such a configuration, for example, heat accumulation occurs in the projection apparatus as the operation time becomes longer. When the temperature in the vicinity of the predetermined location becomes equal to or higher than the first temperature, the operation in operation is stopped while the first operation is stopped. Even if the temperature is less than the temperature, the operation during operation is stopped according to the rotational speed of the exhaust fan or the first intake fan based on the second temperature, and if the temperature is less than the first temperature, the second intake fan regardless of the temperature. The operation during operation is stopped according to the number of rotations of the projector, so malfunctions due to heat accumulation in the projection device can be avoided appropriately according to the temperature and the number of rotations of the fan, eliminating the discomfort of images that last for a long time. can do.

(About Appendix G)
Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays video for a game or the like (for example, JP-A-6-35066 and JP-A-2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

  However, in the above conventional gaming machine, for example, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector body as the operating time becomes longer, so that the optical component or the substrate provided in the projector body causes a problem due to heat, and the plastic lens In some cases, thermal deformation may occur and the image may become unclear or image noise may occur. Due to such a malfunction of the projection apparatus, there is a possibility that an image projected with the game may be uncomfortable.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately avoid the malfunction of the projection apparatus depending on the situation and eliminate the discomfort of the video. .

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix G1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1 or the like) provided with a projection device (for example, projector apparatus B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image,
The projector is
A first ventilation fan that performs ventilation (for example, an exhaust fan 245 (FAN3));
Unlike the first ventilation fan, a second ventilation fan that ventilates (for example, an intake fan 244B (FAN2);
Ventilation temperature detection means (for example, intake air temperature sensor B26a) for detecting the temperature in the vicinity of the second ventilation fan;
First rotational speed detection means (for example, pulse sensor B27c) for detecting the rotational speed of the first ventilation fan;
Second rotational speed detection means (for example, pulse sensor B27b) for detecting the rotational speed of the second ventilation fan;
Operation stopping means (for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) for stopping the operation in operation,
The operation stop means is
In the case where the temperature detected by the ventilation temperature detecting means is equal to or lower than the first temperature, when the rotational speed detected by the first rotational speed detecting means is less than the first rotational speed, the operation in operation is performed. When the temperature detected by the ventilation temperature detecting means is higher than the first temperature, the second rotational speed in which the rotational speed detected by the first rotational speed detecting means is higher than the first rotational speed. If it becomes less than, stop the operation in operation,
Regardless of the temperature detected by the ventilation temperature detecting means, when the rotational speed detected by the second rotational speed detecting means is less than the second rotational speed, the operation in operation is stopped. And

  According to such a configuration, for example, heat accumulation occurs in the projection device as the operation time becomes longer, so that the projector is operating according to the temperature in the vicinity of the second ventilation fan and the rotation speed of the first ventilation fan. While the operation is stopped, the operation in operation is stopped according to the rotation speed of the second ventilation fan regardless of the detected temperature. It is possible to avoid the discomfort of the video over a long time by appropriately avoiding according to the number.

(About Appendix H)
Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays video for a game or the like (for example, JP-A-6-35066 and JP-A-2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

  However, in the above conventional gaming machine, for example, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector body as the operating time becomes longer, so that the optical component or the substrate provided in the projector body causes a problem due to heat, and the plastic lens In some cases, thermal deformation may occur and the image may become unclear or image noise may occur. Due to such a malfunction of the projection apparatus, there is a possibility that an image projected with the game may be uncomfortable.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately avoid the malfunction of the projection apparatus depending on the situation and eliminate the discomfort of the video. .

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix H1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1 or the like) provided with a projection device (for example, projector apparatus B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image,
The projector is
A first ventilation fan that performs ventilation (for example, an exhaust fan 245 (FAN3));
A second ventilation fan (for example, an intake fan 244A (FAN1)) that ventilates unlike the first ventilation fan;
Temperature detecting means for detecting the temperature at a predetermined location (for example, intake air temperature sensor B26a);
First rotational speed detection means (for example, pulse sensor B27c) for detecting the rotational speed of the first ventilation fan;
Second rotational speed detection means (for example, pulse sensor B27a) for detecting the rotational speed of the second ventilation fan;
Operation stopping means (for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) for stopping the operation in operation,
The operation stop means is
In the case where the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is equal to or lower than the first temperature, if the rotational speed detected by the first rotational speed detecting means is less than the first rotational speed, the operation in operation is stopped. And when the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is higher than the first temperature, the rotational speed detected by the first rotational speed detecting means is less than the second rotational speed higher than the first rotational speed. If this happens, stop the running operation,
When the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is equal to or lower than the first temperature, and the rotational speed detected by the second rotational speed detecting means is less than the second rotational speed, the operation in operation And when the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is higher than the first temperature, the third rotational speed in which the rotational speed detected by the second rotational speed detecting means is higher than the second rotational speed. When it becomes less than, the operation in operation is stopped.

  According to such a configuration, for example, heat accumulation occurs in the projection apparatus as the operation time becomes longer, so that the operation is performed according to the detected temperature and the rotation speeds of the first ventilation fan and the second ventilation fan. Since the operation of the projector is stopped, malfunction due to heat accumulation in the projection apparatus can be appropriately avoided according to the temperature and the rotation speed of the fan, and the discomfort of the image over a long time can be eliminated.

(Appendix I)
Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays video for a game or the like (for example, JP-A-6-35066 and JP-A-2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

  However, in the above conventional gaming machine, for example, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector body as the operating time becomes longer, so that the optical component or the substrate provided in the projector body causes a problem due to heat, and the plastic lens In some cases, thermal deformation may occur and the image may become unclear or image noise may occur. Due to such a malfunction of the projection apparatus, there is a possibility that an image projected with the game may be uncomfortable.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of resolving a malfunction of a projection apparatus and reliably avoiding the discomfort of an image. And

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix I1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1 or the like) provided with a projection apparatus (for example, projector apparatus B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image and a control means (for example, a sub-control board SS or the like) that performs control related to effects. ,
The projector is
Optical means for projecting an image (for example, LED light sources 240R, 240B, 240G, DMD241, etc.);
Ventilation means for performing ventilation (for example, an intake fan 244B (FAN2));
Optical anomaly detecting means for detecting an anomaly of the optical means (for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23);
A ventilation abnormality detection means (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) for detecting abnormality of the ventilation means;
Power supply abnormality detection means (for example, control LSI 230 of projector control board B23) for detecting abnormality related to power supply;
Initialization means (for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) that performs initialization at startup;
Abnormality processing means (for example, control LSI 230 of projector control board B23) for performing abnormality processing using a watchdog timer;
With
If an abnormality is detected by at least one of the optical abnormality detection means, the ventilation abnormality detection means, and the power supply abnormality detection means, information related to the abnormality before the processing corresponding to the abnormality is performed. Send
Information relating to abnormality to the control means in the initialization process executed by the initialization means after the abnormality processing means is executed by the abnormality processing means or after execution of the initialization processing Is transmitted.

  According to such a configuration, for example, when an abnormality occurs in the optical means, the ventilation means, or the power source of the projection apparatus, information related to the abnormality is transmitted to the control means, and processing corresponding to the abnormality is performed. On the other hand, when an abnormality process is performed using a watchdog timer, information on the abnormality is transmitted to the control means after the projection apparatus is initialized, so that the malfunction of the projection apparatus is surely notified. Can avoid the discomfort of the video over a long time.

(About Appendix J)
Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays video for a game or the like (for example, JP-A-6-35066 and JP-A-2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

  However, in the above conventional gaming machine, for example, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector body as the operating time becomes longer, so that the optical component or the substrate provided in the projector body causes a problem due to heat, and the plastic lens In some cases, thermal deformation may occur and the image may become unclear or image noise may occur. Due to such a malfunction of the projection apparatus, there is a possibility that an image projected with the game may be uncomfortable.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and provides a gaming machine capable of resolving the malfunction of the projection apparatus reliably and promptly and avoiding the discomfort of the image. With the goal.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix J1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
Projection device capable of projecting an image (for example, projector device B2), display means capable of displaying information (for example, sub liquid crystal display device DD19), and control means (for example, sub control board SS) for performing control related to effects. Etc.) (for example, gaming machine 1 etc.)
The projector is
Optical means for projecting an image (for example, LED light sources 240R, 240B, 240G, DMD241, etc.);
Ventilation means for performing ventilation (for example, an intake fan 244B (FAN2));
Optical anomaly detecting means for detecting an anomaly of the optical means (for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23);
A ventilation abnormality detection means (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) for detecting abnormality of the ventilation means;
Power supply abnormality detection means (for example, control LSI 230 of projector control board B23) for detecting abnormality related to power supply;
Initialization means (for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) that performs initialization at startup;
Abnormality processing means (for example, control LSI 230 of projector control board B23) for performing abnormality processing using a watchdog timer;
Transmitting means for transmitting information to the control means at predetermined time intervals (for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23);
With
The transmission means includes
If an abnormality is detected by at least one of the optical abnormality detection means, the ventilation abnormality detection means, and the power supply abnormality detection means, information related to the abnormality before the processing corresponding to the abnormality is performed. Send
Information relating to abnormality to the control means in the initialization process executed by the initialization means after the abnormality processing means is executed by the abnormality processing means or after execution of the initialization processing Send
The control means causes the display means to display information indicating abnormality when no information is received from the projection apparatus for a time longer than the predetermined time interval.

  According to such a configuration, for example, when an abnormality occurs in the optical means, the ventilation means, or the power source of the projection apparatus, information related to the abnormality is transmitted to the control means, and processing corresponding to the abnormality is performed. On the other hand, when an abnormality process is performed using a watchdog timer, information regarding the abnormality is transmitted to the control means after the projection apparatus is initialized, and projection is performed even if a time longer than a predetermined time interval elapses. If no information is received from the apparatus, information indicating an abnormality of the projection apparatus is displayed on the display means. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably and promptly notify the malfunction of the projection apparatus, and to avoid the discomfort of the video over a long time.

(About Appendix K)
Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays video for a game or the like (for example, JP-A-6-35066 and JP-A-2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

  However, in the above conventional gaming machine, for example, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector body as the operating time becomes longer, so that the optical component or the substrate provided in the projector body causes a problem due to heat, and the plastic lens Due to thermal deformation, the image may become unclear or the focus may be shifted due to focus adjustment. That is, as the temperature change of the projector increases, the image quality of the projected image tends to gradually deteriorate with the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can suppress image quality deterioration due to a temperature change of a projection apparatus and eliminate image discomfort.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix K1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1 or the like) provided with a projection device (for example, projector apparatus B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image,
The projector is
A focus mechanism for projecting an image (for example, the focus mechanism 242 of the projection lens 210);
Temperature detection means (for example, temperature sensor B25 etc.) for detecting the temperature near the predetermined location;
Focus control means for controlling the focus mechanism in accordance with the temperature detected by the temperature detection means (for example, control LSI 230 of projector control board B23, sub CPU 400 of sub control board SS, etc.),
The focus control means controls the focus mechanism according to the temperature detected by the temperature detection means after temporarily returning the focus mechanism to a predetermined reference state when a predetermined condition is satisfied. .

  According to such a configuration, the focus mechanism is controlled by, for example, drift correction even by a change in temperature of the projection apparatus, and the drift mechanism that accumulates for each drift correction also satisfies the predetermined reference condition when the focus mechanism satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, the image quality deterioration of the image projected through the focus mechanism can be effectively suppressed, and the discomfort of the image can be eliminated.

(Appendix L)
Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays video for a game or the like (for example, JP-A-6-35066 and JP-A-2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

  However, in the above conventional gaming machine, for example, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector body as the operating time becomes longer, so that the optical component or the substrate provided in the projector body causes a problem due to heat, and the plastic lens Due to thermal deformation, the image may become unclear or the focus may be shifted due to focus adjustment. That is, as the temperature change of the projector increases, the image quality of the projected image tends to gradually deteriorate with the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can suppress image quality deterioration due to a temperature change of a projection apparatus and eliminate image discomfort.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix L1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1 or the like) provided with a projection device (for example, projector apparatus B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image,
The projector is
A focus mechanism for projecting an image (for example, the focus mechanism 242 of the projection lens 210);
Temperature detection means (for example, temperature sensor B25 etc.) for detecting the temperature near the predetermined location;
Focus control means for controlling the focus mechanism in accordance with the temperature detected by the temperature detection means (for example, control LSI 230 of projector control board B23, sub CPU 400 of sub control board SS, etc.),
When the number of times the focus mechanism is controlled reaches a predetermined number, the focus control unit temporarily returns the focus mechanism to a predetermined reference state, and then adjusts the focus mechanism according to the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit. Control is performed.

  According to such a configuration, the focus mechanism is controlled by drift correction, for example, even by a change in temperature of the projection apparatus, and the drift error accumulated for each drift correction is also reduced when the number of times the focus mechanism is controlled reaches a predetermined number. Is removed by returning to the predetermined reference state, image quality deterioration of the image projected through the focus mechanism can be effectively suppressed, and discomfort of the image can be eliminated.

(About Appendix M)
Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays video for a game or the like (for example, JP-A-6-35066 and JP-A-2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

  However, in the above conventional gaming machine, for example, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector body as the operating time becomes longer, so that the optical component or the substrate provided in the projector body causes a problem due to heat, and the plastic lens Due to thermal deformation, the image may become unclear or the focus may be shifted due to focus adjustment. That is, as the temperature change of the projector increases, the image quality of the projected image tends to gradually deteriorate with the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can suppress image quality deterioration due to a temperature change of a projection apparatus and eliminate image discomfort.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix M1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1 or the like) provided with a projection device (for example, projector apparatus B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image,
The projector is
A focus mechanism for projecting an image (for example, the focus mechanism 242 of the projection lens 210);
Temperature detection means (for example, temperature sensor B25 etc.) for detecting the temperature near the predetermined location;
Focus control means for controlling the focus mechanism in accordance with the temperature detected by the temperature detection means (for example, control LSI 230 of projector control board B23, sub CPU 400 of sub control board SS, etc.),
The focus control unit performs control to temporarily return the focus mechanism to a predetermined reference state when a predetermined image is projected from the projection device, thereby reducing the visibility of the predetermined image. 1 state, and then the focus mechanism is controlled in accordance with the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means, so that the visibility of the predetermined image is at least a second state higher than the first state. It is characterized by.

  According to such a configuration, the focus mechanism is controlled by drift correction, for example, even by a change in temperature of the projection device, and the drift error accumulated for each drift correction is also detected by the focus mechanism during a predetermined image projection. Therefore, the image quality deterioration of the image projected through the focus mechanism can be effectively suppressed, and the discomfort of the image can be eliminated. In addition, the predetermined image relatively changes from the first state in which the focus is initially shifted and the visibility is lowered to the second state in which the focus is gradually focused and the visibility is improved. It is possible to provide a state where the visibility changes as a video content for production.

(About Appendix N)
Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays video for a game or the like (for example, JP-A-6-35066 and JP-A-2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

  However, in the above conventional gaming machine, for example, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector body as the operating time becomes longer, so that the optical component or the substrate provided in the projector body causes a problem due to heat, and the plastic lens Due to thermal deformation, the image may become unclear or the focus may be shifted due to focus adjustment. That is, as the temperature change of the projector increases, the image quality of the projected image tends to gradually deteriorate with the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can suppress image quality deterioration due to a temperature change of a projection apparatus and eliminate image discomfort.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix N1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A gaming machine provided with a projection device (for example, projector device B2 etc.) capable of projecting video and identification information display means (for example, reels RL, RC, RR, main display window DD4 etc.) capable of variably displaying identification information (For example, gaming machine 1 etc.)
The projector is
A focus mechanism for projecting an image (for example, the focus mechanism 242 of the projection lens 210);
Temperature detection means (for example, temperature sensor B25 etc.) for detecting the temperature near the predetermined location;
Focus control means for controlling the focus mechanism in accordance with the temperature detected by the temperature detection means (for example, control LSI 230 of projector control board B23, sub CPU 400 of sub control board SS, etc.),
When the number of times the identification information is variably displayed by the identification information display unit reaches a predetermined number, the focus control unit returns the focus position of the focus mechanism to a predetermined reference position and then detects the temperature by the temperature detection unit. The focus mechanism is controlled according to the measured temperature.

  According to such a configuration, the focus mechanism is controlled by, for example, drift correction even by a change in temperature of the projection apparatus, and the drift error accumulated for each drift correction is also focused when the number of fluctuations in the identification information reaches a predetermined number. Since the position is removed by returning to the predetermined reference position, it is possible to effectively suppress the deterioration of the image quality of the image projected through the focus mechanism, and to eliminate the discomfort of the image.

(About Appendix O)
Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays video for a game or the like (for example, JP-A-6-35066 and JP-A-2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

  However, in the above conventional gaming machine, for example, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector body as the operating time becomes longer, so that the optical component or the substrate provided in the projector body causes a problem due to heat, and the plastic lens Due to thermal deformation, the image may become unclear or the focus may be shifted due to focus adjustment. That is, as the temperature change of the projector increases, the image quality of the projected image tends to gradually deteriorate with the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can suppress image quality deterioration due to a temperature change of a projection apparatus and eliminate image discomfort.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix O1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1 or the like) provided with a projection device (for example, projector apparatus B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image,
The projector is
A focus mechanism for projecting an image (for example, the focus mechanism 242 of the projection lens 210);
Temperature detection means (for example, temperature sensor B25 etc.) for detecting the temperature near the predetermined location;
Focus control means for controlling the focus mechanism in accordance with the temperature detected by the temperature detection means (for example, control LSI 230 of projector control board B23, sub CPU 400 of sub control board SS, etc.),
The focus control unit is configured to control the focus mechanism according to the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit after the focus mechanism is temporarily returned to a predetermined reference state while a dark image is projected through the focus mechanism. It is characterized by performing.

  According to such a configuration, the focus mechanism is controlled by, for example, drift correction even by a change in temperature of the projection apparatus, and the drift error accumulated for each drift correction is also maintained at a predetermined reference state while the dark image is projected. Therefore, the image quality of the image projected via the focus mechanism can be effectively suppressed, and the discomfort of the image can be reduced while the behavior of the focus mechanism is difficult to see on a dark image. Can be resolved.

(About Appendix P)
Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays video for a game or the like (for example, JP-A-6-35066 and JP-A-2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

  However, in the above conventional gaming machine, for example, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector body as the operating time becomes longer, so that the optical component or the substrate provided in the projector body causes a problem due to heat, and the plastic lens Due to thermal deformation, the image may become unclear or the focus may be shifted due to focus adjustment. That is, as the temperature change of the projector increases, the image quality of the projected image tends to gradually deteriorate with the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can suppress image quality deterioration due to a temperature change of a projection apparatus and eliminate image discomfort.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix P1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1 or the like) provided with a projection device (for example, projector apparatus B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image,
The projector is
A focus mechanism for projecting an image (for example, the focus mechanism 242 of the projection lens 210);
Temperature detection means (for example, temperature sensor B25 etc.) for detecting the temperature near the predetermined location;
Focus control means for controlling the focus mechanism in accordance with the temperature detected by the temperature detection means (for example, control LSI 230 of projector control board B23, sub CPU 400 of sub control board SS, etc.),
The focus control means has a predetermined temperature range that disables the control of the focus mechanism defined to be changeable according to a temperature change per predetermined time based on the temperature detected by the temperature detection means, Only when the temperature detected by the temperature detection means is outside the predetermined temperature range, the focus mechanism is controlled according to the temperature.

  According to such a configuration, the focus mechanism is controlled by, for example, drift correction even when the temperature of the projection apparatus changes. As a result of the change, drift correction is not always performed depending on temperature conditions. As a result, for example, the drift error accumulated for each drift correction can be reduced as much as possible, image quality deterioration of the image projected through the focus mechanism can be effectively suppressed, and image discomfort is eliminated. be able to.

(About Appendix Q)
Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays video for a game or the like (for example, JP-A-6-35066 and JP-A-2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

  However, in the above conventional gaming machine, for example, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector body as the operating time becomes longer, so that the optical component or the substrate provided in the projector body causes a problem due to heat, and the plastic lens Due to thermal deformation, the image may become unclear or the focus may be shifted due to focus adjustment. That is, as the temperature change of the projector increases, the image quality of the projected image tends to gradually deteriorate with the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can suppress image quality deterioration due to a temperature change of a projection apparatus and eliminate image discomfort.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix Q1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1 or the like) provided with a projection device (for example, projector apparatus B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image,
The projector is
A focus mechanism for projecting an image (for example, the focus mechanism 242 of the projection lens 210);
Temperature detection means (for example, temperature sensor B25 etc.) for detecting the temperature near the predetermined location;
Focus control means for controlling the focus mechanism in accordance with the temperature detected by the temperature detection means (for example, control LSI 230 of projector control board B23, sub CPU 400 of sub control board SS, etc.),
The focus control means includes a first temperature range that disables the control of the focus mechanism defined to be changeable depending on whether or not a demo video is being projected, and a second temperature that is narrower than the first temperature range. The focus mechanism is controlled in accordance with the temperature only when the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is outside the first temperature range during projection of the demo video. During projection of an image other than an image, the focus mechanism is controlled according to the temperature only when the temperature detected by the temperature detection means is outside the second temperature range.

  According to such a configuration, the focus mechanism is controlled by, for example, drift correction even by a change in the temperature of the projection apparatus. Since the first temperature range that is extremely wide and the second temperature range that is relatively narrow are changed, drift correction is not always performed depending on the image being projected together with the temperature. As a result, for example, the drift error accumulated for each drift correction can be reduced as much as possible, image quality deterioration of the image projected through the focus mechanism can be effectively suppressed, and image discomfort is eliminated. be able to.

(About Appendix R)
Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays video for a game or the like (for example, JP-A-6-35066 and JP-A-2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, for example, as the frequency of focus adjustment increases, the focus may be greatly deviated, and the image quality of the projected image may gradually deteriorate with the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress image quality degradation and eliminate image discomfort according to the frequency of focus adjustment. .

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix R1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A projection device (for example, projector device B2) capable of projecting an image on a plurality of projection surfaces (for example, the reflection surfaces of the reflecting portions D1 to D4, the projection surface E11a, the projection surface F1a, etc.), Projection plane drive mechanisms (for example, a front screen drive mechanism E2 and a reel screen drive mechanism F2) that switch by displacing at least one projection plane (for example, the projection plane E11a, the projection plane F1a, etc.) relative to the projection apparatus. Etc.) (for example, gaming machine 1 etc.)
The projector is
A focus mechanism (for example, a focus mechanism 242 of the projection lens 210) for projecting an image on each of the plurality of projection surfaces;
Focus adjustment means (for example, control LSI 230 of projector control board B23, sub CPU 400 of sub control board SS) that adjusts the focus mechanism each time at least one of the plurality of projection planes is switched by the projection plane driving mechanism. Etc.)
A first projection mode in which the projection plane is switched at a predetermined frequency; and a second projection mode in which the projection plane is switched less than the first projection mode;
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the focus adjusting unit performs readjustment after returning the focus mechanism to a predetermined focus reference position, and performs the readjustment in the first projection mode as compared with the second projection mode. It is characterized by increased frequency.
The projection mode includes, for example, a video projection mode by the projector device B2, and may be an effect mode in a game. The frequency of focus position adjustment according to the game (the effect mode, the game mode, etc.), the screen, When the frequency of changing the position of the projection plane E11a and the projection plane F1a changes, the control content of the projector drift correction process can be changed.

  According to such a configuration, the first projection mode in which the frequency of focus mechanism adjustment (focus adjustment) is relatively increased together with the switching of the projection plane is more predetermined than the second projection mode in which those frequencies are relatively low. Depending on the conditions, the frequency of returning to a predetermined focus reference position and readjustment increases, so that the focus adjustment error accumulated for each focus adjustment can be reduced according to the frequency of focus adjustment. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the deterioration of the image quality of the image projected via the image, and to eliminate the discomfort of the image.

(Appendix S)
Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays video for a game or the like (for example, JP-A-6-35066 and JP-A-2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, for example, as the frequency of focus adjustment increases, the focus may be greatly deviated, and the image quality of the projected image may gradually deteriorate with the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress image quality deterioration and eliminate image discomfort even when focus adjustment is frequently performed. And

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix S1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A projection device (for example, projector device B2) capable of projecting an image on a plurality of projection surfaces (for example, the reflection surfaces of the reflecting portions D1 to D4, the projection surface E11a, the projection surface F1a, etc.), Projection plane drive mechanisms (for example, a front screen drive mechanism E2 and a reel screen drive mechanism F2) that switch by displacing at least one projection plane (for example, the projection plane E11a, the projection plane F1a, etc.) relative to the projection apparatus. Etc.) (for example, gaming machine 1 etc.)
The projector is
A focus mechanism (for example, a focus mechanism 242 of the projection lens 210) for projecting an image on each of the plurality of projection surfaces;
Focus adjustment means (for example, control LSI 230 of projector control board B23, sub CPU 400 of sub control board SS) that adjusts the focus mechanism each time at least one of the plurality of projection planes is switched by the projection plane driving mechanism. Etc.)
An internal temperature detecting means for detecting the internal temperature (for example, temperature sensor B25),
The focus adjustment unit adjusts the focus position by the focus mechanism based on preset offset information every time the projection plane is switched, and the focus adjustment unit adjusts the focus according to the temperature detected by the internal temperature detection unit. The focus position by the mechanism is adjusted.

  According to such a configuration, the focus position is adjusted based on the offset information every time the projection plane is switched. At this time, for example, the focus position is adjusted with high accuracy by drift correction according to temperature. When the focus adjustment is frequently performed in a situation where the change occurs, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the image quality and to eliminate the discomfort of the video.

(Appendix S2)
As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The projector is
Video position changing means (for example, control LSI 230 of projector control board B23, sub CPU 400 of sub control board SS, etc.) capable of changing the position of the video projected on the projection plane;
The image position changing means adjusts the position of an image to be projected based on position information in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction each time the projection plane is switched.

  According to such a configuration, the horizontal and vertical positions of the projected image are adjusted each time the projection plane is switched, so that the projection position of the video with respect to each projection plane can be set appropriately.

(About Appendix T)
Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays video for a game or the like (for example, JP-A-6-35066 and JP-A-2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

  However, in the above conventional gaming machine, the angle of view may be greatly shifted every time the screen (projection plane) is switched, and the appearance of the projected image may change gradually with the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and provides a gaming machine that can project an image at an appropriate position even when the projection plane is switched, and can eliminate the discomfort of the image. The purpose is to do.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix T1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A projection device (for example, projector device B2) capable of projecting an image on a plurality of projection surfaces (for example, the reflection surfaces of the reflecting portions D1 to D4, the projection surface E11a, the projection surface F1a, etc.), Projection plane drive mechanisms (for example, a front screen drive mechanism E2 and a reel screen drive mechanism F2) that switch by displacing at least one projection plane (for example, the projection plane E11a, the projection plane F1a, etc.) relative to the projection apparatus. Etc.) (for example, gaming machine 1 etc.)
The projector is
Video position changing means (for example, control LSI 230 of projector control board B23, sub CPU 400 of sub control board SS, etc.) capable of changing the position of the video projected on the projection plane;
The image position changing means adjusts the position of an image to be projected based on position information in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction each time the projection plane is switched.

  According to such a configuration, each time the projection plane is switched, the horizontal and vertical positions of the projected image are adjusted. Therefore, the projection position of the video with respect to each projection plane can be appropriately set, and the video Discomfort can be eliminated.

(Appendix T2)
As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The projector is
A focus mechanism (for example, a focus mechanism 242 of the projection lens 210) for projecting an image on each of the plurality of projection surfaces;
Focus adjustment means (for example, control LSI 230 of projector control board B23, sub CPU 400 of sub control board SS) that adjusts the focus mechanism each time at least one of the plurality of projection planes is switched by the projection plane driving mechanism. Etc.)
When the projection plane is switched, the focus position is adjusted by adjusting the focus mechanism by the focus adjustment unit after the position adjustment of the projected image is performed by the image position changing unit. To do.

  According to such a configuration, when the projection plane is switched, the horizontal and vertical positions of the projected image are adjusted, and then the focus position of the focus mechanism is adjusted, so that the horizontal and vertical directions are adjusted. Degradation of image quality can be suppressed not only by the position but also by the focus position.

(About others)
As a gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine is known (see, for example, JP 2013-13801 A). However, since this pachinko gaming machine does not have a function as a gaming machine equipped with the projector device as in the present invention, it has not been possible to improve interest. The present invention has been made in view of these points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine including a projector device that can improve interest.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Game machine G Cabinet G4 Upper surface wall A Display unit B1 Projector cover B12 Upper wall part B2, X, X ', X "Projector apparatus B20 Power supply circuit B21 Lens unit B22, X22 Case B23 Projector control board B25 Temperature sensor B25a 1st temperature Sensor B25b Second temperature sensor B26a Intake temperature sensor B26b Exhaust temperature sensors B27a to B27c Pulse sensor 210 Projection lens 230 Control LSI
240R, 240G, 240B LED light source 241 DMD
242 Focus mechanism 242A Rack member 242B Lead screw 242C Focus motor 243R, 243G, 243B, 243D, 243Xa, 243Xc Heat sink 244A, 244B Intake fan 245 Exhaust fan 400 Sub CPU
401 SRAM
700 MCU
710 Multi-output scaler LSI
2430, 2431 Radiating plates D1 to D4 Reflector E11a Projection surface (movable projection surface)
F1a projection plane (movable projection plane)
E2 Front screen drive mechanism F2 Reel screen drive mechanism MS Main control board SS Sub control board SK Scaler board RD Reel drive board DS Door relay board FC1 First optical fiber cable FC2 Second optical fiber cable DD19 Sub liquid crystal display DD19T Touch panel

Claims (2)

Game comprising: a projection device capable of projecting an image on a plurality of projection surfaces; and a projection surface drive mechanism that switches by displacing at least one of the plurality of projection surfaces relative to the projection device. Machine,
The projector is
A focus mechanism for projecting an image on each of the plurality of projection surfaces;
A focus adjusting means for adjusting the focus mechanism each time at least one of the plurality of projection planes is switched by the projection plane driving mechanism;
An internal temperature detecting means for detecting the internal temperature,
The focus adjustment unit adjusts the focus position by the focus mechanism based on preset offset information every time the projection plane is switched, and the focus adjustment unit adjusts the focus according to the temperature detected by the internal temperature detection unit. A gaming machine characterized by adjusting a focus position by a mechanism. The projector is
Image position changing means capable of changing the position of the image projected on the projection plane;
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the video position changing unit adjusts a position of a video to be projected based on position information in a horizontal direction and a vertical direction every time the projection plane is switched.

Images